Preview only show first 10 pages with watermark. For full document please download

Dx-600 / 800

Rating
Date

September 2018
Size

11.5MB
Views

1,529
Categories

Computers & electronics Print & Scan Fax machines

Transcript

Order Number: MGCS020301C0 H13 Facsimile DX-600 / 800 ! WARNING This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public. It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product. Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death. © 2002 Matsushita Graphic Communication Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law. This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs). Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder; Distinction of PbF PCB: PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a mark following the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB. Caution: Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB. Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C). ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.; URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs. The contents of this Service Manual are subject to change without notice. Published in Japan. 2 Table of Contents Specifications Table ................................ 5 1.1. Fax Function .............................................5 1.2. Internet Fax Function..............................13 1.3. Printer Function ......................................15 1.4. External View..........................................17 1.5. Control Panel ..........................................19 4.9. Service Modes ..................................... 154 5.1. General Disassembly Flowchart .............20 2.2. Disassembly Instructions ........................21 2.3. Screw Identification Template.................49 Service Modes (For Facsimile) ............ 154 System Description ............................. 199 Disassembly Instructions ..................... 20 2.1. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile) ........ 147 6.1. Mechanical Operation ......................... 199 6.2. Electrical Circuit Explanation................ 208 General Network Information ............. 236 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points .......................................... 50 7.1. Network Protocol.................................. 236 7.2. Layer Functions and Technology ......... 238 7.3. Network Layer ...................................... 242 7.4. Transport Layer .................................... 246 3.1. Required Tools .......................................50 7.5. Upper Layer ......................................... 248 3.2. Periodic Check Points.............................50 7.6. 3.3. Periodic Maintenance Check List ...........51 SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)............ 253 3.4. Updating the Firmware ...........................52 7.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305........................ 254 3.5. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations .......56 7.8. Communication Protocols .................... 260 3.6. SC PC Board ..........................................60 7.9. POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3) ........... 263 3.7. MJR PC Board........................................83 7.10. Troubleshooting from a PC .................. 266 3.8. Power Supply Unit ..................................84 3.9. PNL PC Board ........................................86 7.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP) ............. 267 7.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature ................. 268 3.10. SNS3 PC Board......................................88 3.11. SNS4 PC Board......................................89 7.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature ................... 271 3.12. SNS1 PC Board......................................90 3.13. SNS2 PC Board......................................90 7.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature.................. 275 3.14. CCD PC Board .......................................90 3.15. ILS PC Board..........................................90 7.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP) - Extended Feature .............................. 275 3.16. ACI PC Board .........................................90 3.17. LANB PC Board......................................91 7.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature .............................. 277 3.18. LANC PC Board......................................91 3.19. CST2 PC Board (Optional) .....................92 3.20. SNS2 PC Board (Optional) .....................92 3.21. SRU PC Board (Optional).......................93 7.17. Direct SMTP Transfer - Extended Feature .............................. 279 Troubleshooting .................................... 94 Installation............................................ 280 4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ............94 8.1. Function Key ........................................ 280 4.2. Improper LCD Display ............................95 8.2. Main Unit and Accessories................... 281 4.3. Information Codes (INFO. CODES)........96 8.3. Installing the Accessories..................... 282 4.4. Printed Copy Quality Problems.............108 8.4. Installing the Toner Cartridge............... 283 4.5. Document Feeder (ADF) ......................124 8.5. Loading the Recording Paper .............. 286 4.6. Communications ...................................127 8.6. 4.7. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......133 Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Length ............................ 288 4.8. Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)......................................141 8.7. Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Width .............................. 289 3 Table of Contents 8.8. Connecting the Telephone Line Cable and Power Cord ................................... 290 8.9. Setting the Internet Parameters ........... 291 8.10. Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email........................... 294 8.11. Customizing Your Machine .................. 311 Options and Supplies.......................... 319 9.1 Options and Supplies........................... 319 9.2 Installing Optional 250 Sheet Paper Cassette (UE-409070) ......................... 320 9.3 Installing Handset Kit (UE-403176)...... 322 Schematic Diagram ............................. 323 10.1. General Circuit Diagram ...................... 323 10.2. SC PC Board ....................................... 325 10.3. PNL1 PC Board ................................... 339 10.4. MJR PC Board ..................................... 341 10.5. SNS1 PC Board ................................... 342 10.6. SNS2 PC Board ................................... 343 10.7. SNS3 PC Board ................................... 344 10.8. SNS4 PC Board ................................... 345 10.9. CCD PC Board..................................... 346 10.10.ILS PC Board ....................................... 347 10.11.ACI PC Board ...................................... 348 10.12.Power Supply Unit ............................... 349 10.13.LANB PC Board ................................... 354 10.14.LANC PC Board................................... 356 4 DX-600/800 1 Specifications Table 1.1. Fax Function Items Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) Remarks Main Specifications 1 Compatibility 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 G3 PSTN Line Port Leased Line Port V.24 Line Port Modem Speed Coding Scheme ECM Short Protocol Yes No No 33.6 - 2.4 kbps MMR / MR / MH Yes Yes (B, D) 9 Transmission Speed Approx. 3 sec 10 Transmission Std 8 x 3.85 Fine 8 x 7.7 S-Fine 8 x 15.4 16 x 15.4* Reception Std 8 x 3.85 Fine 8 x 7.7 S-Fine 8 x 15.4 16 x 15.4 Communication Resolution (pels / mm x lines / mm) Scanner Mechanism 1 Scanning Device 2 Scanning Speed 2.8 sec 3.0 sec 5.0 sec 5.3 sec Fine S-Fine 4 Document Size (Max.) 5 Document Size (Min.) With Automatic Fallback Conforms to ITU-T ITU-T Image No. 1 (A4, Std. Resolution) * Interpolated 16 pels/mm CCD Std. Scanning Resolution 3 (pel / mm x lines / mm) ITU-T Std. & Non-Std. (MGCS) Std. Fine S-Fine 10.1 sec 10.6 sec 8 x 3.85 8 x 7.7 8 x 15.4 16 x 15.4* 10.1 x 78.7 in (257 x 2000 mm) 5.8 x 5.0 in (148 x 128 mm) 8.3 in (212 mm) 6 Effective Scanning Width 8.2 in (208 mm) 7 Reduction XMT Letter size document A4 size document Letter size document A4 size document Letter size document A4 size document * Interpolated 16 pels/mm Letter size for USA and Canada A4 size for Other Destinations No 5 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Items Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) 50 sheets* 8 ADF Capacity 30 sheets* 20 sheets 9 Collation Stack Printer Mechanism 1 Recording Method 2 Recording Speed 3 Recording Resolution Copy, Fax PC Printing Data 4 Recording Paper Size *For USA and Canada only, documents must be inserted by staggered feed (stairs-shape). Face Down, A4 / Letter; 0.0024 - 0.0039 in, 12 - 16 lb Bond (0.06 - 0.10 mm, 45 - 60 g/m2) Operating Environment 68°F (20°C), 50%RH *For Other Destinations Face Down, A4 / Letter; 0.0024 - 0.0039 in, 12 - 16 lb Bond (0.06 - 0.10 mm, 45 - 60 g/m2) Face Down, A4 / Letter; 0.0024 - 0.0039 in, 12 - 16 lb Bond (0.06 - 0.10 mm, 45 - 60 g/m2) Yes (Face Down) LP 6.5 ppm 6.2 ppm Letter size paper A4 size paper 406 x 391 dpi 600 x 600 dpi 300 x 300 dpi Letter / A4 / Legal 8.2 in (208 mm) 5 Effective Printing Width 8.0 in (202 mm) 6 Recording Paper Capacity Remarks 250 sheets 7 Collation Stack Yes 8 Consumables Letter size for USA and Canada A4 size for Other Destinations A4 / Letter / Legal (20 lb / 75 g/m2) Memory Collation The Tray capacity is up to 100 sheets See Options and Supplies Section Memory / Clock 1 Standard Memory 4 MB (240 pages) 2 MB (120 pages) 2 Memory Backup 3 Document Memory type Yes Flash ROM 4 Clock Backup 30 minutes ITU-T Image No. 1 (A4, Std. Resolution) By means of a Gold Capacitor 6 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Items Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) Remarks Copy Quality 1 Halftone (Tx) Super Fine (Tx & Rx) 2 dpi x lpi (pels / mm x lines / mm) Original Contrast Selection 3 (Tx) 4 Smoothing (Rx) Fax, Copy PC Printing Data Power Supply 1 Power Requirement 2 Power Consumption Standby Sleep Mode ES=On ES=Off Transmission Reception Copy Maximum Standby Sleep Mode ES=On ES=Off Transmission Reception Copy Maximum Environment 1 Temperature Operation Storage Transport (Max. 72 hours) 2 Relative Humidity Operation Storage Transport (Max. 480 hours) 64-Level Error Diffusion * Halftone (S-Fine) only with the Resolution key Yes* 406 x 391* (16 x 15.4) * Interpolated 16 pels/mm Yes 3-Levels With Auto Picture / Text Recognition Yes No 108 - 132 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz, Single Phase 198 - 255 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz, Single Phase No 8 Wh 23 Wh 19 W 470 W 470 W 470 W 1.2 Wh 6 Wh 21 Wh 17 W 460 W 470 W 470 W No 8 Wh 25 Wh 19 W 480 W 480 W 490 W 2.4 Wh 6.5 Wh 22 Wh 17 W 480 W 480 W 490 W 100 VAC Power Supply 200 VAC Power Supply 100 VAC Power Supply (ES = Energy Saver) 200 VAC Power Supply (ES = Energy Saver) 50 to 95°F ( 10 to 35°C) -4 to 104°F (-20 to 40°C) -4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C) 15 to 70% RH 5 to 85% RH 15 to 85% RH 7 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Items Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) Remarks Standards 1 PSTN 2 Safety 3 EMI FCC Part 68 Industry Canada No. CS-03 UL1950 (UL60950 3rd edition) CSA C22.2 No.950 Class A Class B computing device computing device in FCC Part 15 in FCC Part 15 Construction 1 Dimensions (W x D x H) 2 Weight (Excluding paper) Attachment & Accessories Toner Cartridge Operating Instructions CD-ROM Power Cord Tel Line Cable Doc. Tray (Rx) Consumables 1 Process Type Yield (3% Black, ITU-T 2 Image No. 1 Chart) 3 Low Toner Warning Options Cassette & Deck 1 250 sheets 2 Document Memory 3 Page Memory 4 Battery Backup 72 hours G3 Optional 5 Communication Port 14.6 x 18.0 x 9.8 in (370 x 457 x 250 mm) 14.6 x 18.7 x 9.8 in (370 x 474 x 250 mm) 20 lb (9.0 kg) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) (PDMS) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) Excluding projections LTR Excluding projections A4 Excluding consumable supplies and options UG-5510 for DX-800 / UF-790 Toner Cartridge Approx. 7,500 pages Yes Yes Yes 2 / 4 / 8 MB No No Multi Copy Mode Operation Environment 68°F (20°C), 50% RH, using Letter/A4 paper. Magnetic Sensor A4 / Letter / Legal (20 lb / 75 g/m2) Flash Memory D-RAM No 6 Handset Yes 7 V.24/Encryption Interface 8 PDL No No Specific Destinations only. New Option for DX-600 / 800 / UF-590 / 790. 8 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Items Parallel Port Interface LAN (Network) Printer Interface (GDI) Scanner Interface (TWAIN) Class 2 Fax Modem 9 Interface PC Fax Interface (MGCS) PC Fax Interface (LaserFAX) Document Manager MFP Utilities Languages Control Panel Function Label LCD Display Printouts Operating Instructions Multi-Task Operation 1 Multi Task Operation 2 Direct XMT Reserve 3 Memory XMT Reserve Number of Memory Job 4 Files Dialing/Telephone Features 1 One-Touch Keys 2 One-Touch / Program Keys 3 One-Touch Auto Dialers 4 Abbr. Auto Dialers 5 Total Auto Dialers 6 Max. Tel Number Digits Max. Station Name 7 Characters 8 Directory Search Dialing Full Number Dialing 9 (Buffered Dialing) Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) No Standard Standard* No Standard No Standard Standard No Standard No Standard No* No* Standard Standard Standard Standard English English English English English Remarks *Ethernet 10Base-T / 100Base-Tx *HydraFax / LaserFAX Not Supported English, C-French, Spanish can be selected for USA, Canada. Determined by the Destination. Yes Yes Yes 70 files 10 files 28 4 32 100 132 36 15 Yes With Directory Search key Yes Max. 12 stations Direct Dialing (Monitor Dialing) Yes Voice mode (Monitor Dialing Mode) Requires to press START to start fax communication. Automatic Redialing is not available. 11 Automatic Redialing 12 Manual Redialing Yes Yes 13 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial) Yes 14 Line Monitor Speaker Yes 10 On Monitor Dialing mode only 9 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Items 15 Pulse / Tone Dialing 16 Pulse to Tone Change 17 Flash Key Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) Yes Yes Yes 18 External Telephone Jack Transmission Features 1 Direct Transmission 2 Memory Transmission Quick Memory 3 Transmission Multi-Station Transmission 4 (Sequential Broadcasting) Direct Deferred 5 Transmission Deferred Memory 6 Transmission Deferred Multi-Station 7 Transmission Priority Direct 8 Transmission Priority Memory 9 Transmission 10 Batch Transmission Reception Features 1 Substitute Reception Yes Yes Yes No Yes (Max.144) Yes (Max.112) ADF Transmission Page Retransmission Dialing after 1st page stored Yes ADF Deferred Transmission Yes Max. 10 timers Yes (Max.144) Max. 10 timers Yes Priority ADF Transmission No No Yes Yes 3 Auto Reduction Yes 4 Overlap Printing Yes LTR / A4: 70 - 100%, LGL: 80 -100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Center Alignment LTR / A4: 70 - 100%, LGL: 80 -100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Center Alignment Page End Approx. 0.39 in (10 mm) Yes 5 Receive to Memory Distinctive Ring Detector 6 (DRD) Receive Control 1 Fax / Tel Auto Switch 3 External TAM Interface 4 Remote Reception 10 pps / DTMF Handset or External Telephone 1 2 Fixed Reduction 2 Silent Reception Remarks Yes Specific Destinations only Yes Specific Destinations only No (PSTN) Yes (LAN) No (PSTN) Yes Yes (DTMF) Specific Destinations only Specific Destinations only 10 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Items Polling 1 Polling 2 Turnaround Polling 3 Multi-Station Polling 4 Deferred Polling Deferred Multi-Station 5 Polling 6 Direct Polling Tx 7 Memory Polling Tx 8 Preset Polling Password Temporary Polling 9 Password 10 Continuous Polling Convenience 1 Panel Display 2 Voice Contact 3 Edit File Mode 4 Incomplete File Save 5 Automatic Cover Sheet Copy Features 1 Single Copy 2 Multiple Copy 3 Reduction Copy Copying Resolution 4 dpi x lpi (pels / mm x lines / mm) Certainty 1 Verification Stamp 2 Header / Total Page Print Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) Remarks Yes No Yes (Max.144) Yes Max. 10 timers Yes (Max.144) Max. 10 timers No Yes Yes 1 File Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 406 x 391* (16 x 15.4) 20 x 2 Alphanumeric LCD With View Mode With View Mode Multi Sort Copy only * Interpolated 16 pels/mm Yes Yes 3 Transaction Journal Yes 4 Comm. Journal 5 Last Ind. XMT Journal 6 Power Failure Report List Printouts 1 One-Touch List 2 ABBR. No. List 3 Program List 4 Directory Search List 5 Fax Parameter List 6 File List 7 Ind. XMT Journal 8 Directory Sheet 9 Character Code List Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No 32 Transactions / with View Mode With Image With View Mode 11 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Items Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) Identifications 1 Logo 2 Multiple Logo 3 Character ID 4 Numeric ID Special Communications 1 Password XMT / RCV 2 Selective Reception 3 Relay XMT Request 4 Relay XMT Center 5 Confidential XMT / Polling 6 Confidential Center 7 Mailbox XMT / Polling 8 Mailbox Center 9 File XMT 10 Fax Forward Yes No Yes Yes Yes 12 Sub-Address XMT 13 Sub-Address RCV 14 OMR-XMT Others 1 Access Code Yes No No 16 Characters 20 Digits Closed Network TSI Check Network (Via a Center Station) Received File Transfer NYSE Feature Specific Destinations only T. Routing T. Routing with PC interface Yes 2 PIN Code Access Yes 3 Intelligent Redial (AI) 4 Department Code 5 Energy Saver Mode Yes No Yes 6 Daylight Saving Time Yes 7 Self Diagnostic Function Remote Diagnostic 8 Function 9 Check & Call Function Firmware Update / Download 1 Remote Update 2 Local Update Memory Card (FROM) Parallel Port 3 Download to FROM Card 25 Characters Yes Yes No No No No Yes 10 Boxes No Yes 11 Auto Fax Archive Remarks For USA, Canada and Hong Kong only PBX Access Code 2 Files USA, Canada and Germany only Yes Specific Destinations only Yes Yes Yes Using G3 Protocol Yes No Yes Yes 12 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 1.2. Internet Fax Function Items Main Specifications 1 Communication Protocols 2 Coding Scheme 3 Line Interface Scanner Mechanism 1 Max. Document Size Scanning Resolution 2 (pel/mm x lines/mm) Description DX-600/800 TCP / IP MH / MMR RJ-45 (Ethernet) A4, Letter, Legal 8 x 3.85 8 x 7.7 8 x 15.4 16 x 15.4* Remarks SMTP / MIME Ethernet LAN LAN:16 x 15.4 Scanning Resolution is available with Parameter setting. * Interpolated 16 pels/mm. Transmission Features 1 Multi-Task Operation Yes 2 Memory Transmission Sequential Multi-Station 3 Transmission Simultaneous Multi-Station 4 Transmission 5 Sender Selection G3 / Email Mixed 6 Broadcasting 7 Deferred Transmission Yes Yes 8 Fax Forward Yes 9 Sub-address RCV Yes 10 Mail Header Email Header Print Selection Subject Line LAN Features Yes Yes Yes Yes Random Entry 1 Internet Fax Communication Yes 2 Internet Mail Reception 3 Internet Fax Server Features Internet Fax Relay XMT Email Relay MXT Received Fax / Email Forward PC to FAX Transmission Yes Inbound Routing Phone Book Registration from PC 4 I-Fax Parameters Registration via Email 5 Internet Delivery Confirmation Simultaneous operation of G3 Fax and LAN is available. Received File Transfer, only with I-FAX Option Inbound Routing, only with I-FAX Option All or From / To / Subject only A3 Communication is available with Parameter setting. Yes Yes iFAX → iFAX → G3FAX PC → iFAX → G3FAX Yes Local print available No Yes Using Sub-Address. Local print available Yes Via Email Yes Yes With MDN 13 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Items 6 Network Scanning 7 Network Printing LPR / LPD GDI PDL 8 Secondary DNS 9 DHCP Client Description DX-600/800 Yes (400 dpi*) Yes (600 dpi) Yes No Yes Yes Remarks * Interpolated Win 98 / Me Yes Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (Directory Services) 1 Comm. Journal (w / Image) Yes Email from RCV side to Panasonic I-Fax’s only. 1 Email Address Yes 10 LDAP Certainty ID 14 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 1.3. Printer Function Items Interface Centronics Parallel I/F 1 (IEEE-1284) 2 LAN (Network) 3 USB Port 4 IEEE-1394 Printer Function 1 Printing Size 2 Bypass 3 Stapling 4 Printing Resolution 5 OS 6 GDI 7 PDL (PCL6) 8 PDL (PostScript 2) 9 Duplex Printing 10 Collation Stack Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) No Standard* Standard* No Remarks *ECP Mode *Ethernet 10Base-T / 100Base-Tx No No Letter / A4 / Legal No No 600 dpi Win 9x / Me / Win 9x / Me / NT 4.0 / 2000/ XP NT 4.0 / 2000 Yes No No No Yes 11 Status Monitor No Yes 12 Network Printing 13 Network Status Monitor 14 Smoothing 15 Applicable PC 16 Multi-Task Operation Printing while Fax-XMT from Memory Printing while Fax-RCV into Memory Fax-XMT from Memory while Printing Fax-RCV into Memory while Printing Output to Separate Tray for 17 Printing, Fax, Copy 18 Font 19 Security Print Yes No Yes* No IBM PC, AT or Compatible MH Coding Printer Driver setting Win 9x / Me / NT 4.0 / 2000 : Local Connection *From June Production Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No 15 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Items Description UF-590/790 DX-600/800 (Reference) Remarks Yes 64 Level Error Diffusion Letter size for USA and Canada A4 size for Other Destinations * Interpolated *Via Email Scanning Function 1 Halftone 8.3 in (212 mm) 2 Scanning Width 3 4 5 6 Scanning Resolution Network Scanning Driver 2-Sided Scanning 8.2 in (208 mm) 400 dpi* Yes* - No TWAIN No 16 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 1.4. External View (For USA only) Product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J in effect at date of manufacture. Manufacturer's name and address Factory ID 3 inch (75 mm) 14.6 inch (370 mm) 16.9 inch (430 mm) 9.8 inch (250 mm) 7 inch (177 mm) LTR : 4.8 inch (121 mm) A4 : 5.4 inch (138 mm) LTR : 28.5 inch (725 mm) 13.2 inch (336 mm) 3.6 inch (91 mm) A4 : 29.2 inch (742 mm) 17 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 1.4.1. Serial Number Contents The contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Sequential Production Number 5-Digit Sequential Production Number 00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units A0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units (Letters “I” and “O” are skipped) Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit) 3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation (Except Letters “I” and “O”) For Example: 2MT = DX-600-EB 2MS = DX-800-AU Production Facility Production Year Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is represented as: A ~ T A B C D E F G H I J : : : : : : : : : : 01 (2001) 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 (2010) K L M N O P Q R S T : : : : : : : : : : 11 (2011) 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 (2020) G H I J K L : : : : : : July August September October November December Production Month A B C D E F : : : : : : January February March April May June 18 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 1.5. Control Panel For USA and Canada DX-800 TEL NO. 01 Q 02 12 22 W A SHIFT 03 13 23 E S 04 14 R D 05 15 T F 06 16 07 Y G 17 U H 08 18 I J 09 19 O K 10 20 P L SYMBOL 11 @ 21 Z 24 X 25 C 26 V 27 B 28 N P1 M P2 . P3 - P4 W 03 E 04 R 05 T 06 Y 07 U 08 I 09 O 10 P 11 SPACE For Other Destinations DX-600 01 Q 02 12 22 A 23 13 S Z 24 14 D X 25 15 F C 26 16 G V 17 27 H 28 B 18 J N P1 19 K M P2 20 L . P3 @ 21 - P4 6 19 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 Edition 1.0 Feed Roller (302) 2.2.9 Scanning Glass (308) 2.2.4 ADF Roller (331) 2.2.8 Scanner Block (321) 2.2.8 A4 LED Array (329) 2.2.9 Stamp Solenoid (327) 2.2.5 (1001) 2.2.10 SC PC Board (1036) 2.2.10 SNS4 PC Board (1007) 2.2.10 SNS3 PC Board (1009) 2.2.18 Laser Unit (512) 2.2.18 Eject Roller (303) 2.2.6 Transmit Guide (301) Assy 2.2.4 ILS PC Board (1006) 2.2.10 Transmit Motor (324) 2.2.7 Toner Sensor (513) 2.2.18 SNS1 PC Board (1008) 2.2.16 LANC NCU PC PCBoard Board (1037) (402) 2.2.13 2.14 Printer Motor (626) 2.2.12 Fuser Lamp (732) 2.2.15 Exit Roller (719) 2.2.15 Fuser Roller (709) 2.2.15 Rear Chassis (505) Assy 2.2.16 Transfer Guide (601) 2.2.17 Feed Roller (526) 2.2.17 Pressure Roller (706) 2.2.15 Fuser Unit (701) 2.2.14 PNL1 PC Board (1005) 2.2.3 NCU MJR PC Board (1003) (402) 2.2.13 2.14 Bias Transfer Roller (604) 2.2.19 Rear Cover (105) 2.2.12 Open Control Panel Unit Control Panel Chassis (201) 2.2.3 Rear Cover Open Open Printer Printer Control Cover Cover Panel (XXX) (106) Unit 2.2.12 X.X SNS2 PC Board (1010) 2.2.20 Front Cover (104) 2.2.2 Recording Paper Tray Assy (1107) 2.2.1 Thermistor Assy (728) 2.2.14 Power Supply Unit (1002) 2.2.13 Printer Grease Points 2.2.21 Paper Feed Roller (518) 2.2.11 Clutch Gear Assy 2.2.11 (531) 2.2.11 Paper Feed Solenoid Right Cover (102) 2.2.2 2.1. LANB PC Board Left Cover (103) 2.2.2 Paper Cassette 2.2.1 DX-600/800 2 Disassembly Instructions General Disassembly Flowchart 20 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2. Disassembly Instructions Power Cord (1108), Telephone Line Cable (1109), LAN Cable, Recording Paper Tray Assembly (1107), Paper Cassette 2.2.1. (1) Disconnect the Power Cord (1108). (2) Disconnect the Telephone Line Cable (1109). (3) Disconnect the LAN Cable. (1) (2) (3) (4) Remove the Recording Paper Tray Assembly (1107). (4) (5) Remove the Paper Cassette. (5) 21 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.2. Left Cover (103), Right Cover (102), Front Cover (104), Speaker (117), Separation Rubber (207) (1) Open the Printer Cover (106). (2) Open the Control Panel Unit. (3) Remove 3 Silver Screws (B1). (1) (2) (3) (4) Remove the Left Cover (103). (5) Disconnect Connector CN9 on the SC PC Board (1001). (5) (4) (6) Remove 2 Screws (C2) and 1 Screw (1Y). (7) Remove the Speaker (117). (6) (7) (8) Remove 2 Silver Screws (B1). (9) Remove the SNT Cover (131). (8) (9) 22 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 (11) (10) Remove 2 Silver Screws (B1). (11) Remove the Right Cover (102). (10) (12) Release 3 Latch Hooks. (13) Remove the Front Cover (104). (12) (13) (1) Open the Control Panel Unit. (2) Open the Printer Cover (106). (3) Remove the Separation Rubber Holder Assy (202). (4) Clean the Separation Rubber (207) with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol or replace with a new one. (4) 23 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.3. Control Panel Unit, PNL1 PC Board (1004) (1) Open the Printer Cover (106) (2) Slightly open the Control Panel Unit. (1) (2) (5) (3) Remove the Left Cover (103) and the Right Cover (102). (Refer to 2.2.2.) (4) Disconnect Connector CN14 on the SC PC Board. (5) Release the Stopper Latch (210) and open the Control Panel Unit. (6) Remove the Control Panel Unit. (6) (4) (7) (8) (12) (9) (7) Remove 2 Screws (19). (8) Remove the Control Panel Chassis (201) Assembly. Note: If noise occurs while scanning, clean the Roller Shaft 2 (235) and the Feed Pinch Roller (236) shaft hole with isopropyl alcohol. (9) Remove 15 Screws (7B). (10) Disconnect Connector CN50 on the PNL1 PC Board. (11) Release 1 Latch Hook. (12) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (1004). (10) (11) 24 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.4. Transmit Guide (301) Assembly, Scanning Glass (308) (1) Remove the Left Cover (103), Right Cover (102), and Front Cover (104) (Refer to 2.2.2.). (2) Remove the Control Panel Unit (Refer to 2.2.3.). (3) Release the Harnesses from the clamps. (4) Remove 4 Screws (19). (5) Disconnect 4 Connectors (CN1, 3, 5 and 7) on the SC PC Board. (6) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly. (4)x4 (6) (5) (3) (7) Carefully release the Latch Hook using a Blade-tip Screwdriver. (8) Remove the Scanning Glass (308). (8) (7) (1) (1) Open the Control Panel Unit. (2) Clean the Scanning Glass (308) with a soft cloth, soaked with isopropyl alcohol. (2) (1) (1) Open the Control Panel Unit. (2) Clean the Feed Roller (302), Eject Roller (303) and ADF Roller (331) with a soft cloth, soaked with isopropyl alcohol. (2) (2) (2) 25 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.5. Stamp Assembly, Stamp Solenoid (327) (1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly (Refer to 2.2.4.). (2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326). (2) (3) Remove 1 Screw (19). (4) Remove the Stamp Solenoid (327). (3) (4) 26 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.6. Eject Roller (303) (1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly (Refer to 2.2.4.). (2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326) (Refer to 2.2.5.). (3) Release 2 Latch Hooks. (4) Remove the Ground Plate (317). (3) (4) (3) (5) Release the Latch Hook by using a small Bladetip Screwdriver. (6) Remove 2 D25F Drive Gears (332). (7) Remove D17 Gear (313) and D50 Gear (314). (5) (7) (6) (8) Remove 2 P6C Bushings (342). (9) Remove the Roller Wire Spring (343). (8) (9) Roller Spring Caution: Reinstall the Roller Wire Spring (343) as illustrated. 27 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 (10) (10) Remove 2 P6A Bushings (316). (11) Remove the Eject Roller (303). (11) 28 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.7. Transmit Motor (324) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly (Refer to 2.2.4.). (2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326) (Refer to 2.2.5.). (3) Disconnect the Connector (1020) from the Transmit Motor (324). (4) Remove the ADF Gear (305) and ADF Angular Shaft (338). Caution: When removing the ADF Gear, rotate the Transmit Motor Gear by hand until the Gear Latch Hook can be seen from the inside, under the Transmit Motor. Push down on the Latch Hook to release the ADF Gear. (5) Remove 2 Screws (19). (6) Remove the Transmit Motor (324). Caution: Reinstall the Transmit Motor (324) as illustrated. Caution: Before reassembling, apply EM-50L Grease to the Gear Posts as illustrated. 29 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.8. Scanner Block (321), Mirror 1 (334), Mirror 2 (335), Mirror 3 (336), ADF Roller (331) (1) Remove the Transmit Guide (301) Assembly (Refer to 2.2.4.). (2) Remove the Stamp Assembly (325, 326) (Refer to 2.2.5.). (3) Remove 1 Screw (19). (4) Remove the Harnesses from the hook. (5) Remove the Scanner Block (321). (3) (5) (4) (6) (6) Remove P10 and P6B Bushings (315, 318) by using Blade-tip Screwdriver. (7) Remove the ADF Roller (331). (7) Mirror 3 Clean the Mirror 1 (334), Mirror 2 (335) and Mirror 3 (336) with a soft cloth, soaked with isopropyl alcohol. Mirror 2 Mirror 1 30 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.9. LED Array (329), Feed Roller (302) (1) Remove the Scanner Block (321) (Refer to 2.2.8.). (2) Remove the Ground Plate (317). (3) Remove 4 Screws (19). (4) Release the Harness from the hook. (5) Remove the LED Bracket (306) Assembly. (3) (2) (4) (5) (6) (6) Remove 3 LED Clips (307). (7) Remove the LED Array (329). Caution: When reinstalling the LED Array, position the 3 LED Clips at the appropriate locations. (7) (9) (8) Remove the Gears, Bushings and the Roller Wire Spring (Refer to 2.2.6.). (9) Remove 2 P6A Bushings (316). (10) Remove the Feed Roller (302). (10) 31 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.10. LANB PC Board (1036), SC PC Board (1001), ILS PC Board (1006), SNS4 PC Board (1007) (1) Remove the Left Cover (Refer to 2.2.2.). (2) Remove 1 Screw (19). (3) Release 2 Locking Spacers (431) and remove the LANB PC Board (1036). (4) Disconnect the LANB-LANC Harness (1838) on the LANB PC Board (CN97). (3) (4) (2) (5) Remove 2 Locking Spacers (431). (6) Disconnect all Connectors on SC PC Board. (7) Remove 7 Screws (19). (8) Remove the LANB Bracket (430). (9) Remove the SC PC Board (1001). (6) (5) (7)x7 (8) (10) Move all Harnesses away from the front of the Door Sensor. (11) Release the Latch Hook and remove the ILS PC Board (1006). (12) Disconnect Connector CN73 on the ILS PC Board (1006). (11) (12) (13) Disconnect Connectors CN85 and 87 on the SNS4 PC Board. (14) Remove 1 Screw (19). (15) Lift up the Paper Exit Actuator (730) and remove the SNS4 PC Board (1007). (14) (15) (13) 32 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.11. Paper Feed Solenoid (531), Clutch Gear Assembly, Paper Feed Roller (518) (1) Remove the Right Cover (102) (Refer to 2.2.2.). (2) Remove 1 Screw (19). (3) Remove the Paper Feed Solenoid (531). Note: If the Paper Feed Solenoid does not work properly due to dust, etc. Remove the spring to disassemble and clean the magnet and plate as illustrated. (2) (3) (4) Remove 1 Screw (19). (5) Remove the Feed Roller Ground Spring (628). (6) Remove the Snap Ring (B9). (7) Remove the Clutch Gear Assembly. (7) (6) (5) (4) (8) Place the machine on its Rear side. (9) Remove 2 Screws (19). (10) Remove the Feed Roller Assembly. (9) (10) Clean the Paper Feed Rollers (518) with a soft cloth, soaked with isopropyl alcohol. 33 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 (11) (11) Remove 2 Screws (4N). (12) Remove the Paper Feed Rollers (518). (12) 34 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.12. Printer Cover (106), Rear Cover (105), Printer Motor (626) (1) Remove the Left Cover and the Right Cover (Refer to 2.2.2.). (2) Release the hooks and remove the Printer Cover (106). (2) (3) Remove 2 Silver Screws (B1). (4) Remove the Rear Cover (105). (3) (4) (8)x5 (5) (6) (7) (9) (5) Remove 1 Screw (19). (6) Remove the Ground Wire (542). (7) Disconnect the Connector from the Printer Motor. (8) Remove 5 Screws (19). (9) Remove the Printer Motor Bracket (616) Assembly. Caution: The Gears underneath may dislodge when the Motor Bracket is removed. (10) Remove 2 Screws (4N). (11) Remove the Printer Motor (626). (10) (11) 35 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.13. LANC PC Board (1037), MJR PC Board (1003), Power Supply Unit (1002) (1) Remove 2 Screws (19). (2) Remove the LANC PC Board (1037) Assembly. (2) (1) (3) Disconnect the LANB-LANC Harness (1038). (3) (3) (4) Remove 2 Screws (C8). (5) Remove the LANC PC Board (1037). (4) (5) (7) (9) (10) (8) Caution: Make sure the Power Cord (1108) is unplugged. Note: If removing only the Power Supply Unit, skip steps (8), (9) and (10). (6) Remove the Rear Cover (105) (Refer to 2.2.12.). (7) Disconnect the Connectors (CN28 and 29) on the MJR PC Board. (8) Remove 2 Screws (19). (9) Release the Latch Hook of Locking Card Spacer (405). (10) Remove the MJR PC Board (1003). 36 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 (11) Remove 5 Screws (19). (12) Remove the L Power Plate (401). (11)x5 (12) (13) (15) (16) (14)x4 (13) Disconnect the Connectors (CN101, 102, 103, 201 and 202) on the Power Supply Unit (1002). (14) Remove 4 Screws (19). (15) Remove 1 Screw (19) and 1 Washer (G8). (16) Remove the Power Supply Unit (1002). (13) 37 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.14. Fuser Unit, Thermistor Assembly (728) (1) Remove the Rear Cover (Refer to 2.2.12.). (2) Remove 1 Screw (19). (3) Remove the Fuser Top Cover (733). (4) Disconnect the Connectors CN85 and CN87 on the SNS4 PC Board (1007). (2) (3) (4) (5) Disconnect the Connector CN102 on the Power Supply Unit (423). (6) Remove 1 Screw (4N). (7) Remove the FG1 Harness (629). (7) (6) (5) (8) Remove 4 Screws (19). (9) Remove the Fuser Unit. (8) (9) (10) Remove 1 Screw (1Q). (11) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (728). (10) (11) 38 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.15. Fuser Lamp (732), Exit Roller (719), Fuser Roller (709), Pressure Roller (706) (1) Remove the Rear Cover (Refer to 2.2.12.) and the Fuser Unit (Refer to 2.2.14.). (2) Remove 1 Screw (4N). (3) Remove the PSU-Fuser Harness (1028) and Fuser Lamp Terminal B (731). (4) Remove the Fuser Lamp (732). Caution: When reinstalling the Fuser Lamp, make sure that the Fuser Lamp is inserted into the Fuser Unit as illustrated. Do not touch the glass portion of the Fuser Lamp with bare hands. Grease from fingerprints will shorten its life cycle, use isopropyl alcohol to clean fingerprints. (2) (3) (4) Caution: When reinstalling the Fuser Lamp, make sure that both ends of the Fuser Lamp fit into the projected area of the Fuser Lamp Terminal A (724) and the Fuser Lamp Terminal B (731). (6) Black (7) (5) Remove the E22 Gear (722). Caution: You may need to use force to pull out the Gear. (6) Remove the Right and Left P3.5L11.2 Bushings (720 and 721). (7) Remove the Exit Roller (719). White (5) (8) Remove 2 Screws (4N). (9) Remove the Fuser Cover (723). (8) (9) 39 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 (10) Remove 2 Pressure Springs (708). (10) (11) Remove the E14 Gear (714). Caution: You may need to use force to pull out the Gear. (14) (12) (12) Remove the 2 E18 Gears (713). (13) Remove 2 C-Rings (712). (14) Remove the E24 Drive Gear (711). (15) Remove 2 P17L6.8 Bushings (710). (15) (11) (13) (16) Remove the Fuser Roller (709). Caution: Do not scratch the surface of the Fuser Roller when removing or reinstalling it. (16) (17) (18) (17) Remove 1 Screw (4N). (18) Remove the Lower Paper Exit Guide (703). 40 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 (19) Remove 2 P6L5.5 Bushings (707). (20) Remove the Pressure Roller (706). Caution: Do not scratch the surface of the Pressure Roller when removing or reinstalling it. (20) (19) 41 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.16. Rear Chassis (505), SNS1 PC Board (1008) (1) Remove the Power Supply Unit (Refer to 2.2.12.). (2) Remove the SC PC Board (Refer to 2.2.12.). (3) Remove the Fuser Unit (Refer to 2.2.14.). (4) Remove 6 Screws (19). (5) Remove the Bracket (403). (6) Remove the Rear Chassis (505). (4) (6) (5) (4) (7) Disconnect Connectors CN80 and CN81 on the SNS1 PC Board (1008). (8) Remove 1 Screw (19). (9) Remove the SNS1 PC Board (1008). (7) (8) (9) 42 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.17. Transfer Guide (601) Assembly, Feed Roller (526) (1) Remove the Rear Chassis (Refer to 2.2.16.). (2) Remove 2 Screws (C8). (3) Disconnect Connector CN80 on the SNS1 PC Board (1008). (4) Remove the Transfer Guide (601) Assembly. (2) (3) (4) (5) Remove the 2 Snap Rings. (B9). (6) Remove the Feed Roller (526). (6) (5) (7) Remove the Roller Gear (529). (8) Remove 2 P6L5 Bushings (527, 528). (8) (7) White Black 43 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.18. Toner Sensor (513), Laser Unit [LSU] (512), SNS3 PC Board (1009) (1) Remove the Transmit Guide Assembly (Refer to 2.2.4.). (2) Remove 2 Screws (19). (3) Remove Ground Wire (542). (4) Remove the CCD Shield Plate (533). (2) (4) (3) (5) Remove 1 Screw (19). (6) Disconnect Connector CN84 on the SNS3 PC Board (1009). (7) Remove the Toner Sensor Spring Plate (506) Assembly. (5) (7) (6) Note: When reinstalling, make sure that the Toner Sensor Spring Plate is inserted into the 2 notches in the main frame as shown in the illustration. DX-600 (8) Remove the Toner Sensor (513). (9) Disconnect the Connector on the Toner Sensor. DX-800 (8) DX-600 (9) (9) (8) 44 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 (11)x4 (12) (11) (10) Disconnect 2 Connectors on the Laser Unit (512). (11) Remove 4 Screws (1Y). (12) Remove the Laser Unit (512). (10) (13) (14) (13) Disconnect Connectors CN83 and CN84 on the SNS3 PC Board (1009). (14) Remove 1 Screw (19). (15) Lift up the No Paper Actuator (525) and Remove the SNS3 PC Board (1009). (13) (15) (14) 45 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.19. Bias Transfer Roller (604) (1) Remove the CCD Shield Plate (Refer to 2.2.18.). (2) Remove 2 Screws (19). (3) Remove the BTR Guide (602). (2) (3) Black White (4) (4) Release the Latch Hook on the Transfer Guide (601) Assembly as illustrated and remove the Bias Transfer Roller (604). Caution: • Do not touch the surface of the Bias Transfer Roller. Clean the Bias Transfer Roller only with a dry cloth. • When cleaning or replacing the Bias Transfer Roller, clean both sides of the Transfer Guide with isopropyl alcohol. 46 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.20. SNS2 PC Board (1010) (1) Place the machine on its rear side. (2) Remove 1 Screw (19). (3) Remove the Plate A (507). (3) (2) (4) Remove 1 Screw (19). (5) Disconnect Connector CN82 (538) on the SNS2 PC Board (1010). (6) Remove the SNS2 PC Board (1010). (5) (4) (6) 47 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.2.21. Printer Grease Points Before reassembling, apply EM-50L Grease as described below. (1) B83D22 Gear G (622) : Gear surface (2) D60D20 Gear B (621) : Rib surface (3) D55 Gear F (619) : Gear surface (4) D55 Gear F (619) : Gear Side surface (3) (2) (4) (1) 48 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2.3. Screw Identification Template Ref No. Part No. Figure Remark 19 XTB3+8J Screw 23 XYN3+F8 Screw 24 XYN4+F8 Screw 1Q XYN3+F10 Screw 1Y XTB3+10J Screw 4N XSN3+W8FC Screw 7B XTB26+6J Screw A9 DZPA000001 Screw B1 DZPB000007 Silver Screw B4 XTB3+8JK Screw B5 XSB4+10BN Screw B9 DZJM000171 Snap Ring C2 DZPB000020 Screw C8 XTW3+8SFC Screw 49 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points 3.1. Required Tools No. 1 2 3 4 5 3.2. Tool Soft Cloth Isopropyl Alcohol Phillips Screwdriver (#2) Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2) Blade-tip Screwdriver (3/32 in) No. 6 7 8 9 10 Tool Tweezer Pliers Cotton Swab Brush Molykote EM-50L Grease (Available from Dow Corning, URL: http://www.dowcorning.com) Periodic Check Points 50 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.3. Periodic Maintenance Check List The chart outlined below is a general guideline for maintenance. The example list is for an average usage of 50 transmitted and received documents per day. Needless to say, the environmental conditions and actual use will vary these factors. The chart below is for reference only. Mechanical Parts Printer Motor Ref. No. 626 Toner Cartridge Paper Feed Roller 518 Feed Roller 526 904 Receiver Bias Transfer Roller 604 Unit Fuser Unit 701 Fuser Roller 709 Pressure Roller 706 Roller Shaft 2 235 Feed Pinch Roller * Shaft Hole ADF Roller 236 331 Separation Rubber 207 Feed Roller 302 Transmitter Eject Roller Unit 303 Scanning Glass 308 Mirrors Transmit Motor 334 335 336 324 "x" Stamp Head 325 Cleaning Replacement/Adjustment Cycle Procedure Cycle Procedure 100,000 documents Refer to Ch 2.2.12. approx 7,500 pages (See Note) 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.11. Ch 2.2.11. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to Refer to documents Ch 2.2.17. Ch 2.2.17. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.19. Ch 2.2.19. When replacing Print Cleaning 50,000 documents Refer to Cartridge chart Ch 2.2.14. When the Recording Refer to (Included as part of Refer to Paper wraps itself Ch 2.2.15. the Fuser Unit) Ch 2.2.15. around the roller. When the Recording Refer to (Included as part of Refer to Paper wraps itself Ch 2.2.15. the Fuser Unit) Ch 2.2.15. around the roller. 30,000 documents Refer to Ch 2.2.3. 30,000 documents Refer to Ch 2.2.3. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.4. Ch 2.2.8. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.2. Ch 2.2.2. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.4. Ch 2.2.9. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to 30,000 documents Refer to documents Ch 2.2.4. Ch 2.2.6. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to documents Ch 2.2.4. 12 months or 10,000 Refer to documents Ch 2.2.8. - - 100,000 documents - - 5,000 documents Refer to Ch 2.2.7. Refer to Ch 2.2.5. Note The number of pages is based on the ITU-T Image No. 1 Test Chart using Multi-Copy mode. Operation environment 68°F (20°C), 50% RH, using A4 paper. 51 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.4. Updating the Firmware Unlike other machines with removable EPROM (Erasable Programmable ROM), this machine is equipped with a F-ROM (Flash ROM) as standard. The F-ROM offers the flexibility of quick and easy firmware updates. The firmware of the machine can be updated with the removable F-ROM Card. (Refer to Section 5.1.9) The following is the basic procedure to update the firmware of the machine. The details are described in the Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions. 3.4.1. Creating a Master Firmware Card A.Utilizing the Firmware Update Tool 1. Install the Firmware Update Tool. 2. Install a Flash Memory Card (2 MB x 2, 4 MB or higher) into the machine. 3. Follow the instructions included in the Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions. B.Copy the Firmware from an Existing Machine 1. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 2. Install a Flash Memory Card (2 MB x 2, 4 MB or higher) into the machine with the Panasonic Logo facing outwards. 3. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. 4. Perform the Service Mode 9-2 (Firmware Backup). 5. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card. 6. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" to return to standby. 7. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 8. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine. 9. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. 10. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines. 3.4.2 Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card 1. Before starting, print the Fax and Function Parameter Lists. 2. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine with the Panasonic Logo facing outwards. 4. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. 5. Perform the Service Mode 9-1-1 (Firmware Update). 6. The firmware is copied into the machine. 7. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby. 8. Perform the Service Mode 6 (Parameter Initialization). 9. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine. 11. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. 12. Reprogram the Fax and/or Function Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are other than factory default. 52 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.4.3. Erasing the Master Firmware Card 1. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine with the Panasonic Logo facing outwards. 3. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. 4. Perform the Service Mode 9-5 (Erace Flash Card). 5. The firmware is erased from the card and return to Service Mode default display. 6. Press "STOP" twice to return to standby. 7. Unplug the Power Cord to turn the machine OFF. 8. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine. 9. Plug in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. 3.4.4. Firmware Version HOST : DX-800 A A V1.xxxx AU Destination Code (Fax) AU : USA / Canada Firmware Version (V1.xxxx) Language Code A : US English, C-French & Spanish B : US English, Spanish & Portuguese b : English, French & Spanish g : German, French & Italian Firmware Type A : Standard B : Optional Model Number 53 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 HOST : DX-600 A A V1.xxxx AB Destination Code (Fax) AB : UK Firmware Version (V1.xxxx) Language Code A : US English, C-French & Spanish B : US English, Spanish & Portuguese b : English, French & Spanish g : German, French & Italian Firmware Type A : Standard B : Optional Model Number 3.4.5. Updating the DX-800 Firmware (2) (1) Unplug the Power Cord. (2) Open the Printer Cover. (3) Remove the Memory Card Cover. Printer Cover Memory Card Cover (3) (4) Insert the Flash Memory Card gently into the card slot with the Panasonic logo facing to the outside of the machine. Caution: Installing the Flash Memory Card in the wrong direction may damage the connecting pins inside the machine. Memory Card (4) 54 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Control Panel Unit (5) (6) (5) Open the Control Panel Unit. (6) Activate the Read Point Sensor with your finger and plug in the Power Cord. (7) Wait approximately 10 seconds, release the Read Point Sensor, close the Control Panel Unit (ADF) and the Printer Cover. (8) Allow the unit to complete the Firmware Update (approx. 1-minute). When completed, the unit will reboot and progress to the Standby Mode. (9) Unplug the Power Cord. (10) Remove the Flash Memory Card. (11) Re-install the Memory Card Cover. (12) Plug in the Power Cord. (13) Perform Parameter Initialization. 55 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.5. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Signal Name +24V +24VD +24VM +3.3V +5V +5VP -5V A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 ACTIVITY AGND Black (L) Charge D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Description +24 VDC Power Supply +24 VDC Power Supply +24 VDC Power Supply (Motors) +3.3 VDC Power Supply +5 VDC Power Supply +5 VDC Pilot Power Supply (Sleep Mode) -5 VDC Power Supply Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal Address Signal LANB PCB / LANC PCB Activity Signal Ground AC Power Supply Charge Current: 200 µA (AC 300 Hz Sine Wave) & DC Charge Voltage Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal 56 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Signal Name D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7 Development DOS E FCK1 FCK2 FG FR FSG GLED GND HLIN1 HLIN2 ID0 ID1 ID2 L+5V L1 (R) L2 (T) LDRE LDSC1 LDSP1 LINK MGND MIC (-) MIC (+) MMnA MMnB MMpA MMpB MTnA MTnB Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Description Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Development Voltage (AC 1.65 kHz Square Wave) & DC Voltage Output Signal Data Read/Write Enable Signal Shift Register Clock Shift Register Clock Ground Reset Signal Data Transfer Enable Signal GND for LED Ground Line Signal for the Fax Handset Line Signal for the Fax Handset Flash Memory Card ID Flash Memory Card ID Flash Memory Card ID Laser Circuit +5 VDC Power Supply Line Signal Line Signal Timing Sensor and No Cassette Sensor LED Drive Current No Cassette Sensor LED Drive Current No Paper Sensor LED Drive Current LANB PCB/ LANC PCB Link Signal Ground Handset Microphone Handset Microphone Motor Drive Signal Motor Drive Signal Motor Drive Signal Motor Drive Signal Stepping Signal Stepping Signal 57 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Signal Name MTpA MTpB nADF1 nADF2 nBPNT nCCHK1 nCCHK2 nCD nCE1 nCE2 nCR1 nCRCK nDRCK nESEN nFAULT nFAULT nHSYNC nINIT nLDON nLEDON nMB4 nMPOFF nOE nOP nPCHK1 nPCHK2 nPMCK nPMON nPMRY nPWSAVE nRSEN nSSR nSTAMPON nS/H nTR0 nVIDEO nWEH nWEL OS pADF2 pBZCLK pPNLRD pPNLRST pPNLSD Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Description Stepping Signal Stepping Signal Paper Feed Roller Solenoid Control Signal Paper Feed Roller Solenoid Control Signal Read Point Detection Signal No Cassette Detection Signal No Cassette Detection Signal (2nd Cassette) Flash Memory Card Detection Signal +5 VDC Power Supply Low Enable Charge Control DC Output Charge Control DC Output Development +AC Clock Paper Exit Signal Data Available / Error Condition (Peripheral→Host) Fan Ready Signal Horizontal Synchronous Signal Reserve Request / Initialize (Host→Peripheral) Laser Control LED Enable Signal Flash Memory Size Energy Saver Mode Control Signal Read Signal - Low Enable 2nd Feeder Unit Detection Signal No Paper Sensor Detection Signal No Paper Detection Signal (2nd Cassette) Tetragon Motor Clock Tetragon Motor Control Signal Tetragon Motor Ready Signal Energy Saver Mode Transport Signal Timing Sensor Detection Signal Fuser Lamp Control Signal Stamp Control Signal Sample Hold Signal Transfer Control Cleaning Output Laser Control Write H Signal - Low Enable Write L Signal - Low Enable Output Signal Feed Roller Drive Clutch Control Signal (2nd Cassette) Buzzer Signal Reception Signal Panel Reset Signal Transmission Signal 58 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Signal Name pCMLD pCTON pHKOF pSPKOT R/W RCV (-) RCV (+) RDY / nBSY RS RSV RXRX+ SNCMN TGND TH1 TH2 TONER Transfer TXTX+ 5V nWAKUP White (N) Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Description Line Switching Relay Drive Signal Ring Detection Signal External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal Line Signal, Key Tone, Ringer Data Read/Write Select Signal Handset Receiver Handset Receiver Not Used Register Select Signal Not Used Reception Data "-" Signal Reception Data "+" Signal +2 VDC Power Supply Ground Thermistor Output Signal Thermistor Output Signal Remaining Toner Level Signal Transfer Current: (+3 µA) & Cleaning Voltage: (-1500 V) Transmission Data "-" Signal Transmission Data "+" Signal +5 VDC Power Supply Energy Saver Mode Enable AC Power Supply 59 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.6. SC PC Board CN1 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN1-1 +24V LED Array CN1-2 nLEDON LED Array Signal Waveform +24V +24 VDC Power Supply LED Enable Signal Approx.+13V(H) LED On Function LED Off 0V(L) CN3 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN3-1 +24V Stamp Solenoid CN3-2 N.C. CN3-3 nSTAMPON Signal Waveform +24V Function +24 VDC Power Supply Not Used Stamp Solenoid Stamp Off 0V +24V Stamp Control Signal Stamp On CN5 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN5-1 MTnB Transmit Motor Signal Waveform +24V Function Stepping Signal 0V CN5-2 MTpB Transmit Motor +24V Stepping Signal 0V CN5-3 MTnA Transmit Motor +24V Stepping Signal 0V CN5-4 MTpA Transmit Motor +24V Stepping Signal 0V 60 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 CN6 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN6-1 +24V POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-1 CN6-2 +24V POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-2 CN6-3 GND POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-3 CN6-4 CN6-5 GND GND Signal Waveform Function +24V +24 VDC Power Supply +24V +24 VDC Power Supply Ground 0V POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-4 Ground 0V POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-5 CN6-6 +3.3V POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-6 CN6-7 +5V POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-7 CN6-8 -5V POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-8 CN6-9 +5VP POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-9 CN6-10 nMPOFF POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-10 Ground 0V +3.3V +5V nSSR +5 VDC Power Supply -5 VDC Power Supply -5V +5V +6 (Energy Saver Mode) CN6-11 +3.3 VDC Power Supply POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-11 7V +5 VDC Pilot Power Supply, that provides power to the active components during the Sleep Mode. Energy Saver Mode Control Signal 0V Fuser Lamp Control Signal Fuser Lamp ON 61 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 CN7 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN7-1 FR CCD PCB CN30-1 Signal Waveform Function +5V(H) Reset Signal 0V(L) 1 s CN7-2 FCK1 CCD PCB CN30-2 Shift Register Clock 1 s1 s +5V(H) 0V(H) CN7-3 FCK2 CCD PCB CN30-3 Shift Register Clock 1 s1 s +5V(H) 0V(H) CN7-4 FSG CCD PCB CN30-4 +5V(H) Data Transfer Enable Signal 0V(L) 1 s CN7-5 AGND 2.4ms CCD PCB CN30-5 Ground 0V CN7-6 +5V CCD PCB CN30-6 CN7-7 DOS CCD PCB CN30-7 CN7-8 OS CCD PCB CN30-8 +5V +5 VDC Power Supply Output Signal +3.0V 4.5V Output Signal 2.4ms 3.5V 4.5V Max.1.0V CN9 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN9-1 pSPKOT SPEAKER CN9-2 GND Signal Waveform Function +2V (Max) -2V (Min) SPEAKER Line Signal, Key Tone, Ringer Ground 0V 62 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 CN12 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-1 GND Flash Memory Card Signal Waveform Function Ground 0V CN12-2 D3 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-3 D4 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-4 D5 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-5 D6 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-6 D7 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-7 nCE1 Flash Memory Card CN12-8 A11 Flash Memory Card +5V +5 VDC Power Supply Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-9 nOE Flash Memory Card Read Signal - Low Enable +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-10 A12 Flash Memory Card +5V(H) Address Signal 0V(L) CN12-11 A10 Flash Memory Card +5V(H) Address Signal 0V(L) 63 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-12 A9 Flash Memory Card Signal Waveform Function Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-13 A14 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-14 A15 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-15 nWEL Flash Memory Card Write L Signal - Low Enable +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-16 RDY / nBSY Flash Memory Card CN12-17 +5V Flash Memory Card CN12-18 N.C. Flash Memory Card CN12-19 A17 Flash Memory Card Not Used +5V +5 VDC Power Supply Not Used +5V(H) Address Signal 0V(L) CN12-20 A16 Flash Memory Card +5V(H) Address Signal 0V(L) CN12-21 A13 Flash Memory Card +5V(H) Address Signal 0V(L) CN12-22 A8 Flash Memory Card +5V(H) Address Signal 0V(L) 64 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-23 A7 Flash Memory Card Signal Waveform Function Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-24 A6 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-25 A5 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-26 A4 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-27 A3 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-28 A2 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-29 A1 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-30 D0 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-31 D1 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-32 D2 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-33 nWEH Flash Memory Card Write H Signal - Low Enable +5V(H) 0V(L) 65 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-34 GND Flash Memory Card Signal Waveform Function Ground 0V CN12-35 GND Flash Memory Card Ground 0V CN12-36 nCD Flash Memory Card CN12-37 D11 Flash Memory Card 5V(H) Flash Memory Card Detection Signal H: Card Not Installed 0V(L) L: Card Installed Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-38 D12 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-39 D13 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-40 D14 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-41 D15 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-42 nCE2 Flash Memory Card Low Enable +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-43 N.C. CN12-44 RSV Not Used Flash Memory Card Not Used 66 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-45 RSV Flash Memory Card CN12-46 A18 Flash Memory Card Signal Waveform Function Not Used Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-47 A19 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-48 A20 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-49 A21 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-50 A22 Flash Memory Card Address Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-51 +5V Flash Memory Card CN12-52 N.C. Flash Memory Card Not Used CN12-53 GND Flash Memory Card Ground +5V +5 VDC Power Supply 0V CN12-5456 N.C. Flash Memory Card Not Used CN12-57 RSV Flash Memory Card Not Used CN12-58 N.C. Flash Memory Card Not Used 67 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN12-59 nMB4 Flash Memory Card Signal Waveform or Function Flash Memory Size +5V(H) H: 8MB L: Others 0V(L) CN12-60 RSV Flash Memory Card Not Used CN12-61 N.C. Flash Memory Card Not Used CN12-62 ID2 Flash Memory Card +5V(H) Flash Memory Card ID or 0V(L) CN12-63 ID1 Flash Memory Card +5V(H) Flash Memory Card ID or 0V(L) CN12-64 D8 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-65 D9 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-66 D10 Flash Memory Card Data Signal +5V(H) 0V(L) CN12-67 ID0 Flash Memory Card +5V(H) Flash Memory Card ID or 0V(L) CN12-68 GND Flash Memory Card Ground 0V 68 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 CN14 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN14-1 GND PNL PCB CN50-1 Signal Waveform Function Ground 0V CN14-2 +5V PNL PCB CN50-2 +5V +5 VDC Power Supply CN14-3 +5VP PNL PCB CN50-3 +5V +5 VDC Pilot Power Supply, that provides power to the active components during the Sleep Mode. CN14-4 GND PNL PCB CN50-4 Ground 0V CN14-5 pPNLSD PNL PCB CN50-5 +5V Transmission Signal 0V CN14-6 pPNLRD PNL PCB CN50-6 +5V Reception Signal 0V CN14-7 nPWSAVE PNL PCB CN50-7 Energy Saver Mode +5V Standby CN14-8 nWAKUP 0V PNL PCB CN50-8 +5V 0V CN14-9 pPNLRST PNL PCB CN50-9 +5V 0V CN4-10 pBZCLK Energy Saver Mode Transport Signal PNL PCB CN50-10 +5V Energy Saver Mode Enable H: Enable L: Disable Panel Reset Signal H: Reset L: Not Reset Buzzer Signal 0V CN4-11 nBPNT PNL PCB CN50-11 +3.3V Read Point Detection Signal L: Detect ON 69 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 CN18 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN18-1 L2 (T) MJR PCB CN28-1 CN18-3 L1 (R) Signal Waveform Function Line Transformer Input Signal MJR PCB CN28-3 Ground 0V CN18-6 +24V MJR PCB CN29-1 +24V +24 VDC Power Supply CN18-7 +5VP MJR PCB CN29-2 +5V +5 VDC Power Supply CN18-8 GND MJR PCB CN29-3 Ground 0V CN18-9 pCMLD MJR PCB CN29-4 Line Switching Relay Drive Signal H : CML On L : CML Off +5V(H) 0V(L) CN18-10 pCTON MJR PCB CN29-5 CN18-11 pHKOF MJR PCB CN29-6 Ring Detection Signal above +3V(H) Ring Detected H : Ring Detected L : Ring Not Detected 0V External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal (Phone Line must be connected) H : Off Hook L : On Hook +5V(H) 0V(L) CN52 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN52-1 TH1 Thermistor Assembly Signal Waveform Function 5V Thermistor Output Signal 0V CN52-2 TH2 Thermistor Assembly 5V Thermistor Output Signal 0V 70 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 CN53 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN53-1 +24VM POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-12 CN53-2 nDRCK POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-13 Signal Waveform Function +24V +24 VDC Power Supply Development +AC Clock +24V 0V CN53-3 nCRCK POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-14 +24V Charge Control DC Output 0V CN53-4 nCR1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-15 +24V Charge Control DC Output 0V CN53-5 nTR0 POWER SUPPLY UNIT CN103-16 +24V Transfer Control Cleaning Output 0V CN54 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN54-1 MMpA Main Motor CN118-1 Signal Waveform Function +24V Motor Drive Signal 0V CN54-2 +24VM Main Motor CN118-2 +24V CN54-3 MMnA Main Motor CN118-3 +24V +24 VDC Power Supply Motor Drive Signal 0V CN54-4 MMpB Main Motor CN118-4 +24V Motor Drive Signal 0V CN54-5 +24VM Main Motor CN118-5 +24V +24 VDC Power Supply 71 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN54-6 MMnB Main Motor CN118-6 Signal Waveform Function +24V Motor Drive Signal 0V CN56 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN56-1 +24VM Paper Feed Solenoid CN56-2 nADF1 Signal Waveform Function +24V Paper Feed Solenoid ON +24V (H) +24 VDC Power Supply Paper Feed Roller Solenoid Control Signal 0V (L) CN57 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN57-1 +24V ILS PCB CN73-1 CN57-2 N.C. CN57-3 +24VD Signal Waveform Function +24V +24 VDC Power Supply Not Used ILS PCB CN73-3 Cover Open 0V (L) Printer Cover Detection +24V (H) Signal Cover Closed CN58 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN58-1 nCCHK1 SNS4 PCB CN87-1 Signal Waveform Function No Cassette Detection Signal L: No Cassette +5V(H) 0V(L) CN58-2 GND SNS4 PCB CN87-2 Ground 0V CN58-3 nRSEN SNS4 PCB CN87-3 +5V(H) Timing Sensor Detection Signal L: Detect 0V(L) 72 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Signal Name Pin No. CN58-4 N.C. Destination Signal Waveform Function Not Used CN58-5 +5V SNS4 PCB CN87-5 CN58-6 nESEN SNS4 PCB CN87-6 +5V +5 VDC Power Supply Paper Exit Sensor Detection Signal L: Detect +5V(H) 0V(L) CN59 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN59-1 nPCHK1 SNS3 PCB CN83-1 Signal Waveform Function No Paper Sensor Detection Signal H: No Paper +5V(H) 0V(L) CN59-2 CN59-3 LDSP1 GND SNS3 PCB CN83-2 No Paper Sensor LED Drive Current Approx. +1 VDC SNS3 PCB CN83-3 Ground 0V CN59-4 CN59-5 TONER +5V SNS3 PCB CN83-4 Remaining Toner Level Signal Approx. +2 VDC SNS3 PCB CN83-5 +5V +5 VDC Power Supply CN66 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN66-1 +24VM CST2 PCB CN70-1 CN66-2 GND Signal Waveform Function +24V CST2 PCB CN70-2 +24 VDC Power Supply Ground 0V 73 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN66-3 +5V CST2 PCB CN70-3 CN66-4 nPCHK2 CST2 PCB CN70-4 Signal Waveform Function +5V No Paper Detection Signal (2nd Cassette) H: No Paper L: Paper +5V(H) 0V(L) CN66-5 CN66-6 pADF2 nCCHK2 CST2 PCB CN70-5 CST2 PCB CN70-6 +5V (H) ON +5 VDC Power Supply 0V (L) Feed Roller Drive Clutch Control Signal (2nd Cassette) No Cassette Detection Signal (2nd Cassette) L: No Cassette +5V(H) 0V(L) CN66-7 nOP CST2 PCB CN70-7 2nd Feeder Unit Detection Signal H: No Feeder Unit +5V(H) 0V(L) CN68 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. LSU CN68-1 nS/H CN1-1 Signal Waveform Function Laser Power Sample/Hold Timing Signal L : Sampling H : Holding +5V(H) 0V(L) CN68-2 nHSYNC LSU CN1-2 Horizontal Synchronous Signal 2.136 ms (400 dpi) 1.393 ms (600 dpi) +5V(H) 0V(L) CN68-3 L+5V LSU CN1-3 CN68-4 GND LSU CN1-4 +5V Laser Circuit +5 VDC Power Supply (Supplied only while the LP is operating) Ground 0V CN68-5 nLDON LSU CN1-5 +5V(H) Laser Control 0V(L) CN68-6 nVIDEO LSU CN1-6 +5V(H) Video Data L: Black H: White 0V(L) 74 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. LSU CN68-7 GND CN1-7 Signal Waveform Function Ground 0V CN69 SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN69-1 nPMCK LSU CN15-1 CN69-2 nPMRY LSU CN15-2 Signal Waveform Function Tetragon Motor Clock +5V(H) 0.702 kHz (400 dpi) 1.076 kHz (600 dpi) 0V(H) Tetragon Motor Ready Signal H: Not Ready L: Ready +5V(H) 0V(L) CN69-3 nPMON LSU CN15-3 Tetragon Motor Control Signal H: OFF L: ON +5V(H) 0V(L) CN69-4 MGND LSU CN15-4 Ground 0V CN69-5 +24VM LSU CN15-5 +24V +24 VDC Power Supply 75 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 CN93 SC PCB Pin No. CN93-1 LEDV LANB PCB CN95-1 +5V +5V Power Supply for LED CN93-2 LEDV LANB PCB CN95-2 +5V +5V Power Supply for LED CN93-3 GND LANB PCB CN95-3 Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function Ground 0V CN93-4 A16 LANB PCB CN95-4 Not Used CN93-5 A15 LANB PCB CN95-5 Not Used CN93-6 A14 LANB PCB CN95-6 Not Used CN93-7 A13 LANB PCB CN95-7 Not Used CN93-8 A12 LANB PCB CN95-8 Not Used CN93-9 A11 LANB PCB CN95-9 Not Used CN93-10 A10 LANB PCB CN95-10 Not Used CN93-11 A9 LANB PCB CN95-11 Not Used CN93-12 A21 LANB PCB CN95-12 Not Used CN93-13 *WE LANB PCB CN95-13 Not Used CN93-14 *RESET LANB PCB CN95-14 Not Used CN93-15 A20 LANB PCB CN95-15 Not Used CN93-16 A19 LANB PCB CN95-16 Not Used 76 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Pin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function 1CN93-17 A18 LANB PCB CN95-17 Not Used CN93-18 A17 LANB PCB CN95-18 Not Used CN93-19 A8 LANB PCB CN95-19 Not Used CN93-20 A7 LANB PCB CN95-20 Not Used CN93-21 A6 LANB PCB CN95-21 Not Used CN93-22 A5 LANB PCB CN95-22 Not Used CN93-23 A4 LANB PCB CN95-23 Not Used CN93-24 A3 LANB PCB CN95-24 Not Used CN93-25 A2 LANB PCB CN95-25 Not Used CN93-26 A1 LANB PCB CN95-26 Not Used CN93-27 Vdd LANB PCB CN95-27 +3.3V +3.3VDC Power Supply CN93-28 Vdd LANB PCB CN95-28 +3.3V +3.3VDC Power Supply CN93-29 *CE LANB PCB CN95-29 CN93-30 DD0 LANB PCB CN95-30 +3.3V(H) LANB PCB CN95-31 +3.3V(H) LANB PCB CN95-32 +3.3V(H) Not Used Data Signal 0V(L) CN93-31 DD1 Data Signal 0V(L) CN93-32 DD2 Data Signal 0V(L) 77 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Pin No. CN93-33 CN93-34 CN93-35 CN93-36 CN93-37 CN93-38 CN93-39 CN93-40 CN93-41 CN93-42 CN93-43 CN93-44 CN93-45 CN93-46 CN93-47 CN93-48 Signal Name DD3 DD4 DD5 DD6 DD7 DD8 DD9 DD10 DD11 DD12 DD13 DD14 DD15 *WR *RD RESET Destination Signal Waveform LANB PCB CN95-33 LANB PCB CN95-34 LANB PCB CN95-35 LANB PCB CN95-36 LANB PCB CN95-37 LANB PCB CN95-38 LANB PCB CN95-39 LANB PCB CN95-40 LANB PCB CN95-41 LANB PCB CN95-42 LANB PCB CN95-43 LANB PCB CN95-44 LANB PCB CN95-45 LANB PCB CN95-46 LANB PCB CN95-47 LANB PCB CN95-48 +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) +3.3V(H) 0V(L) Function Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Write Signal - Low Enable Read Signal - Low Enable LAN Reset Signal H: Reset L: Not Reset 78 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Pin No. CN93-49 Signal Name INTR0 Destination Signal Waveform LANB PCB CN95-49 +3.3V(H) Function High Enable 0V(L) CN93-50 GND LANB PCB CN95-50 Ground 0V CN93-51 *LAN LANB PCB CN95-51 +3.3V(H) 0V (L) CN93-52 GND LANB PCB CN95-52 LANB PCB Connected Detection Signal H: LANB PCB not connect Ground 0V CN93-53 GND LANB PCB CN95-53 Ground 0V CN93-54 GND LANB PCB CN95-54 Ground 0V CN93-55 D11 LANB PCB CN95-55 Not Used CN93-56 D7 LANB PCB CN95-56 Not Used CN93-57 D14 LANB PCB CN95-57 Not Used CN93-58 D6 LANB PCB CN95-58 Not Used CN93-59 D13 LANB PCB CN95-59 Not Used CN93-60 D5 LANB PCB CN95-60 Not Used CN93-61 D12 LANB PCB CN95-61 Not Used CN93-62 D4 LANB PCB CN95-62 Not Used CN93-63 Vcc LANB PCB CN95-63 +3.3V +3.3VDC Power Supply CN93-64 Vcc LANB PCB CN95-64 +3.3V +3.3VDC Power Supply 79 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Pin No. Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function CN93-65 D11 LANB PCB CN95-65 Not Used CN93-66 D3 LANB PCB CN95-66 Not Used CN93-67 D10 LANB PCB CN95-67 Not Used CN93-68 D2 LANB PCB CN95-68 Not Used CN93-69 D9 LANB PCB CN95-69 Not Used CN93-70 D1 LANB PCB CN95-70 Not Used CN93-71 D8 LANB PCB CN95-71 Not Used CN93-72 D0 LANB PCB CN95-72 Not Used CN93-73 *OE LANB PCB CN95-73 Not Used CN93-74 GND LANB PCB CN95-74 Ground 0V CN93-75 GND LANB PCB CN95-75 Ground 0V CN93-76 Vdd LANB PCB CN95-76 +3.3V +3.3VDC Power Supply CN93-77 Vdd LANB PCB CN95-77 +3.3V +3.3VDC Power Supply CN93-78 AD15 LANB PCB CN95-78 +3.3V(H) Address Signal 0V(L) CN93-79 AD14 LANB PCB CN95-79 +3.3V(H) Address Signal 0V(L) CN93-80 AD13 LANB PCB CN95-80 +3.3V(H) Address Signal 0V(L) 80 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Pin No. CN93-81 Signal Name AD12 Destination Signal Waveform LANB PCB CN95-81 Function Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-82 AD11 LANB PCB CN95-82 Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-83 AD10 LANB PCB CN95-83 Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-84 AD9 LANB PCB CN95-84 Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-85 AD8 LANB PCB CN95-85 Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-86 AD7 LANB PCB CN95-86 Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-87 AD6 LANB PCB CN95-87 Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-88 AD5 LANB PCB CN95-88 Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-89 AD4 LANB PCB CN95-89 Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-90 AD3 LANB PCB CN95-90 Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-91 AD2 LANB PCB CN95-91 Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-92 AD1 LANB PCB CN95-92 Address Signal +3.3V(H) 0V(L) CN93-93 Vdd LANB PCB CN95-93 +3.3V +3.3VDC Power Supply CN93-94 Vdd LANB PCB CN95-94 +3.3V +3.3VDC Power Supply CN93-95 AEN LANB PCB CN95-95 +3.3V(H) Low Enable 0V(L) CN93-96 ARDY LANB PCB CN95-96 +3.3V(H) Low Enable 0V(L) 81 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 SC PCB Pin No. CN93-97 Signal Name GND Destination Signal Waveform LANB PCB CN95-97 Function Ground 0V CN93-98 GND LANB PCB CN95-98 Ground 0V CN93-99 GND LANB PCB CN95-99 Ground 0V CN93-100 GND LANB PCB CN95-100 Ground 0V 82 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.7. MJR PC Board CN20 MJR PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN20-3 LT2(T) Telephone Line CN20-4 LT1(R) Signal Waveform Function Line Signal Telephone Line Line Signal CN23 MJR PCB Signal Name Pin No. CN23-1 N.C. Destination Signal Waveform Function Not Used CN23-2 N.C. Not Used CN23-3 HLIN1 SRU PCB CN90-1 Line Signal for the Fax Handset CN23-4 HLIN2 SRU PCB CN90-2 Line Signal for the Fax Handset CN23-5 N.C. Not Used CN28 and CN29 Refer to SC PC Board CN18. 83 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.8. Power Supply Unit CN101 PS Unit Pin No. CN101-1 Signal Name Black (L) Destination Signal Waveform ACI PC Board Function AC Power Supply AC100V CN101-2 N.C. CN101-3 White (N) Not Used ACI PC Board AC Power Supply AC100V CN102 PS Unit Pin No. CN102-1 Signal Name Black (L) Destination Signal Waveform Fuser Lamp Function AC Power Supply AC100V CN102-2 N.C. CN102-3 White (N) Not Used Thermostat Thermal Fuse AC Power Supply AC100V CN103 Refer to SC PC Board CN6 and CN53. 84 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 CN201 PS Unit Pin No. CN201-1 Signal Name Destination Development Development Roller Signal Waveform Development Voltage (AC 1.65 kHz Square Wave) & DC Voltage 0V -300V Function 1650Vp-p CN201-2 N.C. Not Used CN201-3 N.C. Not Used CN201-4 N.C. Not Used CN201-5 Charge Bias Charge Roller Charge Current: 200 µA (AC 300 Hz Sine Wave) & DC Charge Voltage 0V -650V 200 A CN202 PS Unit Pin No. CN202 Signal Name Transfer Destination Signal Waveform Bias Transfer Roller +3 A 0V Function (1)Transfer Current: (+3 µA) (2)Cleaning Voltage: (-1500 V) -1500V 85 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.9. PNL PC Board CN50 Refer to SC PC Board CN14. LCD PNL PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. LCD-1 RS LCD Module-1 Signal Waveform Function Register Select Signal H: Data Register L: Instruction Register +5V 0V LCD-2 R/W LCD Module-2 Data Read/Write Select Signal H: Read 0V L: Write +5V LCD-3 E LCD Module-3 Data Read/Write Enable Signal H: Enable 0V L: Disable +5V LCD-4 DB0 LCD Module-4 Data Signal +5V 0V LCD-5 DB1 LCD Module-5 Data Signal +5V 0V LCD-6 DB2 LCD Module-6 Data Signal +5V 0V LCD-7 DB3 LCD Module-7 Data Signal +5V 0V LCD-8 DB4 LCD Module-8 Data Signal +5V 0V LCD-9 DB5 LCD Module-9 Data Signal +5V 0V LCD-10 DB6 LCD Module-10 Data Signal +5V 0V 86 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 PNL PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. LCD-11 DB7 LCD Module-11 Signal Waveform Function Data Signal +5V 0V LCD-12 GND LCD Module-12 Ground 0V LCD-13 +5V LCD Module-13 +5V +5 VDC Power Supply LCD-14 +5V LCD Module-14 +5V +5 VDC Power Supply LCD-15 V5 LCD Module-15 LCD-16 GND LCD Module-16 +4.8V(Max) Power Supply for LCD Ground 0V 87 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.10. SNS3 PC Board CN83 Refer to SC PC Board CN59. CN84 SNS3 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN84-1 GND Toner Sensor Signal Waveform Function Ground 0V CN84-2 TONER Toner Sensor Remaining Toner Level Signal Approx. +2 VDC CN84-3 +5V Toner Sensor +5V +5 VDC Power Supply 88 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.11. SNS4 PC Board CN85 SNS3 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. SNS1 PCB CN85-1 nCCHK1 CN81-1 Signal Waveform Function No Cassette Detection Signal L: No Cassette +5V(H) 0V(L) CN85-2 GND SNS1 PCB CN81-2 Ground 0V CN85-3 nRSEN SNS1 PCB CN81-3 +5V(H) Timing Sensor Detection Signal L: Detect 0V(L) CN85-4 LDRE SNS1 PCB CN81-4 Approx. +2 VDC Timing Sensor and No Cassette Sensor LED Drive Current CN87 Refer to SC PC Board CN58. 89 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.12. SNS1 PC Board CN80 SNS1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. SNS2 PCB CN80-1 nCCHK1 CN82-1 Signal Waveform Function No Cassette Detection Signal L: No Cassette +5V(H) 0V(L) CN80-2 GND SNS2 PCB CN82-2 Ground 0V CN80-3 LDSC1 SNS2 PCB CN82-3 Approx. +1 VDC No Cassette Sensor LED Drive Current CN81 Refer to SNS4 PC Board CN85. 3.13. SNS2 PC Board CN82 Refer to SNS1 PC Board CN80. 3.14. CCD PC Board CN30 Refer to SC PC Board CN7. 3.15. ILS PC Board CN73 Refer to SC PC Board CN57. 3.16. ACI PC Board Refer to Power Supply Unit CN101. 90 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.17. LANB PC Board CN96 Refer to SC PC Board CN93. CN97 LANB PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN97-1 ACTIVITY LANC PCB CN202-1 Signal Waveform Function LANB PCB / LANC PCB Activity Signal +5V 0V CN97-2 +5V LANC PCB CN202-2 CN97-3 LINK LANC PCB CN202-3 +5V +5V +5 VDC Power Supply LANB PCB/ LANC PCB Link Signal 0V CN97-4 N.C. Not Used CN97-5 RX- LANC PCB CN200-1 Reception Data "-" Signal CN97-6 RX+ LANC PCB CN200-2 Reception Data "+" Signal CN97-7 TX- LANC PCB CN200-3 Transmission Data "-" Signal CN97-8 TX+ LANC PCB CN200-4 Transmission Data "+" Signal 3.18. LANC PC Board CN200 Refer to LANB PC Board CN97. CN202 Refer to LANB PC Board CN97. 91 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.19. CST2 PC Board (Optional) CN70 Refer to SC PC Board CN66. CN71 CST2 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN71-1 +24VM Paper Feed Solenoid CN70-2 nADF2 Signal Waveform Function +24V Paper Feed Solenoid ON +24V (H) +24 VDC Power Supply Paper Feed Roller Solenoid Control Signal 0V (L) CN74 CST2 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN74-1 SNS2 PCB nCCHK2 (Optional) CN82-1 Signal Waveform Function No Cassette Detection Signal (2nd Cassette) L: No Cassette +5V(H) 0V(L) CN74-2 CN74-3 GND SNCMN SNS2 PCB (Optional) CN82-2 Ground 0V SNS2 PCB (Optional) CN82-3 +2V +2 VDC Power Supply 3.20. SNS2 PC Board (Optional) CN82 Refer to CST2 PC Board CN74. 92 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3.21. SRU PC Board (Optional) CN90 Refer to MJR PC Board CN23. CN91 SRU PCB Signal Name Pin No. CN91-1 N.C. Destination Signal Waveform Function Not Used CN91-2 MIC (+) Telephone Handset CN Handset Microphone CN91-3 RCV (+) Telephone Handset CN Handset Receiver CN91-4 RCV (-) Telephone Handset CN Handset Receiver CN91-5 MIC (-) Telephone Handset CN Handset Microphone CN91-6 TGND Ground 0V 93 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4 Troubleshooting 4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart START Plug-in the Power Cord to turn the machine ON. Does the unit power up normally? No Does the LCD display and function correctly? Yes No Yes Troubleshoot Improper LCD Display (Sect. 4.2). Troubleshoot any 3-digit INFO. CODE displayed (Sect. 4.3). Does the unit produce normal copies? No Yes Does the original document No feed through correctly? Troubleshoot the Yes Document Feeder (Sect. 4.5) Does the recording paper No exit the unit? Yes Troubleshoot communication problems (transmission, reception, dialing, polling, information codes, or diagnostic codes.) (Sect. 4.6) Check for recording paper path problems. Troubleshoot printed copy quality problems (Sect. 4.4). 94 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.2. Improper LCD Display START Check connectors: CN14 (SC PCB) and CN50 (PNL1 PCB). When pressing any key, do you hear the 'Pi-' sound from the Speaker? Yes No Does CN14, pin 2 and pin 3 on the SC PCB measure +5VDC? No Yes Replace the PNL1 PCB. Replace the SC PCB. Reinstall the firmware. END 95 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3. Information Codes (INFO. CODES) The 3-digit information codes display to show the unit’s status. These codes also print on the journal. The following table indicates appropriate sections for troubleshooting. Code 001, 002, 007 010 030 031 400 401, 402 403 404, 405, 407 408, 409 411, 414 415 416 417, 418 420 422 434 459, 494, 495 490 630 634 711 - 731 800 - 870 Explanation Recording paper jam No recording paper Document misfeeding Document too long Transmission error Transmission error Polling reception error Transmission error Transmission error Polling reception error Remote side mis-operation Reception error Reception error Reception error Transmission error Signal noise level too high Reception error Reception error Remote unit Busy No busy tone detected LAN communication error Advanced Communication error Phase C, D B, C B C B B B B D B B D C B B B C C B B LAN -- Section 4.3.8. 4.3.9. 4.3.10. 4.3.10. 4.3.1. 4.3.2. 4.3.12. 4.3.3. 4.3.5. 4.3.12. 4.3.12. 4.3.4. 4.3.5. 4.3.1. 4.3.2. 4.3.6. 4.3.7. 4.3.5. 4.3.11. ---- Phase Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase D Phase E Message Transmission Facsimile Communication Procedure Facsimile Call Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase D Phase E : : : : : Call establishment Pre-message procedure Message transmission Post-message procedure Call release 96 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3.1. Information Codes: 400, 420 400 START 420 START Enable the monitor speaker. (Refer to Sect. 5.1 Parameter No. 008) Perform a transmission test to the remote unit in question. Does the remote unit send the CED and 300 bps Fax signal ? No Is reception from a reference unit successful? Yes No Check the line connection from the wall jack to the "Line" on the MJR PCB. 1. Misdialed call. 2. Check the remote unit. (Remote unit is defective) 3. Refer to Sect. 4.6. Replace the SC PCB. END Yes Does the remote unit repeat the 300 bps signal every 3 sec.? Yes No No Is transmission to the reference unit successful? Yes 1. Check the remote unit. (Remote unit is defective) 2. Check the telephone number to the remote unit. 1. Replace the MJR PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB. Does the trouble still occur? No Yes 1. Refer to Sect. 4.6. 2. Check the remote unit. (Remote unit is defective) END END 97 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3.2. Information Codes: 401, 402, 422 402, 422 START Is Communication with the reference unit successful? No Yes Replace the SC PCB. Check the remote unit in question. (Remote unit is defective) 401 START Is the ID Number programmed into your machine? END No Yes Is the Receiving unit set up for Selective Receive? Program the ID Number. Yes No Is the Receiving unit set up for Password Reception? Check the Selective Receive settings at the receiving unit. Yes No Are you sending a Confidential Mail? Program the Receive Password to match the receiving unit. (Fax Parameter No. 44) Yes No Are you sending a document by Relayed Transmission? No Check with the receiving end, the mailboxes may be full. Yes Check the Relayed Transmission settings at the Relay Station. END 98 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3.3. Information Codes: 404, 405, 407 START Is communication with reference unit successful? No 1. Replace the MJR PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB. Yes Change Function Parameter #010: Reduce Tx Attenuation Level Does the problem still occur? No Yes No Does the problem still occur? Yes Check the telephone line condition. END Change Function Parameter #017: Reduce Tx Modem Speed No Check the remote unit. (Recording paper may have run out or paper may have jammed.) Does the problem still occur? Yes Change Funciotn Parameter #014: Increase G3 Tx Equalization No Does the problem still occur? Yes Change Function Parameter #025: Communication Startup to 2nd Does the problem still occur? No Yes Does the problem still occur? Yes Refer to Sect. 4.6. No END 99 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3.4. Information Code: 416 START Is communication with the reference unit successful? Yes No 1. Replace the MJR PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB. Change Function Parameter #011: Reduce Rx Sensitivity Level Does the problem still occur? No Yes No Does the problem still occur? Yes Check the telephone line condition. END Change Function Parameter #023: Increase Training Check Period No Does the problem still occur? Yes Change Function Parameter #013: Increase G3 Rx Equalization No Does the problem still occur? Yes Refer to Sect. 4.6. END 100 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3.5. Information Codes: 408, 409, 417, 418, 490 START Is communication with the reference unit successful? Yes No Is the unit transmitting or receiving? Transmitting 1. Replace the MJR PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB. Does the problem still occur? Receiving Change Function Parameter #071: Increase Error Tolerance Change Function Parameter #010: Reduce Tx Attenuation Level Does the problem still occur? No Does the problem still occur? Yes No Yes Check the telephone line condition. No END Yes Change Function Parameter #011: Reduce Rx Sensitivity Level Change Function Parameter #017: Reduce Tx Modem Speed Does the problem still occur? No Does the problem still occur? Yes No Yes Change Function Parameter #014: Increase G3 Tx Equalization Change Function Parameter #018: Reduce Rx Modem Speed Does the problem still occur? No Does the problem still occur? Yes No Yes Change Function Parameter #013: Increase G3 Rx Equalization No Does the problem still occur? Yes The telephone line may have a high level of white noise and/or frequent impulse noise. Ask the telephone company to check the line. END 101 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3.6. Information Code: 434 START Is communication with the reference unit successful? No Yes Replace the SC PCB. No Does the trouble occur regardless of the remote unit? Yes The telephone line may have a high level of white noise and/or frequent impulse noise. Ask the telephone company to check the line. Can the transmitter in question transmit to the other units? No Yes Check the remote unit in question. (Remote unit is defective) Change the parameter in Service Mode 1. (Refer to Sect. 5.1.2.) for transmitter: #010: Increase Tx Level for receiver : #011: Reduce Rx Sensitivity Level END 102 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3.7. Information Codes: 459, 494, 495 START Check the line connection between the telephone jack on the wall and the MJR PCB. Is communication with the reference unit successful? Yes No 1. Replace the MJR PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB. Does the problem still occur? No Yes Check the telephone line condition. END Does the trouble occur regardless of the remote unit? Yes No 1. Check the remote unit in question. (Remote unit is defective) 2. Refer to Sect. 4.6. If the telephone line frequently disconnects at the beginning of each communication, ask the telephone company to check the line. END 103 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3.8. Information Codes: 001, 002, 007 (Recording Paper Jam) START Is the recording paper size and thickness within specification? No Replace with correct paper. Yes Is the recording paper loaded in the Cassette properly? Yes No Load the paper correctly. No Is the paper cassette functional? Yes Replace the paper cassette. Check the Paper Feed Roller Assembly. Check all Sensors and Actuators (No Paper Sensor, Timing Sensor, Paper Exit Sensor). Check the Paper Feed Solenoid. END 104 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3.9. Information Code: 010 (No Recording Paper) START Is the Paper Cassette seated properly No Reseat the cassette. Yes Is the recording paper loaded in the cassette? Yes Is the No Paper Actuator operational? Yes Is the No Paper Sensor operational? Yes No Load the paper. No Replace the Actuator. No Replace the No Paper Sensor. No Does the Paper Feed Roller turn? Overhaul the Clutch Gear Assembly. Yes END 105 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3.10. Information Codes: 030, 031 (Document Jam) START Yes Is the document path blocked? Remove the blockage. No No Does the Tx Motor rotate? 1. Replace the Tx Motor. 2. Replace the SC PCB. Yes Does the document feed into the unit? Yes Does the voltage on A-Point and B-Point Sensor Pin 2 of PNL1 PCB, vary between 0 and +5V when a document is set and removed? No Check all gears and rollers. No Replace the PNL1 PCB. Yes END 4.3.11. Information Code: 630 (Dialing Error) START Is there a dial tone when MONITOR button is pressed? Yes No 1. Connect the telephone line correctly. 2. Check the telephone line. No Is the remote machine busy? Yes Can the unit dial the reference unit? Yes No 1. Check all connectors. 2. Replace the SC PCB. Press the REDIAL button to retry connection. 1. The remote machine is defective. 2. Telephone line quality is poor. (Refer to Sect. 4.6.) END END 106 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.3.12. Information Codes: 403, 411, 414, 415 (Polling Operator Trouble) 415 403, 411, 414 START START Inform the remote side (receiving side) that their machine does not have polling transmission capability. Review the polling operation referring to the Operating Instructions. Does the remote side have polling transmission capability? Yes No Is the remote side set to polling transmission (Polled) Mode? No END END Yes Ask the remote side to set their unit for polling operation. Check the password between the two units to ensure it matches. END Polling communication with 4-digit password is not an ITU-T Standard feature. If the transmitter and receiver are of different manufacturers, polling communication with password may not be possible. 107 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.4. Black Copy Paper Travel 4.4.1. Printed Copy Quality Problems START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? Yes Check the Scanner mechanism. No Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes Is the Power Supply Unit normal? No Replace the Toner Cartridge. No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Check the contacts between PSU and Toner Cartridge. 3. Replace the PSU. Yes Is the SC PCB normal? No Yes 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the SC PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB. END 108 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Blank Copy Paper Travel 4.4.2. START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? Yes No Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Check the Scanner mechanism. No Replace the Toner Cartridge . Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No Yes Is the Power Supply Unit normal? No 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR. 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Check the Connector and voltage on the Power Supply Unit. 3. Replace the Power Supply Unit. Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Beam path? No Is the SC PCB normal? Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU). No Yes 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the SC PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB. END 109 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Vertical White Lines P Paper Travel 4.4.3. START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? Yes No Is the recording paper damp? Check the Scanner mechanism. Yes No Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Replace the recording paper. No Replace the Toner Cartridge . Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Beam path? No Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU). Are there any foreign particles Yes or stains on the BTR? No Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR. No Clean or replace the rollers. END 110 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Ghost Images A AAA A Paper Travel 4.4.4. START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? Yes No Is the recording paper damp? Check the Scanner mechanism. Yes No Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Replace the recording paper. No Replace the Toner Cartridge. Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No Yes Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes No 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR. Clean or replace the rollers. END 111 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Vertical Dark Lines P Paper Travel 4.4.5. START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? Yes Check the Scanner mechanism. No Is the Toner Cartridge operational? No Replace the Toner Cartridge. Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No Yes Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal? Yes No Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes No 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU). Clean or replace the rollers. END 112 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Horizontal Dark Lines P Paper Travel 4.4.6. START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? No Yes Check the Scanner mechanism. Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes No Replace the Toner Cartridge. Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR. No No Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal? Yes Is the Power Supply Unit normal? Replace the Laser Unit (LSU). No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit . 2. Check the Connector and voltage on the Power Supply Unit. 3. Replace the Power Supply Unit. Yes Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? No Yes Clean or replace the rollers. END 113 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Dark Background P Paper Travel 4.4.7. START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? Yes Check the Scanner mechanism. No Is the recording paper damp? Yes No Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Replace the recording paper. No Replace the Toner Cartridge. Yes Is the Laser Unit (LSU) normal? No Yes Is the Power Supply Unit normal? Replace the Laser Unit (LSU). No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Check the Connector and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 3. Replace the Power Supply Unit. Yes Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes No Clean or replace the rollers. END 114 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Light Print Paper Travel 4.4.8. START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? No Is the recording paper damp? Yes Check the Scanner mechanism. Yes No Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Replace the paper. No Replace the Toner Cartridge. Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Unit path? No Is the Power Supply Unit normal? Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the LSU. No Yes Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Replace the Power Supply Unit. No Clean or replace the rollers. END 115 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Horizontal White Lines P Paper Travel 4.4.9. START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? Yes No Is the recording paper damp? Check the Scanner mechanism. Yes No Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Replace the recording paper. No Replace the Toner Cartridge. Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No Yes Is the Power Supply Unit normal? Yes No Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes No 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR. 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Replace the Power Supply Unit. Clean or replace the rollers. END 116 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.4.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper) P START Is the recording paper damp? Yes No Is the Fuser Unit normal? Replace the recording paper. No Yes Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note) END Note: Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat, the Thermal Fuse or the Thermistor Assembly becomes an open-circuit. 117 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Voids in Solid Areas P Paper Travel 4.4.11. START Is the recording paper damp? Yes No Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Replace the recording paper. No Replace the Toner Cartridge. Yes Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes No Clean or replace the rollers. END 118 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 P Paper Travel 4.4.12. Black Dots START Is the Toner Cartridge operational? No Replace the Toner Cartridge. Yes Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes No Clean or replace the rollers. END 119 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Paper Travel 4.4.13. Recording Paper Creases START Is the recording paper damp? Yes No Replace the recording paper. Are there any foreign particles or stains in the paper path? No Yes Is the recording paper skewing? Yes Remove any obstructions and clean the paper path. No Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Fuser Unit? Ensure the paper is set under the Paper Separation Clips in the Cassette. Yes 1. Remove any foreign particles or clean the stains. 2. Replace the Fuser Unit. No END 120 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.4.14. Poor Printed Copy Quality START Is the Test Pattern printout in Service Mode 3 normal? No 1. Replace the SC PCB. 2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU). 3. Replace the Power Supply Unit. 4. Replace the Toner Cartridge . Yes Make a local copy. Is the printed copy correct? No Yes Check the Transmission Block (CN30 on the CCD PCB and CN7 on the SC PCB. Perform a receiving test with the reference fax unit. Is the received copy correct? No Yes Is a poor copy printed only when receiving from a specific transmitter? Yes 1. Check the CN18 on the SC PCB. 2. Check the CN28 and 29 on the MJR PCB. 3. Check the Telephone Line Cable. 4. Replace the SC PCB. No Telephone line quality is poor. (Refer to 4.6.) The transmitting machine may be defective. END 121 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.4.15. Abnormal Printing START Is the recording paper loaded in the Cassette properly? No Yes Is the recording paper size and thickness within specification? 1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide. 2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide. 3. Ensure the paper is under the Paper Separation Clips. No Yes Is a Panasonic Toner Cartridge being used? Replace with correct paper. No Yes Are all switches and sensors operating properly? Replace with a Panasonic Toner Cartridge. No Yes Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the receiver unit? No Do the rollers rotate properly? Adjust, clean or replace. Yes Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the receiver unit. No 1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches and springs. 2. Adjust or replace any defective parts. Yes Is the receiving mechanism operating correctly? Yes No Adjust or replace any defective parts. END 122 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.4.16. Scanned Copy Quality Problems START Is the LED Array abnormal? Yes No Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the scanning area? Replace the LED Array. Yes Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the scanning area. No Is the scanning area dirty? Yes No Are the Transmitting Rollers dirty? 1. Clean the Scanning Glass (Sect. 2.2.4.). 2. Clean Mirrors 1, 2 and 3 (Sect. 2.2.8.). Yes No Clean the rollers (Sect. 2.2.4.). Yes Is the Scanner Assembly abnormal? No 1. Check CN7 (SC PCB). 2. Check CN30 (CCD PCB). 3. Replace the Scanner Block (321) (Sect. 2.2.8.). 4. Replace the SC PCB (Sect. 2.2.10). END 123 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.5. 4.5.1. Document Feeder (ADF) No Document Feed START No Is the document set properly? Set the document properly. Yes Is the document thickness or size within specification? Yes No Is the "Pi.." tone generated when the document is set? Yes No Make a copy or cut the document to the specification size. Does the ADF Sensor actuator move smoothly? No Adjust or replace the actuator. Yes Replace the PNL PCB. No Does the ADF Roller rotate? Replace the Transmit Motor. Yes Is the trouble solved? No Yes Replace the PNL PCB. END Is the ADF Roller surface dirty? Yes No Adjust the separator pressure. Clean the ADF Roller surface. Is the trouble solved? Yes No Replace the ADF Roller or Separation Rubber or both. END 124 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.5.2. Document Does Not Feed or Multiple Feeds START Is the Control Panel Unit locked? No Yes Is the adjustment of the Separation Rubber normal? Close the Control Panel Unit firmly. No Yes Is the Separation Rubber worn out? No Yes Clean or adjust the Separation Rubber Pressure (Sect. 2.2.2). Replace the Separation Rubber. Is the ADF Roller clean? No Yes Is the ADF Roller worn out? Clean the surface of the roller with isopropyl alcohol (Sect. 2.2.4) Yes Replace the ADF Roller (Sect. 2.2.8). No Does the ADF Roller drive properly? Yes No Does the ADF Roller's gear system function properly? Yes No Adjust the gear system or replace defective parts. END 125 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.5.3. Document Jam (030) or Skew START Mode Copy le Samp Is the Control Panel Unit closed? No Close the Control Panel Unit firmly. Yes Do all sensors on the PNL1 PCB operate normally? No Clean or replace PNL1 PCB. Yes Does the Feed Roller have drive and sufficient friction? No Clean the surface of roller with isopropyl alcohol (Sect.2.2.4). Yes No Is the document path clear of foreign particles or paper? Remove the foreign particles or papers from the document path. Yes Is the Transmitting mechanism operating properly? Yes No Adjust or replace any defective parts. END 126 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.6. Communications This section explains general troubleshooting procedures for the 400 series of Information Codes. These errors are primarily caused by poor telephone line quality (loss, noise, echo, etc.). This unit is furnished with Service Mode 1 to assist in troubleshooting line quality problems. It is suggested that both the transmitting unit and receiving unit be adjusted. This section gives relevant parameters in Service Mode 1 for the transmitting and receiving sides. If no improvement is realized after the parameters are adjusted, it is recommended that the parameters be returned to the default settings. 4.6.1. Communication Trouble Perform a communication test after changing settings. START Is this an international communication? Yes No Transmitting Side #021 : Off #025 : 1st On 2nd Receiving Side #018 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps #024 : 2100 Hz 1080 Hz #030 : 75 ms 1 sec #033 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps/ TC9600/TC7200 To equalize loss (Amplitude Distortion) between the fax unit and the phone company exchange Transmitting Side #014 : 0 dBm 4, 8, 12 dBm Receiving Side #013 : 0 dBm 4, 8, 12 dBm To improve a poor S/N (signal-to-noise ratio) Transmitting Side Receiving Side #010 : -9 dBm 0 to -15 dBm #017 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps #032 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps #011 : -43 dBm -33 dBm or -38 dBm #018 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps #023 : Normal Long #032 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps To cope with impulse noise Receiving Side #070 : 128 256 to 2048 To cope with shifted signal sequences caused by an echo Transmitting Side #025 : 1st 2nd Receiving Side #024 : 2100 Hz 1080 Hz #030 : 75 ms 1 sec 127 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.6.2. Poor Transmitted Copy Quality START Make a copy. Is the printed copy normal? Yes No No Is the LED Array lit? Does CN1, pin 1 on the SC PCB measure +24 VDC? Yes Yes Does nLEDON go Low when the scan starts? Yes Perform a transmission test to a reference fax unit. No Replace the LVPS. No Replace the SC PCB. Check CN1 on the SC PCB and the LED harness. Does the problem still occur? Yes Replace the LED Array. No Are CN7 (SC PCB) and CN30 (CCD PCB) connected properly? Yes Connect them correctly. 1. Replace the Scanner Block. 2. Replace the SC PCB. Is the transmitted copy normal? Yes No Does poor transmitted copy appear when transmitting to a specific receiver? Yes No 1. Check CN18 (SC PCB) and CN28 and 29 (MJR PCB). 2. Check the telephone line cable. Replace if necessary. Telephone line quality is poor. The receiving unit may be defective. END 128 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.6.3. Dialing Problems START Does the unit proceed to Phase B? No Are you using One-Touch or ABBR dialing? Yes 1. Set documents on the ADF correctly. 2. Check the telephone line connection. 3. The called party is busy. 4. Refer to Sect. 4.6. Yes Check the registered telephone number. No Are you using direct dialing? Yes No Is the Monitor Volume too loud or too low? No Check the dialed telephone number. Yes Adjust the monitor volume by pressing the "/\" or "\/" curser keys. END 129 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.6.4. Transmission Problems START Does the ID display? No Yes Does the Verification Stamp operate? 1. No ID function at the remote unit. 2. The ID is not set for the remote unit. No 1. Set "STAMP=ON" 2. Check CN3 (SC PCB). 3. Replace the Stamp Solenoid. 4. Replace the SC PCB. Yes Is the copy quality OK? No Yes Any other problems? No Make a copy and refer to Sect. 4.4. Yes See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting with the Information Codes). END 130 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.6.5. Reception Problems START Does the machine answer the Ringing signal? Yes Is the received copy OK? No 1. Set "RCV = AUTO" 2. Check that all covers are closed firmly. 3. Check the telephone line connection. 4. Check the Ringer Timing or DRD setting. 5. Check the recording paper path. 6. Check CN18 (SC PCB) and CN28 and 29 (MJR PCB). 7. Replace the MJR PCB. 8. Replace the SC PCB. No Yes Any other problems? No Make a copy and refer to Sect. 4.4.14. Yes See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting with the Information Codes). END 131 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.6.6. Polling Problems START Is Polling reception OK? No Yes Is Polling transmission OK? 1. Set the same polling password as the other party is using. 2. Check the password of the remote unit. No Yes Any other problems? No 1. Set the polling password or no - check mode.* 2. Check the password of the remote unit. Yes See Sect. 4.3. (Troubleshooting using information codes). END Note: No-check Mode means that password is not set. 132 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.7. 4.7.1. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface Checking Network Configuration START Print the current Internet Parameters List Ask the customer for the Pre-Installation Information form filled out by the Network Administrator. Verify this information with the Internet Parameters List that you just printed. Are the Internet Parameters entered correctly into the unit? No Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly. Yes Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit From the DOS Prompt, enter the following command-line utility: ipconfig /all Does the displayed Network configuration, match the following settings of the unit Internet Parameters ? Default Gateway IP Address: DNS Server IP Address: Subnet Mask: No Ask the Network Administrator to verify the proper information. Yes From the DOS Prompt, enter the following command-line utility: "route print" Does the current routing table for the Gateway match ? No Ask the Network Administrator to correct the routing table on that Gateway. No Yes Does the Default Gateway respond to the "ping IP" command ? Yes Check the power switch, cables and the current settings of unit. Does the DNS Server respond to the "ping IP" command ? No Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status. No Yes Does the unit respond to the "ping host name" command ? Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status. No Yes Does the unit respond to the "telnet" command ? Replace the SC and/or LANB PCB Yes Ask the Network Administrator to verify the POP/SMTP account and system status. 133 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.7.2. Testing the TCP/IP Network It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts. In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance. When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don’t work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring. In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers. As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s). In our examples, we’ll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee. 1. System Diagram Model Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the Network Administrator. A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS server is required. Network Configuration Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com Network D PC Client [210.232.71.18] js2.labo.mgcs.com WAN SMTP/POP DNS Server Server sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2] Network A [192.168.3.0] sv1.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.1] [192.168.3.254] Router (R1) [192.168.1.253] Network B [192.168.1.0] "ping" PC Client [192.168.1.4] ec5.labo.mgcs.com Hub PC Client [192.168.3.4] ec4.labo.mgcs.com DX-600/800 [192.168.3.5] ef1.labo.mgcs.com Network C [192.168.4.0] PC Client [192.168.4.1] fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com 134 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2. Checking the Current Configuration Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration. Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT. Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter settings of the unit: Default Gateway IP Address: DNS Server IP Address: Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid) For Windows 98 / Me / XP / 2000 / NT The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt: C:\>ipconfig /all Windows NT IP Configuration Host Name DNS Servers Node Type NetBIOS Scope ID IP Routing Enabled. WINS Proxy Enabled NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS : ec4.labo.mgcs.com : 192.168.1.1 : Hybrid : : No : No : No Ethernet adapter IBMFE1 Description : : IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter Physical Address DHCP Enabled IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary WINS Server : 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8 : No : 192.168.3.4 : 255.255.255.0 : 192.168.3.254 : 192.168.3.18 From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com (obtained from the Host Name). 3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client (any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the packet is echoed back (returned). Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long. -n count : -w timeout : The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four. Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not responding. 135 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 PINGing the Unit C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.mgcs.com Pinging ef1.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address) C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254 Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 PINGing the SMTP/POP Server C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.mgcs.com Pinging sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the destination and the following output is displayed: C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com Pinging fmrt7.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data: Request timed out. Request timed out. Request timed out. Request timed out. Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss), Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms 136 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 If the physical destination is far and it’s connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response. e.g. -n 10 -w 2000 : : The number of echo requests that the command should send. Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not responding. C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.mgcs.com -n 10 -w 2000 Pinging js2.labo.mgcs.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=810ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=455ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=677ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=703ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 4. Tracing a Packet Route Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each particular router to reach the specified destination. The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) is available, it will be displayed as well. This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes: a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out. b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it should be upgraded. To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.mgcs.com Tracing route to sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2] over a maximum of 30 hops: 1 2 4 ms 4 ms 2 ms 5 ms 2 ms 192.168.3.254 5 ms sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2] Trace complete. 137 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5. Managing Network Route Tables In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join the two segments needs to know only about these segments. The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes: Network Address 192.168.3.0 192.168.1.0 Netmask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 Gateway 192.168.3.254 192.168.1.253 Interface 192.168.3.254 192.168.1.253 When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network. IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table. Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and sends the packet to router R1. The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took only a single hop. When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating "destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator. Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks, and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables, some are shown below: • MASK If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter. • Netmask If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it defaults to 255.255.255.255. • Gateway Specifies the gateway. • METRIC Specifies the metric / cost for the destination. All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS. The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS. 138 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below: C:\WINDOWS>route print Active Routes: Network Address 0.0.0.0 127.0.0.0 192.168.3.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.255 224.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 Netmask 0.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 224.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 Gateway Address 192.168.3.254 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 Interface 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 Metric 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6. Host Name Query on DNS Server Windows XP/2000/NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working properly. This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me. From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output: C:\>nslookup Default Server: sv1.labo.mgcs.com Address: 192.168.1.1 NS(Name Server) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS " to display the following output: > ls -t NS labo.mgcs.com. [sv1.labo.mgcs.com.] labo.mgcs.com. NS server = sv1.labo.mgcs.com MX(Mail Exchange) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX " to display the following output: > ls -t MX labo.mgcs.com [sv1.labo.mgcs.com] labo.mgcs.com. MX 10 sv2.labo.mgcs.com A (Address) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A " to display the following output: > ls -t A labo.mgcs.com [sv1.labo.mgcs.com] labo.mgcs.com. NS sv1 A sv2 A ec5 A A ec4 A ef1 server = sv1.labo.mgcs.com 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.2 192.168.1.4 192.168.3.4 192.168.3.5 (To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.) 139 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works. From Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server. For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then, click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials and click on the OK button. Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System. Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button. For example, C:\WINDOWS>telnet telnet to ef1.labo.mgcs.com[192.168.3.5] 220 ef1.labo.mgcs.com DP18xx V.xx helo 250 Hello mail from:test 250 Sender OK rcpt to:[email protected] 250 Receipient OK data 354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF" [Press the Enter Key] Panasonic Internet Fax test test [Press the Enter Key] [Press the Enter Key] [Press the Enter Key] 250 OK, Mail accept quit 221 Closing transaction channel 140 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.8. Information Codes Table (For Facsimile) Code 001 Mode RCV COPY 002 RCV COPY 007 RCV COPY 008 010 RCV COPY 011 STANDBY 017 030 XMT 031 045 XMT COPY STANDBY RCV COPY STANDBY RCV COPY STANDBY 060 041 043 Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause C, D Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam. paper fails to reach the Timing Timing Sensor abnormal. Sensor. (1st Cassette) C, D Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam. paper fails to reach the Timing Timing Sensor abnormal. Sensor. (2nd Cassette) C, D 1. Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam. paper fails to reach the Paper Paper Exit Sensor abnormal. Exit Sensor. 2. Recording paper has not completely passed the Paper Exit Sensor. Paper cassette is opened while Paper cassette is opened. paper is feeding. B, C No recording paper. No recording paper or paper is not set properly. No Paper Sensor is defective. B, C Paper Cassette is not installed Connector is not installed properly. properly. Incorrect paper size loaded in the Paper size is incorrect. Paper Cassette. B Read Point Sensor does not go Document is not set properly. ON within 10 seconds after the Defective Read Point Sensor. document starts feeding. C Transmitting document was longer The document may jam. than 2 meter (or 78.7 in). Defective Read Point Sensor. B, C, D Out of toner. No toner. Defective Toner Sensor. B, C, D Low toner. Toner is getting low. Defective Toner Sensor. - No Toner Cartridge. - A Printer Cover is open. 061 - A ADF Door is open. 400 XMT B T1 timer (35 ± 5 sec.) elapsed without detecting 300 bps signal. Toner Cartridge has not been installed. Defective Toner Sensor (Cartridge Sensor). Cover is not firmly closed. Connectors are not firmly connected. Door is not firmly closed. Connectors are not firmly connected. Wrong number is dialed and the START button is pushed. Telephone line is disconnected while dialing. SC PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB are defective. Receiver is defective. (It may only be transmitting CED) 141 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Code 401 Mode XMT 402 XMT 403 RCV (Polling) 404 XMT 405 XMT 406 RCV (Password Comm.) 407 XMT 408 XMT 409 XMT 410 RCV 411 RCV (Polling) 412 G3 RX Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause B DCN was returned from receiver Your machine’s ID Number is not while transmitter is waiting for CFR programmed. or FTT. Possible incompatibility or incorrect Password. B DCN was returned from receiver Receiver working in non-CCITT mode while transmitter is waiting for only. (Possible incompatibility) NSF/DIS. B Transmitter had no polling "POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) is function. not set at the transmitter. Document to be transmitted is not placed at the transmitter. B Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS) Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR followed by TCF three times, but PCB, etc.) the receiver did not respond. (CFR SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. or FTT is usually returned) Receiver disconnects line during first NSS (or DCS) is transmitted. B Transmitter received FTT after it Line quality is poor. (TCF is damaged transmitted TCF at 2400bps. due to line noise) Received RTN after Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) communicating at 2400 bps. SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. B XMT-Password mismatched. XMT, RCV password does not match. RCV-Password mismatched. Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with Selective RCV incomplete. the last 4 digits of ONE-TOUCH, ABBR telephone number. D Transmitter received no response Receiver is defective. (No paper, paper after it transmitted post message, jamming, etc.) such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or Receiver ceased receiving because of received DCN. excessive error. (Line quality is poor) SC PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB are defective. D Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with error. (Line transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM. quality is poor) Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. D Transmitter receives PIN after it Receiver receives data with error due to transmitted a post message, such poor line quality, and receiving operator as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc. requests voice contact. Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. D Received DCN while waiting for Interface or line is faulty. post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, Transmitter is defective. etc.) B Received DCN after transmitting Transmitter is not ready for polling NSC. communication. Password does not match between transmitter and receiver. B, D No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter is defective. NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After SC PCB is defective. transmitting FTT) 142 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Code 414 415 416 417 418 420 421 422 427 434 436 456 490 494 495 501 Fax Information Codes Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause RCV B No response received after Password does not match between (Polling) transmitting 3rd NSC. transmitter and receiver. Transmitter is defective. (No original, document jam, etc.) XMT B Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your (Polling) message from your machine in machine does not have the polling polling communication. transmission feature. RCV D Receiver did not detect post Transmitter is defective. command, such as EOP, MPS, Line quality is poor. (RTC signal is EOM, etc. distorted due to line noise) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. RCV C Receiver returned RTN in Line quality is poor. (There are response to post message. excessive errors in received data) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. RCV C Receiver transmitted PIN in Line quality is poor. (There are response to PRI-Q from excessive errors in received data) transmitter. (Transmitting operator SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. requests voice contact) RCV B T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without There is wrong incoming call. detecting 300 bps signal. (Non-facsimile communication) Transmitter is defective. SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. RCV B Busy Tone is detected after Remote station disconnected the line. sending NSF Signal. Wrong number is dialed. XMT B Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC There is an incompatibility. (or DTC) was invalid. G3 B DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS The interface is incompatible. RCV transmitted. XMT or RCV B CD (response from Modem) did Remote unit is defective. not turn OFF within 180 sec. after SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. receiver detected FLAG signal. G3 RX C DCN received after transmitting Transmitter is defective or incompatible. FTT. Line quality is poor. RCV B Received relay transfer request or confidential document to distribute to an end receiving station or all confidential mailboxes are used. RCV C Sum of error lines exceeded the Line quality is poor. limit (Function Parameter No. 70) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. of 64 lines. RCV C Interval between two EOLs was Transmitter is defective. more than 10 sec. when receiver Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged received message data. due to line noise) SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. XMT C During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected. RCV or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective. During communication, lost loop - SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. current. XMT/ B Remote unit does not have RCV(V.34) compatible Modem. 143 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Code 502 540 541 542 543 544 550 554 555 580 581 601 623 630 631 634 638 Fax Information Codes Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause XMT/ B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected. RCV(V.34) or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective. During communication, lost loop - SC PCB or MJR PCB are defective. current. XMT ECM B No response after transmitting 3rd Incompatible interface. CTC or DCN received. XMT ECM D No response after transmitting 3rd Line is faulty. EOR or received DCN. MJR PCB abnormal. XMT ECM D No response to the 3rd RR Remote unit is abnormal. transmitted or received DCN. XMT ECM D T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without Remote unit is abnormal. MCF. XMT ECM D Stopped Transmission after EOR Line is faulty. Transmission. MJR PCB abnormal. RCV ECM C Timer between frames in phase C Defective remote station. has elapsed. RCV ECM D Transmitted ERR after receiving Line is faulty. EOR. RCV ECM D Transmitted PIN after receiving Line is faulty and Operator Call EOR. requested by RX side. XMT B Sub-address transmission to a unit Sub-address transmission to a unit that that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit has no Sub-address function. 155) OFF. XMT B Sub-address Password Sub-address transmission to a unit that transmission to a unit that has their has no Sub-address function. DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF. XMT ADF Door was opened during ADF transmission. XMT A No original was in the ADF. (Built- Operator removed the original from the in dialer engaged) ADF after dialing was completed. Original was not set properly in the ADF. XMT or RCV B Redial count over. No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone (Polling) is not detected. (destination dependent) Busy tone is detected. (destination dependent) T1 timer (35 ± 5 sec.) elapsed without a signal from the receiver. XMT A "STOP" button was pressed during Auto Dialing. XMT B Redial count over with no Telephone line cable is disconnected. response or busy tone was not Wrong number is dialed. detected. SC or MJR PCB is abnormal. Note: U.S.A. and Canadian models will redial only once if a busy tone is not detected. XMT LAN Power turned Off with applicable Power switched off. data in memory or during Power failure occurred. communication. 144 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Code 711 Mode RCV 712 XMT 714 XMT RCV 715 XMT 716 XMT 717 XMT 718 XMT 719 RCV 720 POP 721 POP 722 RCV 725 729 XMT POP XMT POP XMT 730 RCV 726 Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause LAN Incorrect LDAP settings. LDAP Server Name, LDAP Login Name, LDAP Password and/or LDAP Search Base are incorrect. LAN Unknown email address replied Mail Server received an incorrect email from the Mail Server. address. (Dependent on Server’s Mail application) LAN LAN Interface error. The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable is not Cannot logon to the LAN. connected. An unexpected LAN problem occurred. Check the LANC/LANB PCB connector. LAN TCP/IP connection timed out. Incorrect IP Address is set. Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP Address, SMTP Server IP Address. LAN Cannot logon to the LAN. Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is set. No email application is activated on the Mail Server. LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol Mail Server’s hard disk may be full. transmission. Mail Server is defective. LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size and while receiving printing data. The resolution. Ask originator to re-send in a supported paper size selected within your application to print is larger than size and resolution. the paper size loaded in the cassette(s). LAN Received data via LAN is in a Ask the originator to re-send with a format that is not supported. supported file attachment: * In a TIFF-F format. * Image data conforming to A4/Letter size. LAN Unable to connect with the POP Incorrect POP Server address is set. Server. POP Server is down. LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password is set. LAN Cable is disconnected. LAN Failed to obtain the Network Parameters (such as: IP Address, DHCP is not available. Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP (Contact the Network Administrator.) Address, etc.) from the DHCP server. LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address is set. DNS Server is down. LAN Received an error response from Incorrect POP Server address is set. the DNS Server. Incorrect SMTP Server address is set. LAN Failed to authenticate (SMTP SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name AUTHENTICATION) when and/or Password are incorrect. connecting with the SMTP server. (Contact the Network Administrator.) LAN Unable to program the Internet Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is parameters or the autodialer with set to 2: Valid. Email from a PC. 145 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Fax Information Codes Code Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause 731 RCV LAN Dialer full while Relayed Dial buffer for manual number dialing Transmission Request was (70 stations) are being used. received. 800 Relay The machine was requested to Comm. relay a document but has no Relay Hub capability. 815 Conf. RCV Mailbox is full. 816 Conf. Polled "The received Polling Password did not match. The machine does not have Confidential Comm. capability." 825 Conf. RCV Parameter settings of the initial Conf. Polled sending station are not properly set. 870 MEM XMT Memory overflow occurred while Multi-Copy storing documents into memory. 146 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4.9. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile) The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was performed. The code is recorded on the Journal. Journal Example ************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39******** NO. COMM. PAGES 01 OK 001 FILE DURATION X/R 129 00:00'42 XMT IDENTIFICATION 123 456 789 DATE MMM-dd TIME 01:55 DIAGNOSTIC C8649003C0000 1st digit 13th digit - PANASONIC PANAFAX DX-800 ********************************** - PANAFAX DX-800 - ****** -12345678901234567890- ******* 1st Digit: Manufacturer Code -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Manufacturer Code Casio Canon Sanyo Sharp Tamura Toshiba NEC Oki Hitachi Xerox Fujitsu Matsushita Mitsubishi Murata Ricoh 147 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2nd Digit -: Not used/defined Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition ID (TSI, CSI, CIG) RTN DCN Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received STOP Button Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed 3rd Digit -: Not used/defined Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Resolution (dpi) S-Fine 400 x 400 300 x 300 - Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Paper Width A4 A4 A4 A4 - 148 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4th Digit -: Not used/defined Data Scanning Rate 20 ms/line 5 ms/line 10 ms/line 40 ms/line 0 ms/line 20 ms/line 5 ms/line 10 ms/line 40 ms/line 0 ms/line 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Resolution Std Std Std Std Std Std Std Std Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine 5th Digit -: Not used/defined Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Memory/ Deferred Comm. Dialing/RCV Non-Memory Manual Non-Memory Communication Used Manual Non-Memory Communication Auto Dialing Non-Memory Used Auto Dialing Non-Memory Auto RCV Non-Memory Used Auto RCV Non-Memory Remote RCV Non-Memory Used Remote RCV Non-Memory Manual Memory Communication Used Manual Memory Communication Auto Dialing Memory Used Auto Dialing Memory Auto RCV Memory Used Auto RCV Memory Remote RCV Memory Used Remote RCV Memory 149 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Polling XMT/RCV Selective Comm. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT Off Off Off Off On On On On Off Off Off Off On On On On Password Comm. Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On On On 7th Digit -: Not used/defined Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Sub-Address Comm. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Confidential Relayed Comm. Comm. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Turnaround Polling Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 150 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8th Digit -: Not used/defined Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Advanced Comm. Report XMT Check & Call Memory Transfer Report XMT Check & Call Memory Transfer - Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Cover Sheet XMT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9th Digit -: Not used/defined Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Short Protocol B D - Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Standard/ NonStandard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard 151 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 10th Digit -: Not used/defined Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Coding MH MR MMR MH MR MMR - Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition ECM Yes Yes Yes - 11th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Symbol Rate (V.34) 2400 sr 2800 sr 3000 sr 3200 sr 3429 sr - V.34 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - 152 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 12th Digit -: Not used/defined Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Modem Speed 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps TC 7200 bps TC 9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps - Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Modem Speed (V.34) 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps 16800 bps 19200 bps 21600 bps 24000 bps 26400 bps 28800 bps 31200 bps 33600 bps - 13th Digit -: Not used/defined Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Line Status Private Line - 153 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5 Service Modes 5.1. 5.1.1. Service Modes (For Facsimile) Service Mode Table The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and determining the condition of the unit. No. Service Mode 1 Function Parameter Setting 2 3 RAM Edit Mode Print Parameter List / Reports 4 Modem Tests 5 6 Diagnostic RAM Initialization 7 8 LBP Service Mode Check & Call 9 System Maintenance Description Allows changes to the function parameters (the home position, etc.). Factory use only. Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace, Toner Order Form. Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the modem. Performs various hardware tests. Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function parameters. Changes the Printer Parameters. Allows input of information for Service Alert Report, Maintenance Alert Report, Toner Order Form. Used for Firmware Update and Sending a Received File during a fatal printer error. 154 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.2. Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting) Use the following procedure to change the function parameters. Step 1 Service Mode 1 Operation or Unit Condition Standby LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 00% 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “1”. 5 6 Enter the Function Parameter Number. Ex: Changing the "ALARM STATUS" -- Enter "001" and press [SET]. Press “START”. 7 Enter the new setting value. Ex: Enter "3" for Constant. 8 Press “START”. The new value will be stored and the next parameter will be displayed. PARAMETER #002 STOP COMM.JRNL? 9 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to change other Function Parameters or Press “STOP” twice to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy SET MODE ENTER NO. OR (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PARAMETER (000-199) ENTER PARAMETER #_ PARAMETER ALARM STATUS? #001 ALARM STATUS:Timer 1:OFF 2:Tmr 3:CONST ALARM STATUS:Const. 1:OFF 2:Tmr 3:CONST 15:00 00% Note: The following buttons provide these functions in the Service Mode: “START” “V” “/\” : : : The new setting value is stored in the machine. Scroll the function parameter number down. Scroll the function parameter number up. 155 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function MON/TEL DIAL 1 = Monitor Selects whether the machine starts to TX 2 = TEL/DIAL automatically during On-Hook dialing. Monitor : Start to TX after pressing START TEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically ALARM STATUS 1 = OFF Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status. 2 = Timer (6 sec.) OFF : Alarm is disabled. 3 = Constant Timer : Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds. Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is pressed or the error is cleared/ corrected. STOP COMM. 1 = Off Selects whether the machine prompts to print the JRNL 2 = On COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to INC and STOP is pressed during communication. CONTINUOUS 1 = Off Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is POLL 2 = Stn (Tx only) enabled. Stn: Place the document(s) on the ADF then press the Program Key [P4] to store or add the document(s) into a polled file. (See Note 4) NUMERIC ID 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to SET 2 = On (accepts) set or change the Numeric ID. Not Used ID DISPLAY 1 = Number (Numeric ID) Selects the priority of displaying the ID. 2 = Chara (Character ID) JNL COLUMN 1 = Preset station name Selects the contents of the ID to display on the 2 = Received ID Journal. MONITOR 1 = Off Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for 2 = On monitoring fax signals. (FOR SERVICE USE ONLY) DC LOOP 1 = Off (Normal) Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back 2 = On (Off Hook) communication test. TX LEVEL 00 = 0 dBm Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 ~ dBm steps. (Refer to Chapter 4.3.) 15 = -15 dBm RX LEVEL 1 = -43 dBm Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48 2 = -38 dBm dBm. 3 = -33 dBm 4 = -48 dBm DTMF LEVEL 00 = 0 dBm Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 ~ dBm steps. 15 = -15 dBm G3 RX EQL 1 = 0 dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode, 2 = 4 dB 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB. 3 = 8 dB 4 = 12 dB G3 TX EQL 1 = 0 dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission 2 = 4 dB mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB. 3 = 8 dB 4 = 12 dB 156 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. Parameter 015 Not Used ~ 016 017 TX START 018 RX START 019 ITU-T V.34 020 ITU-T ECM 021 EP TONE Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Selections Function 1 = 2400 bps 2 = 4800 bps 3 = 7200 bps 4 = 9600 bps 5 = TC7200 bps 6 = TC9600 bps 7 = 12000 bps 8 = 14400 bps 1 = 2400 bps 2 = 4800 bps 3 = 7200 bps 4 = 9600 bps 5 = TC7200 bps 6 = TC9600 bps 7 = 12000 bps 8 = 14400 bps 1 = Off 2 = On 3 = Select 1 = Off (Invalid) 2 = On (Valid) 1 = Off (without EP Tone) 2 = On (with EP Tone) 022 SIGNAL INTERVAL 1 = 100 ms 2 = 200 ms 3 = 500 ms 023 TCF CHECK 1 = Normal (Short) 2 = Long 024 CED 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T) FREQUENCY 2 = 2100 Hz 025 COMM. START- 1 = 1’st response UP 2 = 2’nd response 026 NONSTANDARD 027 SHORT PROTOCOL B 028 SHORT PROTOCOL D 1 = Off (Invalid) 2 = On (Valid) 1 = Off (Invalid) 2 = On (Valid) 1 = Off (Invalid) 2 = On (Valid) 029 REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS 1 = Off (will not accept) 2 = On (accepts) Selects the transmission modem start speed, 14400/ 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps. Note: This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 32. Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/ 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps. Note: This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 33. Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select. Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On, when entering Phone Book Dialing Numbers or Manual Number Dialing. Select the ECM mode. Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on V.29 mode. (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.) On : Add Off : Do not add Selects the time interval between the receiving signal and the transmitting signal. Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT and Polling). (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.) Selects own mode (Panafax mode). Selects the short protocol mode. Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it allows the machine to automatically store the modem speed for each Auto Dial Number. Selects whether the machine accepts Remote Diagnostics from the service station. 157 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function CED & 300 bps 1 = 75 ms Selects the pause interval between the CED and the 2 = 1 sec 300 bps signal. (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.) RTC = EOLx12 1 = Off (EOLx6) Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12. 2 = On (EOLx12) V34 TX START 2400-33600bps Selects the transmission modem start speed for V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps. V34 RX START 2400-33600bps Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps. V34 TX Symbol 2400-3429sr Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/ Rate 3200/3000/2800/2400 sr. Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate. V34 RX Symbol 2400-3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3429/ Rate 3200/3000/2800/2400 sr. Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate. Not Used PROTOCOL 1 = Off (not displayed) Selects whether to display the modem speed during DISPLAY 2 = On (displayed) communication. Press “V” or “/\ “ to display. Not Used FLASH TIME 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash ~ key. 100 = 1000 ms E/F TIME 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash (Except for USA ~ key. and Canada) 100 = 1000 ms PAUSE TIME 1 = 1 sec. Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for ~ dialing through a switchboard or for international 10 = 10 sec. calls. Not Used REDIAL 0 = no waiting Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1 INTERVAL ~ minute steps. 15 = 15 minutes REDIAL COUNT 0 = no redial Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step ~ intervals. 15 = 15 times Note: In order to comply with the requirements TBR21 in the EC destinations, do not select 15 times. RING DETECT 1 = 1 ring Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in 1 COUNT ~ ring step intervals. 9 = 9 rings ON-HOOK TIME 0 = 0 sec. Selects the on-hook time between sequential ~ communication calls in 1 second step intervals. 90 = 90 sec. RESPONSE 1 = 1 sec. Selects the waiting interval for the response after WAIT ~ completing the dialing. 90 = 90 sec. Not Used 158 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. Parameter 050 RING DETECT MODE 051 Not Used 052 PULSE RATE 053 Not Used 054 055 BUSY TONE CHECK 056 DIAL TONE CHECK (Except for USA and Canada) 057 DC LOOP CHECK (Except for USA and Canada) 058 COMM.JRNL +IMAGE 059 CONF. RCV REPORT ON 060 VERSION 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Selections Function 1 = Normal Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line 2 = Rough signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the unit may detect the ringing signals. 1 = 10 pps 2 = 20 pps Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps. 1 = Off 2 = On 1 = Off 2 = On Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone. 1 = Off (will not check) 2 = On (checks) Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during communication. Selects whether to detect dial tone before dialing the telephone number. 1 = Off (without image) Selects whether the machine prints the COMM. 2 = On (with image) Journal with image. 1 = Off 2 = On Indicates the Host software version. TX/RX/PRT/CPY TX/RX/PRT/CPY Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and COUNTER copied document count. PRINT 1 = Off Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List, COUNTER 2 = On the counter information that is displayed in the Function Parameter No. 61. Not Used SILENT 01 = 1 sec. Select silent detection timeout time (TAM I/F). DETECTION ~ TIME OUT 60 = 60 sec. SILENT 01 = 1 sec. Select ring detection integration time (TAM I/F). INTEGRATION ~ TIME 10 = 10 sec. RING COUNT 01 = 1 sec. Select ring detection count 1 to 99 times in one step (TAM) ~ intervals on TAM I/F mode. 99 = 99 sec. Not Used NYSE FAX 1 = Off Selects whether the machine will forward the FORWARD 2 = On incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station. (For USA and Canada only) Note: Once this parameter is activated, Fax Forwarding via Fax Parameter 054 is automatically disabled. NYSE LOCAL 1 = INC Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes PRINT 2 = ON (Always) after FAX Forwarding. INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails. ON : Always prints. 159 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function 1. Selects the line disconnect condition during LINE ERROR 1 = 128 lines reception. If the number of line errors exceed this 2 = 256 lines setting, the unit will disconnect the line. 3 = 512 lines 2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/ 4 = 1024 lines PIN. 5 = 2048 lines (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "LINES") 6 = Off (See Note 1) (will not disconnect line) TOTAL ERROR 1 = 5% Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/ 2 = 10% PIN. 3 = 15% (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".) 4 = 20% (See Note 2) CONTINUOUS 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6 or ERROR 2 = 3 lines/STD 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total error 3 = 6 lines/STD exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit RTN/PIN. 4 = 12 lines/STD (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".) ERROR 1 = Lines Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate. DETECT 2 = Rate RTN RECEIVE 1 = Disconnect Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or 2 = Continue continue when "RTN" is received. CODING 1 = MH (MH only) Selects the coding scheme. 2 = MR (MH or MR) 3 = MMR (MH or MR or MMR) Not Used RX JAM 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the maximum length of a received LENGTH 2=2m document that can be printed. 3=8m Not Used 078 079 080 DOC. TOP FEED 081 DOC. END FEED 082 JAM LENGTH -5.0 mm ~ +5.0 mm -5.0 mm ~ +5.0 mm 1=1m 2=2m 3=8m 4 = Unlimited Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor ON position and the scanning start position. Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor OFF position and the scanning end position. Selects the maximum length of the original that can be scanned. 083 Not Used 084 LINE AS NO PAPER 1 = Ring (ring) 2 = Busy (keep line busy) Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the remote station when the recording paper runs out or the unit cannot receive because of any trouble. 085 Not Used 086 REDUCTION FINE 1 = Off 2 = On Selects whether the resolution is preset to Fine, when sending with reduction B4→A4. (For B4 Scanning Model only) 160 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. 087 088 089 Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function DARKER LEVEL 0 = Lightest Contrast Selects the contrast level. ~ 0← →15 NORMAL 15 = Darkest Contrast Lightest← →Darkest LEVEL LIGHTER LEVEL Not Used 090 091 092 SMOOTHING 093 ~ 109 110 111 112 1 = Off 2 = On Selects whether the smoothing function is available. Not Used MAC ADDRESS Not Used INSERT EMAIL 1 = Off TXT 2 = On 113 Not Used 114 SYMBOL SET 115 TIME ZONE 116 OVERWRITE WARNING 1 = Standard 2 = Extended 1 = Scroll 2 = Direct 1 = Yes 2 = No 117 Not Used ~ 119 120 FORWARD ALL 1 = Off COM. 2 = On (Except for USA and Canada) 121 FAC LOCAL 1 = INC PRINT 2 = ON (Always) (Except for USA and Canada) 122 LDAP 1 = Off 2 = On Indicates the MAC Address. Selects whether the Text Template (email message) is programmable and added on all email sent in the message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40 characters Programmed in the User Parameters.) Note: After enabling this feature, aside from entering the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed Numbers. Selects whether the extended symbols other than "%" is available for Internet Parameters entry. Selects the setting method for Time Zone. Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll through the Time Zone Table. Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone directly, (*) key to be used as a switch between +/-. Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when programming the Auto Dialer via email. Selects whether the machine will forward the incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station. Note: If Fax Parameter 054 is activated, Fax Forwarding is enable. Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes after FAX Forwarding. INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails. ON : Always prints. When LDAP is used, specialize characters may be displayed as different characters. Available from May production. 161 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. Parameter 123 Not Used ~ 129 130 BUSY-ACK TIMING 131 132 133 134 135 ~ 199 Service Mode 1 : Function Parameter Table Selections Function • In Busy • After Busy • While Busy CMD RCV GRD 1 min. TIMER ~ 15 min. PRT DATA 1 min. TIMER ~ 15 min. COLLATION 1 = Off (PRT) 2 = On 3 = Auto COLLATION 1 = Off (PC I/F) 2 = On 3 = Auto Not Used Selects the signal timing between the BUSY and ACK signal in Printer Interface Mode. Selects the Guard Timer between each GDI Command in Printer Interface Mode. Selects the Guard Timer between each GDI Data Frame in Printer Interface Mode. Selects the Print Collation in Printer Interface Mode. When “Auto” is selected, print collation will operate according to the setting in Fax Parameter #65. Selects the Print Collation in PC Interface Mode. When “Auto” is selected, print collation will operate according to the setting in Fax Parameter #65. Note 1: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error) - Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN Signal MCF/PIP RTP/PIP RTN/PIN 1:128 0-31 32-63 64-127 2:256 0-63 64-127 128-255 Setting 3:512 4:1024 0-127 0-255 128-255 256-511 256-511 512-1023 5:2048 0-511 512-1023 1024-2047 6:Off Always - Note 2: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error) - Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN Signal MCF/PIP RTP/PIP RTN/PIN 1:5% 0-2 3-4 5- Setting 2:10% 3:15% 0-4 0-7 5-9 8-14 1015- 4:20% 0-9 10-19 20- Note 3: The default setting of parameters depends on the destination’s specifications or regulations. Print the Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings. Note 4: Continuous Polling (Station Mode) This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory. To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station". The Program Key [P4] will be assigned with the "Store-4-Polling" name automatically and cannot be changed. To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF and then press the Program Key [P4] to store or add the document(s) into a polled file. (Note: If a regular polled file ([FUNCTION][3][2]) is stored in memory, the Program Key [P4] for Continuous Polling will not be accepted.) 162 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.3. Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports and Test Results) From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form. 5.1.3.1. Function Parameter List A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure. Step 1 Service Mode 3 - Function Parameter List Operation or Unit Condition Standby LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “3”. 5 Press “START”. 6 After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3. SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR 7 Press “STOP” to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy SET MODE ENTER NO. OR 15:00 00% (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST * PRINTING * FUNC. PARAMETER LIST 15:00 00% 163 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Function Parameter List (Sample) *************** -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 *** P.01 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 MON/TEL DIAL:[Monitor] Monitor ALARM STATUS:[Timer] Timer STOP COMM.JRNL:[On] On CONTINUOUS POLL:[Off] Off NUMERIC ID SET:[On] On --------ID DISPLAY:[Chara] Chara JNL COLUMN:[Station] Station MONITOR:[Off] Off DC LOOP:[Off] Off 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 RING DET MODE:[Normal] Normal ---------PULSE RATE:[10pps] 10pps ------------------BUSY TONE CHECK:[On] On ------------------COMM. JRNL +IMAGE:[On] On CONF.RCV REPORT:[On] On 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 TX LEVEL:[-11dBm] -11dBm RX LEVEL:[-43dBm] -43dBm DTMF LEVEL:[-5dBm] -5dBm G3 RX EQL:[ 0dB] 0dB G3 TX EQL:[ 0dB] 0dB ----------------TX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps RX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps ITU-T V34:[On] On 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 VERSION: DX-800 AAV11100AU TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000050/000058/000074/000001 PRINT COUNTER:[Off] Off ---------SILENT DET.T.OUT:[60] 60 SILENT INT. TIME:[5sec] 5sec RING COUNT(TAM):[5] 5 ---------NYSE FAX FORWARD:[Off] Off NYSE LOCAL PRINT:[Inc] Inc 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 ITU-T ECM:[On] On EP TONE:[Off] Off SIG. INTERVAL:[500ms] 500ms TCF CHECK:[Normal] Normal CED FREQ.:[2100Hz] 2100Hz COMM. START-UP:[1'st] 1'st NON-STANDARD:[On] On SHORT PROTOCOL B:[On] On SHORT PROTOCOL D:[On] On REMOTE DIAG.:[On] On 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 LINE ERROR:[128] 128 TOTAL ERROR:[ 10] 10 CONTI. ERROR:[Off] Off ERROR DETECT:[Rate] Rate RTN RECEIVE:[Discon] Discon CODING:[MMR] MMR ---------RX JAM LENGTH:[Off] Off ------------------- 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 CED & 300bps:[75ms] 75ms RTC=EQL x 12:[Off] Off V34 TX START:[33600bps] 33600bps V34 RX START:[33600bps] 33600bps V34 TX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr V34 RX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr --------PROTOCOL DISPLAY:[Off] Off --------FLASH TIME:[500ms] 500ms 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 DOC TOP FEED:[0.0mm] 0.0mm DOC END FEED:[0.0mm] 0.0mm JAM LENGTH:[ 2 m] 2 m ---------LINE AS NOPAPER:[Ring] Ring ------------------DARKER LEVEL:[4] 4 NORMAL LEVEL:[8] 8 LIGHTER LEVEL:[12] 12 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 --------PAUSE TIME:[3sec] 3 sec --------REDIAL INTERVAL:[3min] 3 min REDIAL COUNT:[5] 5 RING DET. COUNT:[2] 2 ON-HOOK TIME:[5sec] 5 sec RESPONSE WAIT:[55sec] 55 sec ----------------- 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 ------------------SMOOTHING:[On] On ---------------------------------------------------------------- Note:The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect. - PANASONIC ******************************** - PANAFAX DX-800 - ******* - 12345678901234567890 -********* 164 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Function Parameter List (Sample) ************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.02 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 MAC ADRESS:0800230078DE ---------INSERT EMAIL TXT:[Off] Off ---------SYMBOL SET:[Std] Std TIME ZONE:[Scroll] Scroll OVERWRITE WARNING:[Yes] Yes ---------PRT FWD COMM JNL:[Inc] Inc ---------- 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 BUSY-ACK TIMING:[In Busy] In Busy CMD RCV GRD TIMER:[3min] 3min PRT DATA TIMER:[3min] 3min COLLATION(PRT):[Off] Off COLLATION (PC):[Auto] Auto ---------------------------------------------- 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Note:The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect. -PANASONIC ******************************** -PANAFAX DX-800- ****** -12345678901234567890- *********** Note: 1. [ ] - Factory Default 2. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the destination’s regulations. 3. “ * ” mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default. 165 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.3.2. Page Memory Test A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory and the printer mechanism using the following procedure. Step 1 Standby Service Mode 3 - Page Memory Test Operation or Unit Condition LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “3”. 5 Press “3” and “START”. 6 After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3. SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR 7 Press “STOP” to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy SET MODE ENTER NO. OR 15:00 00% (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST * PRINTING * PAGE MEMORY TEST 15:00 00% MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 VERSION: DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU OPTION BOARD: MEMORY SIZE: (4MB) TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000123/000456/000789/000333 MAC ADRESS:0800230078DE SHIPMENT SET 166 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.3.3. Printer Report All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure. Step 1 Service Mode 3 - Printer Report Operation or Unit Condition Standby LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “3”. 5 Press “4” and “START”. 7 After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3. SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR 8 Press “STOP” to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 00% SET MODE ENTER NO. OR (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST * PRINTING * PRINTER REPORT 15:00 00% 167 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 **************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02******** LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd 15:38 NO. 001-12 CUSTOMER ID : 1234567890123456 FAX ROM VERSION : DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU TRANSMIT COUNTER RECEIVE COUNTER COPY COUNTER PRINT COUNTER : : : : PRINT ERROR : ****************************** - 000475 000398 001083 001575 1.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 NO.001-12 2.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 NO.001-11 3.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:23 NO.004-36 PANAFAX DX-800 PANASONIC - ***** - 12345678901234567890 - ****** 168 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 1. Printer Error Code Table Printer Error Code Table Error Description of Problems Code 00 No problem detected. 11 Timing Sensor did not turn ON within a certain period of time. (Original Cassette Feeder) Cause 12 Timing Sensor did not turn ON within a certain period of time. (250 sheet Optional Cassette Feeder) 14 Timing Sensor did not turn OFF within a certain period of time. 15 Paper Exit Sensor did not turn ON within a certain period of time. Paper Exit Sensor did not turn OFF within a certain period of time. Timing Sensor detected paper while initializing the unit. Paper Exit Sensor detected paper while initializing the unit. The temperature of the Fuser Roller remained low even after the circuit was activated. Abnormally high Fuser Roller temperature after the circuit was de-activated. 16 17 18 22 23 1. Recording Paper misfeeding, Paper Feed Roller defective. 2. Drive Clutch defective. 3. Timing Sensor defective. 1. Recording Paper misfeeding, Paper Feed Roller defective. 2. Drive Clutch defective. 3. Timing Sensor defective. 1. Recording Paper Jam. 2. Timing Sensor defective. 3. Incorrect paper size setting. 1. Recording Paper Jam. 2. Paper Exit Sensor defective. 1. Recording Paper Jam. 2. Paper Exit Sensor defective. 1. Recording Paper jammed in the unit. 2. Timing Sensor defective. 1. Recording Paper jammed in the unit. 2. Paper Exit Sensor defective. 1. Fuser Unit defective. 2. SC PCB defective. 3. Power Supply Unit defective. 1. Fuser Unit defective. 2. SC PCB defective. 3. Power Supply Unit defective. 1. Fuser Unit defective. 2. SC PCB defective. 3. Power Supply Unit defective. 1. Thermistor defective (Fuser Unit). 2. SC PCB defective. 1. Thermistor defective (Fuser Unit). 2. SC PCB defective. 3. Power Supply Unit defective. 1. LSU defective. 24 The temperature of the Fuser Roller was not controlled within a certain margin. 25 Thermistor open. (See Note) Thermistor detected temperature over 392°F (200°C). (See Note) The Tetragon Motor did not reach a constant speed of 8,898 rpm (400 dpi)/13,347 rpm (600 dpi) within a specified period of time. The Tetragon Motor did not maintain a 1. LSU defective. constant speed of 8,898 rpm (400 dpi)/ 13,347 rpm (600 dpi). HSYNC signal abnormal. 1. LSU defective. 2. SC PCB defective. A/D Converter error. 1. SC PCB defective. Unit detected “No Toner Cartridge”. 1. Toner Cartridge not installed. 2. Toner Sensor defective. Unit detected “Printer Cover Open”. 1. Printer Cover is not closed. 2. ILS PCB defective. 26 31 32 36 54 61 63 169 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Printer Error Code Table Error Description of Problems Code 64 Unit detected “No Cassette”. Cause 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 1. 65 Unit detected “Out of Paper”. 81 No response from LP Controller. 82 Illegal response from LP Controller. Cassette not installed or partially open. Cassette Sensor defective. The Paper Cassette is empty. Paper Detect Sensor defective. SC PCB defective. SC PCB defective. Note: If an 021 series Error Code occurs, 021-25 (Thermistor Open) or 021-26 (Thermistor detected temperarure over 392°F (200°C), a pre-programmed recovery safety software is activated to protect the unit and the service personnel during abnormal increase in temperature. Once activated, this program is downloaded into the LPC PC Board’s SRAM, disabling the Fuser Lamp and preventing it from turning ON again. In order to reset this circuit, please follow the procedure below. 1) Reset the LBP Fuser by using Service Mode 7-1-2 (Section 5.1.7.) and Power OFF/ON. 2) Replace the Thermistor or Fuser Unit. If the problem persists. 3) Replace the SC PCB. 170 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 2. Printer Error Detail Explanation Recording Paper Jam Detection Feed Solenoid (nADF1) (CN14, 2) Recording Paper Size Setting A sec Legal 0.2 A A4 0.2 Letter 0.2 Timing Sensor (nRSEN) 1.35s E11 Timing Sensor did not turn ON 0.55s E14 Timing Sensor did no turn OFF 4.5s E001 will be logged when nRSEN does not go low between 0.55 sec to 4.5 sec after pADF1 goes high. E007 will be logged when nRSEN does not go OFF between B sec to C sec after nRSENA goes ON. B C Recording Paper Size Setting B sec C sec Legal 9.05 10.25 A4 7.48 8.68 Letter 7.00 8.20 Paper Exit Sensor Timing (nESEN) (CN7, 4) E15 Paper Exit Sensor did not turn ON E16 Paper Exit Sensor did not turn OFF 4.25s 3.85s 5.05s E007 will be logged when nESEN does not go low between 3.85 sec or 5.05 sec after Timing Sensor goes low. E007 will be logged when nESEN does not go high between D sec or E sec after nESEN goes low. D E Recording Paper Size Setting D sec E sec Legal 8.12 10.25 A4 6.56 8.68 Letter 6.08 8.20 171 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Fuser Error Detection ( C) E26 will be logged. 200 E24 will be logged if Thermistor detects 180 C for more than 3 sec. (Thermostat will open.) 180 170 E23 will be logged if Thermistor detects 175 C or higher for 5 min. after Fuser Lamp is turned Off. OFF 165 160 155 Fuser Roller Temperature 150 E24 will be logged if Thermistor detects less than 140 C for 3 sec during the print process. 70 E22 will be logged when temperature does not rise. 25 E25 will be logged when temperature does not go up at low temperature environment. 14 Approx. 30 sec Time 172 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Laser Unit (LSU) Error Detection nPRNT Print Start nPMON (CN69-3) Tetragon Motor ON nPMRY (CN69-2) Normal Condition Tetragon Motor Ready Motor ON 20 sec 3 sec E31 nPMRY Tetragon Motor does not reach constant speed during wake up state. nPMRY does not go low for more than 2 sec during 3 sec to 20 sec after nPMON goes low. E32 nPMRY Tetragon Motor does not maintain constant speed. nPMON nPMRY:ON OFF OFF OFF OFF nPMRY goes high 4 times during printing. nVIDEO (CN68-6) Laser Timing Signal 1.7 ms (400 dpi) 1.1 ms (600 dpi) Normal Condition nHSYNC (CN68-2) Laser Timing Detection E36 nHSYNC (CN68-2) Can not detect Laser Timing nHSYNC timing signal is less than 60% of nVIDEO signal. 173 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Out of Toner Detection Toner Sensor Output Signal Status A (Enough toner in the cartridge) Max. - min. voltage is less than 1.0V 3V Min. voltage is more than 1.4V Status B 2V (Remaining toner is getting low) Max. - min. voltage is less than 0.25V Min. voltage is less than 1.4V 1.4V Status C (Almost no toner) 1V Mixing blade rotating cycle Max. - min. voltage is less than 0.08V Min. voltage is less than 1.4V 0V Toner Sensor output may change when the mixing blade passes above the Toner Sensor. Therefore the output signal has a max. voltage and min. voltage during mixing blade rotation cycle (4.6 sec.). E043 If the unit detects Status B, 10 times during printing, the machine recognizes that the remaining toner is low and the display shows "REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE". E041 After detecting E043 and the LBP Print Available Counter Value reaches "0" (after 100 pages are printed), the unit logs E041 (OUT OF TONER). E045 If the unit detects Status C when power is On, the unit logs E045 and displays "NO CARTRIDGE". The unit will recover when detecting Status A after a new toner cartridge is installed. 174 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.3.4. All Document Files Print the document files from the Flash Memory. Step 1 Service Mode 3 - All Document Files Operation or Unit Condition Standby LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “3”. 5 Press “5” and “START”. 6 After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3. SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR 7 Press “STOP” to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy SET MODE ENTER NO. OR 15:00 00% (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST * PRINTING * ALL DOCUMENT FILES 15:00 00% Note: Documents received with a Confidential Code will not be printed by this operation. 175 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.3.5. Protocol Trace Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication. Step 1 Standby Service Mode 3 - Protocol Trace Operation or Unit Condition MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “3”. 5 Press “6” and “START”. Note: If there were no transmission or reception mode after the power is last tured on, you cannot print the Protocol Trace Report. After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3. 6 7 LCD Display 15:00 00% SET MODE ENTER NO. OR (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST Press “STOP” to return to standby. * PRINTING * PROTOCOL TRACE SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 00% *************** PROTOCOL LOG REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 ***P.01 STATUS MODE SPEED REMOTE CAPA. LOCAL CAPA. : : : : : OK ECM-TX (STANDARD) 9600bps 00MS/L DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12 TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B 39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30 DCS 00 C6 F8 44 COMMAND LOG. REMOTE : NSF CSI DIS CFR LOCAL : TSI DCS PIX PPS-EOP -----------------------------------------------------------------REMOTE : MCF LOCAL : DCN -PANASONIC************************************ -PANAFAX DX-800- ***********-12345678901234567890-****** 176 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.3.6. Toner Cartridge Order Form The Toner Cartridge Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure. Step 1 Service Mode 3 - Toner Cartridge Order Form Operation or Unit Condition LCD Display Standby MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “3”. 5 Press “7” and “START”. 6 After printing is completed, the unit returns to the display in step 3. SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR 7 Press “STOP” to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy SET MODE ENTER NO. OR 15:00 00% (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR PRINTOUT (1-7) 1:FUNC. PARAM. LIST * PRINTING * TONER ORDER FORM 15:00 00% 177 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 For USA and Canada ************************************* > TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM < ************************************* **** The toner supply in your facsimile machine is running low **** (1) To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer Panafax Corp.(2) by Phone: by Fax: 1 201 111 5555 (3) 1 201 111 4444 (4) Thank you for your order. Customer Name and Address ========================= Ship to: Bill to: Attention: Attention: Phone No.: Phone No.: Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required): Toner Cartridge: UG-5510 (6) Serial No.: Quantity Required: / Print your name and title / Signature & Date Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low” (2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits (3) Order Tel # Up to 36 digits (4) Order Fax # Up to 36 digits (5) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code) (6) Toner Cartridge # UG-5510 (For USA / Canada) for DX-800 178 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 For Other Destinations ************************************* > TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM < ************************************* **** The toner supply in your facsimile machine is running low **** (1) To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer Panafax Corp.(2) by Phone: by Fax: 1 201 111 5555 (3) 1 201 111 4444 (4) Thank you for your order. Customer Name and Address ========================= Ship to: Bill to: Attention: Attention: Phone No.: Phone No.: Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required): Toner Cartridge: UG-3350 (6) Serial No.: Quantity Required: / Print your name and title / Signature & Date Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low” (2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits (3) Order Tel # Up to 36 digits (4) Order Fax # Up to 36 digits (5) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code) (6) Toner Cartridge # UG-3350 (For Other Destinations) for DX-600 179 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.4. Service Mode 4 (Modem Test) 5.1.4.1. Binary Signal This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. Step 1 Standby Service Mode 4 - Binary Signal Operation or Unit Condition LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 00% 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “4”. 5 Press “START”. 6 Enter the signal number (1-9) to select the binary signal. SIGNAL TEST 300bps 7 Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select another signal, repeat step 6. SIGNAL TEST IDLE (ENTER 1-9) 8 Press "STOP" twice to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy SET MODE ENTER NO. OR (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR MODEM TEST (1-5) 1:SIGNAL TEST SIGNAL TEST IDLE (ENTER 1-9) 15:00 00% Binary Signal Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signals V21 300bps V27ter 2400bps V27ter 4800bps V29 7200bps V29 9600bps V17 TC7200bps V17 TC9600bps V33 12000bps V33 14400bps 180 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.4.2. Tonal Signal This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. Step 1 Service Mode 4 - Tonal Signal Operation or Unit Condition Standby LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 00% 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “4”. 5 Press “2” and “START”. 6 Enter the signal number (1-7) to select the binary signal. TONAL TEST 1080Hz 7 Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select another signal, repeat step 6. TONAL TEST IDLE (ENTER 1-7) 8 Press "STOP" twice to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy SET MODE ENTER NO. OR (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR MODEM TEST (1-5) 1:SIGNAL TEST TONAL TEST IDLE (ENTER 1-7) 15:00 00% Tonal Signal Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Signals 462 Hz 1080 Hz 1100 Hz 1300 Hz 1650 Hz 1850 Hz 2100 Hz 181 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.4.3. DTMF Signal This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output. The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure. Step 1 Standby Service Mode 4 - DTMF Signal Operation or Unit Condition LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “4”. 5 Press “3” and “START”. 6a Press "START" for DTMF Single Tone Generation. 7a Enter the signal number (1-8) to select the DTMF signal. 6b Press "2" and "START" for Dual Tone Generation. 7b Enter the signal number (0-#) to select the DTMF Dual tone. DUAL TONE (0) 8 Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select another signal, repeat step 7a or 7b. SINGLE TONE ENTER (1-8) 9 Press "STOP" twice to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 00% SET MODE ENTER NO. OR (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR MODEM TEST (1-5) 1:SIGNAL TEST DTMF TEST (1-2) 1.SINGLE DTMF Single Tone Table Number DTMF Signal Tones 1 697 Hz 2 770 Hz 3 852 Hz 4 941 Hz 5 1209 Hz 6 1336 Hz 7 1477 Hz 8 1633 Hz SINGLE TONE ENTER (1-8) SINGLE TONE 697Hz DUAL TONE ENTER (0-#) 15:00 00% DTMF Dual Tone Table Number DTMF Dual Tones 0 941 Hz + 1336 Hz 1 697 Hz + 1209 Hz 2 697 Hz + 1336 Hz 3 697 Hz + 1477 Hz 4 770 Hz + 1209 Hz 5 770 Hz + 1336 Hz 6 770 Hz + 1477 Hz 7 852 Hz + 1209 Hz 8 852 Hz + 1336 Hz 9 852 Hz + 1477 Hz * 941 Hz + 1209 Hz # 941 Hz + 1477 Hz 182 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.4.4. Binary Signal (V.34) This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. (V.34) Step 1 Service Mode 4 - Binary Signal Operation or Unit Condition Standby LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 00% 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “4”. 5 Press “5” and “START”. 6 Enter the signal number (01-61) and press [START] to select the binary signal. V.34 MODEM TEST V34 2400sr 2400bps 7 Press "CLEAR" to end the signal generation. To select another signal, repeat step 6. V.34 MODEM TEST ENTER NO. 8 Press "STOP" twice to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy SET MODE ENTER NO. OR (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR MODEM TEST (1-5) 1:SIGNAL TEST V.34 MODEM TEST ENTER NO. 15:00 00% Binary Signal Table Number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Signals V34 2400 sr 2400 bps V34 2400 sr 4800 bps V34 2400 sr 7200 bps V34 2400 sr 9600 bps V34 2400 sr 12000 bps V34 2400 sr 14400 bps V34 2400 sr 16800 bps V34 2400 sr 19200 bps V34 2400 sr 21600 bps V34 2800 sr 4800 bps V34 2800 sr 7200 bps V34 2800 sr 9600 bps V34 2800 sr 12000 bps V34 2800 sr 14400 bps V34 2800 sr 16800 bps V34 2800 sr 19200 bps V34 2800 sr 21600 bps V34 2800 sr 24000 bps V34 2800 sr 26400 bps V34 3000 sr 4800 bps V34 3000 sr 7200 bps Number 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Signals V34 3000 sr 9600 bps V34 3000 sr 12000 bps V34 3000 sr 14400 bps V34 3000 sr 16800 bps V34 3000 sr 19200 bps V34 3000 sr 21600 bps V34 3000 sr 24000 bps V34 3000 sr 26400 bps V34 3000 sr 28800 bps V34 3200 sr 4800 bps V34 3200 sr 7200 bps V34 3200 sr 9600 bps V34 3200 sr 12000 bps V34 3200 sr 14400 bps V34 3200 sr 16800 bps V34 3200 sr 19200 bps V34 3200 sr 21600 bps V34 3200 sr 24000 bps V34 3200 sr 26400 bps V34 3200 sr 28800 bps V34 3200 sr 31200 bps Number 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 Signals V34 3429 sr 4800 bps V34 3429 sr 7200 bps V34 3429 sr 9600 bps V34 3429 sr 12000 bps V34 3429 sr 14400 bps V34 3429 sr 16800 bps V34 3429 sr 19200 bps V34 3429 sr 21600 bps V34 3429 sr 24000 bps V34 3429 sr 26400 bps V34 3429 sr 28800 bps V34 3429 sr 31200 bps V34 3429 sr 33600 bps ANSam CM JM INFO0c & TONEB INFO0c & TONEA PPh & AC & ALT 183 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.5. Service Mode 5 (Diagnostic) 5.1.5.1. CCD Test This Service Mode is used to check the CCD. Use the following procedure to initiate the test. Step 1 Standby Service Mode 5 Operation or Unit Condition LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “5”. 5 Press “START”. The Scanner will be active. 1:CCD TEST * CHECK NOW * 6 Press "STOP" twice to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy SET MODE ENTER NO. OR 15:00 00% (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR DIAGNOSTIC (1-2) 1:CCD TEST 15:00 00% 184 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.5.2. LCD / LED Test This Service Mode is used to check the LCD and LEDs on the Control Panel. Use the following procedure to initiate the test. Step 1 Service Mode 5 Operation or Unit Condition Standby LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “5”. 5 Press ”2” and “START”. 1) LCDs display as shown at right. 2) All LEDs will be lit. 6 Press "STOP" twice to return to standby. 15:00 00% SET MODE ENTER NO. OR (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR DIAGNOSTIC (1-2) 1:CCD TEST 2:LCD/LED TEST * CHECK NOW * MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 00% 185 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.6. Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization) Initializes the RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values. Note: This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed. Step 1 Standby Service Mode 6 Operation or Unit Condition LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “6”. 5 Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the initialization mode. (See Table) 6 Press “START”. 7 Press "STOP" twice to return to standby. SET MODE ENTER NO. OR 15:00 00% (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR * RAM INITIALIZE * ENTER NO. OR * RAM INITIALIZE * LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR * COMPLETED * MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 00% RAM Initialization Table No. Initialize Mode 99 SHIPMENT SET (A) 98 SHIPMENT SET (B) 97 16 15 14 13 12 11 * FLASH MEMORY CLEAR LBP LOG CLEAR LOGO/ID/PSWD CLR ALL JOB CLEAR PROG. DIAL CLEAR AUTO DIAL CLEAR JOURNAL CLEAR PARAMETER INIT. Description Deletes all setting information, except parameter number 80 and 81, then set default values. (See Note) Deletes all setting information, except parameter number 61, 80 and 81, then set default values. (See Note) Deletes all information in the Flash Memory. Clears the Printer Error Log. Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password. Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory. Clears the Program keys. Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books. Clears the Journal contents. Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default values. 186 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.7. Service Mode 7 (LBP Service Mode) This Service Mode is used to change printer parameters and verify printer information. Use the following procedure to change printer parameter. Step 1 Service Mode 7 Operation or Unit Condition Standby MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “7”. 5 1) Press "START" for printer parameter settings. Press "2" and "START" to get the printer information. Ex: Enter "START" for printer parameter settings. Press "3" and “START”. Then enter the number of pages. Ex: Enter "50" and press "START". Press "\/" or "/\" to select another Parameter Name (See Table) or press "CLEAR" to return to step 4. 6 7 8 1 SET MODE ENTER NO. OR 2 3 Parameter Name PRINTER COUNTER LBP FUSER RESET OUT OF TONER \/ /\ PRINT AVAILABLE \/ /\ LBP MEMORY CAPACITY 2 15:00 00% (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR LP SERVICE MODE (1-2) 1:LBP PARAMETER SET Repeat step 5 through 7 to request operation, or press "STOP" twice to return to standby. Sub-Code 1 LCD Display LBP PARAMETER SET 1.PRINTER COUNTER LBP PARAMETER SET 3.OUT OF TONER LP SERVICE MODE (1-2) 1.LBP PARAMETER SET MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 00% Description Displays and resets the Printer and Paper Cassette(s) counters. Clears the LBP Fuser Error. Sets the number of pages to print after low toner is detected. (Factory default = 100, adjustable from 0 - 999) Shows the remaining number of allowable printable pages after low toner has been detected (Counter Only). Shows the Page Memory Capacity. 187 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.8. 5.1.8.1. Service Mode 8 (Check & Call) Overview This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the Fax machine maintenance to their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows: 1. The machine’s printer error information is stored in the Printer Report. 2. The printer report can be manually printed when required. 3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the preregistered telephone number. 4. When the unit detects Low Toner, it can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the preregistered telephone number. 5. When the unit detects Low Toner, it can automatically print out the Toner Order Form with preregistered order information. 5.1.8.2. Printer Reports • Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted 1. Manual print The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.1.3.1.) 2. Automatic transmission/printout 3. Service Alert Report When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number. However, the unit will not transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log. 4. Maintenance Alert Report When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number. Refer to the Printer Error Code Table. 5. Toner Cartridge Order Form When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the preregistered order information. Note: The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal). • Printer Error Code Table Printer Error Code Table Log Tx Condition Content of Error Only Report O R/C Paper Jam 1st Cassette. O R/C Paper Jam 2nd Cassette. O R/C Paper Exit Error. No Paper in 1st or 2nd NO PAPER R/C Cassette. NO S No 1st or 2nd Cassette. Cassette Fuser Problem / LP R/C O S Thermistor disconnected Problem TONER O S/R/C No Toner TONER O M S/R/C Low Toner Warning TONER O S No Toner Cartridge Info. Printer LED/LCD Code Error Code 001 11 JAM 002 12 JAM 007 14-18 JAM 010 00 011 64, 65 021 22-26 041 043 045 00 00 61 188 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Printer Error Code Table Info. Printer Log Tx LED/LCD Condition Content of Error Code Error Code Only Report 051 54 O S R/C Printer Error 054 31,32,36 O S R/C LSU Problem No response from LP 055 81, 82 R/C O S Controller 060 Rx Door Open Note: 1. Tx Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report 2. Condition : R = Receive Mode, C = Copy Mode, S = Standby Mode, T = Transmit Mode 189 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.8.3. Setting Operation 8:CHECK & CALL PRESS SET TO SELECT SET or START 1 CLEAR CHECK & CALL (1-7) 1:SVC. ALERT FAX # SET or START SERVICE ALERT FAX # CLEAR SET or START Enter a destination fax number for the Service Alert Report. When it is entered, the automatic transmission of the Service Alert Report becomes effective. Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 2222) 2 CLEAR CHECK & CALL (1-7) 2:MAINT. ALERT FAX # SET or START MAINT. ALERT FAX # CLEAR SET or START Enter a destination fax number for the Maintenance Alert Report. When it is entered, the automatic transmission of the Maintenance Alert Report becomes effective. Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 3333) 3 CLEAR CHECK & CALL (1-7) 3:TONER ORDER FAX # SET or START TONER ORDER FAX # CLEAR SET or START Enter the supply fax number to be printed on the Toner Order Form. When it is entered, the automatic print of the Toner Order Form becomes effective. Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 4444) 4 CLEAR CHECK & CALL (1-7) 4:TONER ORDER TEL # SET or START TONER ORDER TEL # CLEAR SET or START Enter the supply telephone number to be printed on the Toner Order Form. Max. 36 digits (i.e. 201 111 5555) 5 CLEAR CHECK & CALL (1-7) 5:DEALER NAME SET or START DEALER NAME CLEAR SET or START Enter the Dealer's Name to be printed on the Toner Order Form. Max. 25 digits (i.e. Panafax Corp.) 6 CLEAR CHECK & CALL (1-7) 6:CUSTOMER ID SET or START CUSTOMER ID CLEAR SET or START Enter a Customer ID code to be printed on the Service Alert Report, Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form. Max. 16 characters (i.e. ABC Company) 7 CLEAR CHECK & CALL (1-7) 7:PRINTER REPORT XMT SET or START PRINTER REP XMT:Off 1:OFF 2:ON 1+ SET or START 2+ SET or START * DIALING * 555 1234 After the Service Alert Report is faxed to the pre-registered FAX #, the machine returns to standby mode. 190 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Note 1. Service Alert Report To enable the automatic transmission of Service Alert Report, enter the destination fax telephone number in the “SERVICE ALERT (FAX #)” field. When a printer error occurs, the Service Alert Report is transmitted to the designated number automatically. A blank entry in this field, disables the Automatic transmission of the Service Alert Report. 2. Maintenance Alert Report To enable the automatic transmission of Maintenance Alert Report, enter the destination fax telephone number in the “MAINT. ALERT (FAX #)” field. When a printer error occurs, the Maintenance Alert Report is transmitted to the designated number automatically. A blank entry in this field, disables the Automatic transmission of the Maintenance Alert Report. 3. Toner Cartridge Order Form To enable the automatic printout of the Toner Cartridge Order Form, enter the destination fax telephone numbers in the “Order FAX #” field. When a low toner error occurs, the Toner Order Form is printed automatically. 4. SERVICE ALERT FAX #, this would be the fax telephone number for the Dealer's Service Department. MAINT. ALERT FAX #, this could be the fax telephone number for the Dealer's Supply Sales Desk. ORDER FAX #, this could be the fax telephone number for the Dealer's Supply Sales Desk. ORDER TEL #, this could be the voice telephone number for the Dealer's Supply Sales Desk. DEALER NAME, this name is printed on the Toner Order Form. CUSTOMER ID, to identify your customer, enter up to 16 characters user code in this field. This name will be printed on the Service Alert Report, Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form. 5. Printer Report XMT To manually transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-registered SERVICE ALERT REPORT FAX #, set the Printer Report XMT to "2:ON". 191 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.8.4. SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT *************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:14 ******** **************************** > SERVICE ALERT REPORT < **************************** (1) LAST PRINT ERROR : MM-dd-yy 12:10 (2) (3) No.999-00 ABC COMPANY (4) CUSTOMER ID : FAX ROM VERSION : DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU TRANSMIT COUNTER RECEIVE COUNTER COPY COUNTER PRINT COUNTER : : : : PRINT ERROR : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : (5) 999999 (6) 999999 999999 999999 MM-dd-yy 12:10 MM-dd-yy 10:15 MM-dd-yy 13:48 " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " MM-dd-yy 17:10 MM-dd-yy 12:10 MM-dd-yy 08:10 No.999-00 No.999-00 No.999-00 (7) No.999-00 No.999-00 No.999-00 -LOGO PANASONIC ************************************ -CHARACTER ID - - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********** Explanation of Contents (1) Date & Time when a problem occurred (2) Information Code (3) Printer Error Code Refer to Service Manual (4) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code) (5) Fax ROM Version (6) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters (7) Print Error Last 30 records (Latest on top) 192 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.8.5. MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT *************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:14 ******** **************************** > MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT < **************************** LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1) CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY (2) FAX ROM VERSION : DX-800 AAV1xxxxAU TRANSMIT COUNTER RECEIVE COUNTER COPY COUNTER PRINT COUNTER : : : : (3) 999999 (4) 999999 999999 999999 -LOGO PANASONIC ************************************ -CHARACTER ID - - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********** Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER” (2) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code) (3) Fax ROM Version (4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters 193 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.9. Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance) 5.1.9.1. Overview This Service Mode is used to maintain and/or update the firmware of the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance. Step 1 Service Mode 9 Operation or Unit Condition Standby LCD Display MMM-dd-yyyy 2 Press “FUNCTION” and then “7”. 3 Press “MONITOR” four times, then press “*”. 4 Press “9”. 5 6 Press “START” to update the firmware. Enter No. or press "\/" or "/\" to select the maintenance to be performed. Ex: Enter “2”. Press “SET” and “START”. 7 Press “SET” or “START”. 8 After the backup is completed, repeat step 4 through 6 to request an operation. SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR 9 Press "STOP" twice to return to standby. MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 00% SET MODE ENTER NO. OR (1-8) SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR SYSTEM MAINT. (1-8) 1:FIRMWARE UPDATE SYSTEM MAINT. (1-8) 2:FIRMWARE BACKUP FIRMWARE BACKUP (1-3) 1:HOST PROGRAM <4MB> FIRMWARE BACKUP * IN PROGRESS * 15:00 00% 194 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 System Maintenance Table No. Maintenance Mode 1 FIRMWARE UPDATE Description Updates the firmware in the machine with the Master Firmware Card. Updates the firmware in the machine with the Master Firmware from the PC. After the firmware is updated, the machine reboots automatically and returns to standby. See Note. 1: HOST PROGRAM <4MB> 2: HOST PART A <2MB> 3: HOST PART B <3MB> Creates a Backup Card of the machine’s firmware. (A 2 MB or higher Flash Memory Card is required) See Note. 1: HOST PROGRAM <4MB> 2: HOST PART A <2MB> 3: HOST PART B <3MB> Restores the parameters from the Backup Card into the machine. Creates a Backup Card of the machine’s parameters. 2 FIRMWARE BACKUP 3 PARAMETER RESTORE PARAMETER BACKUP ERASE FLASH CARD Erase a Master Firmware Card. SEND RECEIVED Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine FILE during a fatal printer error. 4 5 8 Note: The created Backup Card must be removed from the machine. 195 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.9.2. Operation 9:SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PRESS SET TO SELECT SET or START 1 2 SET or START SET or START 1 CLEAR SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 1:FIRMWARE UPDATE 1 CLEAR FIRMWARE UPDATE(1-3) 1:HOST PROGRAM <4MB> CLEAR Display card version * SET or START DX-800AAV1xxxxAU PRESS SET TO START FIRMWARE UPDATE * IN PROGRESS * * If the card is not installed, SET/START will be refused. If the card has no information (Blank), the 1st row displaying the card version will be blank. SET or START 2 CLEAR FIRMWARE UPDATE(1-3) 2:HOST PART A <2MB> CLEAR Display Host version SET or START DX-800AAV1xxxxAU PRESS SET TO START Reboot the machine after updating SET or START 3 CLEAR 2 FIRMWARE UPDATE(1-3) 3:HOST PART B <2MB> SET or START SET or START CLEAR SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 2:FIRMWARE BACKUP 1 CLEAR CLEAR FIRMWARE BACKUP(1-3) 1:HOST PROGRAM <4MB> CLEAR Display card version DX-800AAV1xxxxAU PRESS SET TO START SET or START 2 CLEAR SET or START FIRMWARE BACKUP(1-3) 2:HOST PART A <2MB> CLEAR FIRMWARE BACKUP * IN PROGRESS * After Uploading SET or START 3 CLEAR 3 FIRMWARE BACKUP(1-3) 3:HOST PART B <2MB> Display 1.5sec FIRMWARE BACKUP * COMPLETED * CLEAR SET or START CLEAR SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 3:PARAMETER RESTORE CLEAR DX-800 PARAMETER PRESS SET TO START SET or START PARAMETER RESTORE * IN PROGRESS * After Downloading Display 1.5sec PARAMETER RESTORE * COMPLETED * Display card version 4 SET or START CLEAR SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 4:PARAMETER BACKUP CLEAR DX-800AAV1xxxxAU PRESS SET TO START SET or START PARAMETER BACKUP * IN PROGRESS * After Uploading Display 1.5sec PARAMETER BACKUP * COMPLETED * Display card version 5 SET or START CLEAR SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 5:ERACE FLASH CARD CLEAR DX-800AAV1xxxxAU PRESS SET TO START SET or START ERACE FLASH CARD * ERASING NOW * After Erasing Service Mode default display 8 CLEAR 1 MAINT.(1-8) 2 SYSTEM 8:SEND RCV'D FILE 1 Refer to the Sect. 5.9.4 2 196 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.10. Recovering from a Firmware Update Failure If the Firmware Update is interrupted before completion, the machine will not be able to progress into the Standby Mode and the LCD display will remain Blank. If this happens, please follow the steps described below to recover from a failed firmware update. (2) Printer Cover (1) Unplug the Power Cord. (2) Open the Printer Cover. (3) Remove the Memory Card Cover. Memory Card Cover (3) Memory Card (4) Control Panel Unit (5) (6) (4) Insert the Flash Memory Card gently into the card slot with the Panasonic logo facing to the outside of the machine. Caution: Installing the Flash Memory Card in the wrong direction may damage the connecting pins inside the machine. (5) Open the Control Panel Unit. (6) Activate the Read Point Sensor with your finger and plug in the Power Cord. (7) Wait approximately 10 seconds, release the Read Point Sensor, close the Control Panel Unit (ADF) and the Printer Cover. (8) Allow the unit to complete the Firmware Update (approx. 1-minute). When completed, the unit will reboot and progress to the Standby Mode. (9) Unplug the Power Cord. (10) Remove the Flash Memory Card. (11) Re-install the Memory Card Cover. (12) Plug in the Power Cord. (13) Perform Parameter Initialization. Note: For Updating the Firmware Remotely through the Phone Line, please refer to the Firmware Update Tool (Remote) Operating Instructions. Please inform to the Customer prior to proceeding with the Remote Firmware Update, to Never Unplug the Power Cord or turn the machine OFF. If the machine is turned OFF during the Remote Firmware Update, it may not be re-coverable at all. During the Remote Firmware Update, the LCD display shows ON LINE * DIAG *. 197 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5.1.10.1. Send Received File This function is the relief mode which makes it possible to retrieve memory received documents during a fatal printer error by transferring the documents to another fax machine. MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 nn% FUNC 7 MON X 4 * SERVICE MODE ENTER NO. OR v 9 8 Pi-pi-pi CLR SYSTEM MAINT.(1-8) 8:SEND RCV'D FILE SET or START If no file was received Pi-pi-pi CLR ENTER STATION(S) THEN PRESS START Enter station CLR <01> NEW YORK OFFICE 212 555 1234 Enter another station CLR <02> LONDON OFFICE 011 44 123 4567 START SET CLR 2 STN(S) ARE SET ADD MORE OR START SET *STORE* START No,nnn Note: 1. After the received document file is successfully transmitted, unit will NOT delete the file automatically. 2. Under certain conditions there could be two (2) received files stored separately. In this case, transmission will be made separately. 3. Only normal received document will be transmitted. Document received with a confidential code will NOT be transmitted by this operation. 4. Documents received with a confidential code, can be retrieved by using Confidential Polling from a remote station. MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00 nn% * DIALING * NO.nnn 212 555 1234 198 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6 System Description 6.1. 6.1.1. Mechanical Operation Transmit Mechanism The Transmit Mechanism consists of components which feed, scan and eject documents, as well as send signals. These components and their functions are as follows: ADF Mechanism The ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds paper into the unit, and consists of ADF Roller and Separation Rubber. Each document is placed face-down on the Printer Cover (106) before being fed into the unit. ● The ADF Roller (331) feeds individual pages into the scanning area. ● The Separation Rubber (207) separates documents placed on the ADF, preventing multiple feeding. LED Array (329) The DX-600/800 has one LED Array, used as a light source to illuminate the document. The LED Array turns ON when the Read Point Sensor is activated by the document leading edge. Transmit Guide Unit The Transmit Guide Unit is an auxiliary part used for feeding and ejecting documents. It consists of the Transmit Guide (301), Control Panel Chassis (201), Feed Roller (302), Eject Roller (303), and Eject Pinch Roller (206) and Feed Pinch Roller (236). This unit also provides the white scanning area and serves as a base for electronic white reference. Transmit Mechanism Drive System This system feeds documents through the transmitting mechanism, and consists of rollers, gears and a stepper motor. ● The Transmit Motor (324), a stepper motor, controlled by the CPU, drives the ADF Roller, Feed Roller and Eject Roller, with the speed based on the density of the picture information. ● The Feed Roller (302) feeds the document to the scanning point. ● The Eject Roller (303) feeds and ejects the document out of the machine. 199 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Transmit Mechanism Sensors The ADF Sensor (PC1), activated by Actuator A (224), detects the presence of documents on the ADF Tray and multiple pages. The RP (Read Point) Sensor (PC3), activated by Actuator B (225), detects the lead and trail edges of the document, controlling the reading position. The CPU determines that a document is jammed if Actuator B is not tripped within a specified time after the ADF Roller starts feeding, and disengages the ADF Roller by reversing the Transmit Motor direction. The ADF Door Sensor (PC2), activated by ADF Door Actuator (226), halts all scanning operations when the Control Panel Unit is opened. Verification Stamp Unit The Verification Stamp Unit stamps an “X” mark on the front of the document after the document is successfully transmitted or stored. It consists of the Stamp Head (325), Stamp Holder (326) and Stamp Solenoid (327). Scanner Block (321) The Scanner Block consists of three mirrors, a Lens, and a CCD PC Board (1014). ● The mirrors, Mirror 1 (334), Mirror 2 (335) and Mirror 3 (336) reflect image information, in the form of light, through the Lens. ● The Lens focuses the image information and passes it to the CCD. ● The CCD, mounted on the CCD PC Board, converts the image information into an electronic signal. 200 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Drive System Eject Roller (303) Feed Roller (302) ADF Roller (331) Document B55D16 Gear (312) ADF Gear (305) D17 Gear (313) D25F Drive Gear (332) Transmit Motor (324) D50 Gear (314) 6.1.2 B55D30 Gear (311) B54B22 Gear (310) Control Panel The Control Panel consists of the PNL PC Board (1004) and LCD Unit, which displays the various status messages, and a membrane-type panel. 201 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.1.3. Printing Mechanism The Receive Mechanism consists of the Laser Unit (LSU), OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) Drum, and various other parts which ensure the normal feeding of recording paper. These components and their functions are as follows: Fuser Unit (701) Paper Direction OPC Drum Feed Roller (526) Paper Exit Actuator (730) Toner Cartridge Paper Feed Roller (518) Bias Transfer Roller (604) Laser Unit (512) Paper Feed Solenoid (531) Timing Actuator (609) No Paper Actuator (525) Printer Motor (626) 2nd Cassette (Option) No Paper Actuator (525) Feed Roller 2 (904) Paper Feed Roller (518) Paper Feed Solenoid (908) Paper Feed Units No.1 and 2 The Paper Feeder Unit No. 2 is available as an option. Paper Feed Unit No.1 Operation 1. The printing operation begins when the nPRNT (Print Request) output signal level goes Low. The Printer Motor (626) is initialized. 2. The Paper Feed Solenoid (531) is energized for a specified period of time and turned ON. This activates the Paper Feed Roller (518), which rotates one revolution. The paper is separated into individual sheets by the L and R Paper Separation Clips (809 and 811) and transported to the Feed Roller (526). 3. After one revolution the Paper Feed Roller (518) stops, releasing the paper. The Feed Roller (526) transports the paper to the drum area. 4. The actual printing process starts at a specified time after the Timing Actuator (609) is activated and stops at a a specified period of time after the trailing edge clears the Timing Actuator (609). 202 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Paper Feed Unit No. 2 (Optional) Operation The Paper Feed Unit No.1 always takes priority. The Paper Feed Unit No. 2 becomes operational only when the cassette No.1 runs out of paper and the NP Sensor is deactivated, causing the nPCHK1 output signal level to go High. 1. The printing operation begins when the nPRNT (Print Request) output signal level goes Low. The Printer Motor (626) is initialized. 2. The Paper Feed Solenoid (908) is energized for a specified period of time and is turned ON. This activates the Paper Feed Roller (518), which rotates one revolution. The paper is separated into individual sheets by the L and R Paper Separation Clips (809, 811) and transported to the Feed Roller 2 (904). 3. After one revolution the Paper Feed Roller (518) stops, releasing the paper. The Feed Roller 2 (904) and the Feed Roller (526) transports the paper to the drum area. 4. The actual printing process starts at a specified time after the Timing Actuator (609) is activated and stops at a a specified period of time after the trailing edge clears the Timing Actuator (609). Paper Feed Roller (518) L and R Paper Separation Clips (809, 811) Clutch Gear Assembly Feed Roller (526) SNS3 PC Board (1009) No Paper Actuator (525) SNS1 PC Board (1008) Timing Actuator (609) Pinch Roller (607) Paper Feed Solenoid (531) Feed Roller (904) Pinch Roller (607) CST2 PC Board (1009) No Paper Actuator (525) Paper Feed Roller (518) Paper Feed Solenoid (908) Clutch Gear Assembly L and R Paper Separation Clips (809, 811) 203 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.1.4. Printing Process Operation Handle Toner Waste Box Waste Toner Bias Transfer Roller Cleaning Blade OPC Drum Laser Beam Development Roller Developing Blade Toner Agitator Sweeper Hopper Mixing Blade Charge In the dark, the Bias Charge Roller (BCR) applies a high, uniform negative charge to the surface of the OPC Drum. The surface potential is approximately -650 VDC and remains because the drum has a high electric resistance in the dark. Exposure A portion of the laser beam is deflected to the timing sensor [Beam Detection (BD) Sensor], which controls the start timing of scanning on the OPC Drum. The CPU also uses the timing sensor to detect abnormal signals. The light beam from the laser diode is modulated by the digital signal (nVIDEO) and converted to parallel light waves by the collimator lens. The beam is then directed to the rotating tetragon mirror, where it is reflected to the f-θ lens and then focused onto the OPC Drum surface. The laser beam moves across the surface of the OPC Drum in the scanning direction. Where the laser beam is applied, the negative charge on the drum dissipates, and where the laser is not applied, the negative charge remains. This action forms a latent, electrostatic image on the OPC Drum, corresponding to the original image. Development This development process uses a conventional method, where toner coats a Development Roller and transfers to the latent image on the OPC Drum. In the Toner Cartridge, the (mono-component) toner is negatively charged by the friction between the rotating Development Roller (Mag Roller) and the Developing Blade. This combination and the rotation of the Mixing Blade transfers the toner from the reservoir and forms a brush effect on the Mag roller. Where the magnetic brush lightly touches the OPC Drum, the negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the drum, forming a mirror image of the original on the drum. Any remaining toner is removed from the Mag Roller by the Developing Blade and is recycled back into the toner reservoir. A bias voltage of approximately 1.65 kVACp-p at 1.875 kHz, riding on a -300 VDC bias is applied to the magnetic brush to achieve maximum print quality. The Toner Sensor (513), a magnetic sensor, detects the remaining quantity of toner in the Toner Cartridge. When the “TONER” lamp starts to blink, there is still enough toner left in the cartridge to print 100 pages (based on ITU-T Image No.1). When the toner runs out, the display will show: “OUT OF 204 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 TONER & INFO CODE 041” and the machine is disabled from printing any copies. The Toner Cartridge consists of OPC Drum, Bias Charge Roller, Development Roller, Developing Blade, Cleaning Blade, Mixing Blades and Toner Waste Box. The OPC Drum is an aluminum cylinder coated with an OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) sensitive material. This surface is photoelectric (retains the charge in the dark and releases the charge in the light). The potential differences on the surface (a static latent image) form a printed image. The Bias Charge Roller provides a uniform charge on the OPC Drum surface. The Development Roller supplies toner to the drum by rotating over the magnet. The Developing Blade evens the toner on the Development Roller surface and also charges the toner by friction. The Cleaning Blade cleans by scraping the remaining toner off the OPC Drum surface after transfer. Transfer and Separation As the paper is fed between the OPC Drum and the Bias Transfer Roller (BTR) (604), a positive charge of approximately +3.0 µA steady current is applied to the backside of the paper by the BTR. The toner particles are attracted away from the drum towards the surface of the paper. During cleaning, the BTR is charged to approximately -1500 VDC to repel toner on the OPC Drum and prevent toner from being attracted to the BTR. After transfer has occurred, the paper passes over the Discharge Plate (612) in the Transfer Guide (601), reducing the difference of potential between the OPC Drum and the paper. The stiffness of the paper causes the paper to separate from the drum. Cleaning After transfer, some toner may remain on the surface of the OPC Drum. A Cleaning Blade scrapes the OPC Drum surface, and the removed toner is moved into the Toner Waste Box, inside the Toner Cartridge. Laser Unit LD PCB Beam Detection Sensor F Lens Bean Detection Lens Laser Housing Tetragon Mirror Laser Diode Collimator Lens Aperture Cylindrical Lens Tetragon Motor 205 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Laser A 5 mW Laser Diode, with a wave length of 780 nm (±20 nm), provides a modulated beam controlled by nVIDEO. The beam power on the drum surface is approximately 0.15 mW, and is controlled by the monitor circuit. Collimator Lens This lens converges and focuses the laser beam, converting it to parallel light. Aperture This controls the size of the laser beam. Tetragon Mirror and Motor The tetragon scanner consists of a 4-sided mirror, directly driven by a tetragon motor, revolving at 8,898 rpm (400 dpi) or 13,347 rpm (600 dpi). Scanning speed for 400 dpi and 600 dpi are controlled by motor clock supplied from SC PCB. Motor clock for 400 dpi is 890 Hz and 600 dpi is 1,335 Hz. The laser beam is reflected against these mirrors and swept over the recorded width in the scanning direction. This unit features a stable line scanning speed, a precision mirror reflection angle, a reflection free surface, and instant start. Beam Detection (BD) Lens and Beam Detection (BD) Sensor The BD Lens receives the reflected light from the Polygon Mirror and redirects it into the BD Sensor, which converts the laser beam into electrical signals and sets the start timing for the scanning line. f-θ Lens This amorphous plastic, molded lens is designed to provide parallel laser light across the surface of the drum, providing a constant scanning speed. Fusing and Paper Exit Fuser Unit (701) Exit Roller (719) Thermistor Assembly (728) Thermal Fuse (726) Paper Exit Actuator (730) Thermostat (725) Fuser Roller (709) Pressure Roller (706) Fuser Lamp (732) Fuser Unit (701) The Fuser Unit, consisting of the Fuser Lamp, Fuser Roller, Pressure Roller, Thermistor, and Thermostat, bonds the toner into the paper using heat and pressure. 206 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Fuser Lamp (732) Located in the Fuser Roller is a Halogen lamp that serves as the heat source for the Fuser Roller. Fuser Roller (709) A Teflon coated roller supplies the heat for bonding the toner to the paper. The temperature of the surface is kept constant at approximately 160 ± 5°C or (320°F). Pressure Roller (706) This converted PFA tube Silicon Rubber Roller applies pressure to the Fuser Roller, assisting in bonding the toner to the paper. Thermistor Assembly (728) The Thermistor, a heat sensitive resistor, in contact with the Fuser Roller, monitors the surface temperature. The temperature detected is used to control the ON/OFF switching of the Fuser Lamp. It also acts as the primary overheat prevention device. A comparator circuit on the FCB PC Board acts as a secondary overheat protection and becomes active at approximately 185°C (365°F). Thermostat (725) A Thermostatic Fuse, part of the power line for the Fuser Lamp, provides an extra overheat protection by opening when the Fuser Roller surface temperature reaches approximately 200°C (392°F) and remains there for 1 minute. If the primary and secondary overheat protection does not halt the rise in temperature, the thermostat opens, removing power from the Fuser Lamp. When the Thermostat opens, it must be replaced. SNS4 PC Board (1007) [Paper Exit Sensor] This sensor detects the presence of printed paper at the exit. If no paper passes, or if paper is over the sensor too long, a “RECORDING PAPER JAM” message is displayed. When paper passes over the sensor, the output is Low (Low Active). Thermal Fuse (726) It is placed in series with the Thermostat on the power line of the Fuser Lamp and performs the tertiary overheating prevention (in case the Thermostat fails) by opening when the surrounding temperature reaches approximately 216°C (420.8°F). 6.1.5 Covers and Enclosures The Printer Cover (106) contains the R and L Document Guides (107 and 108), which adjust to the paper width to properly feed the original documents. The Left Cover (103) has a Speaker (117) mounted inside and shields the circuit boards. The Rear Cover (105) contains the Recording Paper Tray (111) and Recording Paper Sub Tray (112), used to support legal size documents. 207 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 Array AC Main Motor LSU UNIT Scanner Motor LED CCD (TCD1208ACY) Motor Driver Motor Driver +5VP +5V +24V ACI PCB Low Voltage Power Supply +3.3V SC PCB -5V Edition 1.0 Heater Control Thermistor 16MHz 4.9152 MHz 50MHz 3V--> 5V 48MHz C D T 8.9813MHz 3.9656 x 2MHz ThermalFuse Thermostat Fuser LAMP High Voltage Power Supply for 600dpi Printing for 16pels/mm Printing for Scaner ASIC (DZAC000273) 16MHz MN86075 32KB RAM Line Memory (Option) Paper Exit Sensor Timing Sensor SNS1 PCB Toner Sensor No Paper Sensor Casette Detect Sensor SNS2 PCB Cover Sensor ILS PCB CPU (V850/MA1) Work Memory Page Memory SDRAM 8MB SNS3 PCB Program FROM 4MB SNS4 PCB FROM CARD (Image) 2/4/8MB Pick up Solenoid Pick up Solenoid Option Stamp LANB PCB No Paper Sensor CST2 PCB 3V--> 3V 25MHz Image FROM 4MB UART Casette Detect Sensor SNS2 PCB Si3021 LED Key Matrix and CPU LCD Unit ACTIVITY LED LINK LED RJ45 Si3014 24.576MHz LANC PCB MN195006 (LAN91C111) Controller MAC/PHY Magnetics * Speaker MJR PCB B4 Width Sensor SDoor Sensor B-point Sensor A-point Sensor PNL1PCB Option EXIT TEL Handset (option) 6.2.1. TEL 6.2. LINE DX-800 Block Diagram DX-600/800 Electrical Circuit Explanation Fax Block Diagram 208 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.2. Signal Routing 1. ADF Transmission (1) Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) transFormer (T1) RJ45 INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) Page Line Memory Memory ACTIVITY (2) D-BUS ECM Buffer (3) FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 2. Memory Transmission Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) transFormer (T1) RJ45 INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) Page Line Memory Memory ACTIVITY (2) D-BUS ECM Buffer (3) (1) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 209 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3. Direct Reception Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) transFormer (T1) INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) RJ45 LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) ACTIVITY (3) Page Line Memory Memory D-BUS ECM Buffer (2) FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) MODEM MN195006 (I22) (1) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 4. Memory Reception Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) transFormer (T1) INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) RJ45 LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) ACTIVITY Page Line Memory Memory (3) D-BUS ECM Buffer (2) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) (1) Line 210 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 5. Scan into Memory (1) MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) transFormer (T1) RJ45 INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) ACTIVITY Page Line (2) Memory Memory D-BUS ECM Buffer FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 6. File Print from Memory Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) transFormer (T1) RJ45 INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) ACTIVITY (2) Page Line Memory Memory D-BUS ECM Buffer (1) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 211 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7. Single Copy (1) Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) transFormer (T1) INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) RJ45 LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) ACTIVITY Page Line (2) Memory Memory D-BUS ECM Buffer FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 8. Multiple Copies (1) Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) transFormer (T1) RJ45 INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) Page Line Memory Memory ACTIVITY (4) (2) D-BUS ECM Buffer FROM 4MB Program (IC9) (3) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 212 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 9. Report/List Printing Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) transFormer (T1) RJ45 INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) Page Line Memory Memory ACTIVITY (2) D-BUS ECM Buffer (1) FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 10. Report with Image Data Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) transFormer (T1) RJ45 INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) Page Line Memory Memory ACTIVITY (3) D-BUS ECM Buffer (2) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) (1) FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 213 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 11. LAN Transmission Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) transFormer (T1) RJ45 INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) ACTIVITY Page Line (2) Memory Memory D-BUS ECM Buffer (1) FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 12. LAN Reception Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) Transformer (T1) RJ45 INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) (1) LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) ACTIVITY Page Line Memory Memory (2) D-BUS ECM Buffer FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 214 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.3 Picture Signal Scanning Block The image data read by the optical unit is input to the CCD mounted on the CCD PC Board, then transferred to the SC PC Board after the optical information is converted into an electrical signal by the CCD. The following shows a block diagram of the picture signal scanning circuit. This picture signal scanning circuit consists of (1) ABC circuit, (2) shading correction circuit, (3) offset control circuit, (4) picture signal binary coding correction circuit and (5) reducing circuit. Differential Amplifier CCD Delay TCD 1208P IC3 DZAC000273 CCD Drive Circuit [SC] IC30 MN86075 CCD PC Board SC PC Board W 1728 bit B Effective Scan Width ABC Circuit This circuit consists of IC28, IC30, C175, R288 and R285. Its function is to prevent deterioration of picture quality due to dirt on the document or degrading of the luminous energy of the Xenon Lamp light source. The picture signal from the CCD is amplified in IC28 and input to IC30, where it is converted from analog to digital and the shading is corrected. When the signal exceeds +5V as the result of this amplification and correction, capacitor C175 is charged through R288. This charging voltage lowers the level of the picture signal input to IC28. When the picture signal voltage rises, this charge voltage becomes higher. When the picture signal level lowers due to the background color, etc., of a transmitting document, the voltage of the charged capacitor C175 is discharged through R285. Consequently, the output of the ABC circuit is kept constant to maintain the picture quality, regardless of changes in the CCD output level. 215 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 3V 0V 0V ABC Circuit Output CCD Output 32 OS IC28, 2 IC28, 1 DOS IC30 37 19 +5V R288 Q15 41 Q13 39 C175 Control Circuit 40 R285 -5V Shading Correction Circuit The Shading Correction Circuit, included in IC30, is provided to correct for reduction in LED lamp intensity around the optical lens and LED lamp intensity distortion due to shading of each bit. This circuit scans the white reference on the transmitting document plate immediately before the document reaches the scanning position and writes a compensation value according to the distortion of the waveform, at the time, into the S-RAM (IC31).When the actual picture signal is input, the circuit corrects the picture signal shading, according to this compensation value. This shading is carried out for each page during transmission or copy. Offset Control Circuit The Offset Control Circuit consists of Q15, Q13, IC30 and IC28, and controls the black level of the CCD output to be at 0V by using the input. Picture Signal Binary Coding Correction Circuit The Picture Signal Binary Coding Correction Circuit is included in IC30. It is used to obtain a binary coding signal which is a corrected picture and error diffused signal of a false halftone signal, which is detected from a shaded picture signal. 216 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.4 CCD Drive Clock Generator Circuit This circuit is also contained in IC30. Its function is to generate FSG, FCK1, FCK2 and RS clock signals, which are required for driving the CCD. These clock signals are generated by the system clock generator circuit derived from the 4 MHz clock signal that is input to IC30. Its timing chart is shown below.The FR clock supplied to the CCD is output from the RS of IC3. The RS clock of IC3 is derived from the FR clock of IC30 [MN86075] generates the timing of the RS clock to drive the CCD. FCK1 FCK2 RS FSG CCD FR RS IC3 SHINE FCK1 FCK2 FSG IC30 86075 FR 217 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.5 Line Monitor Circuit The Line Monitor Circuit consists of an operational DAA (The secondary side chip) and its peripheral circuits. Its function is to monitor the dial tone, DTMF tone, response signals, etc. over the speaker. It also sounds the output of the key touch tones, alarm tones, etc. from the panel CPU over the speaker. The Received Signals are output from DAA of Secondary circuit, and through Analog AGC, Electronic Volume, Amplifier and over the speaker. The monitor tone from the phone line and the buzzer tone from the panel can be adjusted from the Control Panel. Line Monitor Signal (from AGC Circuit) Volume Control Circuit (IC21) (IC20, 2) + Buzzer Clock (from Control Panel Unit) Buzzer Tone Switch (from Output Port) Speaker Amplifier (Q4,5) Speaker AGD (+2.5VDC) Level Control Circuit (Q3) Line Monitor Circuit Block Diagram 218 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.6 Transmit Motor Control Circuit The transmit motor is a PM type, two-phase bi-polar motor. The stepping signal and chopping current control signals (pTAPH, pTBPH, pTA10, pTA11, pTB10 and pTB11) are sent to the chopper drive circuit, comprised of IC36, IC37 and its peripheral circuitry, from IC3 SHINE output port. The motor is powered by +24 VDC and is driven by a 1/2-phase excitation, and greater step division is provided by controlling the phase circuit in steps (micro-step control). +24V Motor Driver Tx Stepper Motor IC36 R370 SHINE IC3 +24V Motor Driver IC37 R371 Tx Motor Driver Circuit Block Diagram 219 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.7 Line Control Circuit The Line Control Circuit consists of CML relay, DP circuit, DAA (Direct Access Arrangement), Ring Detect Circuit for power-save and DC hold circuit. A Jack for an external telephone, which can be used for either an external telephone or an optional Handset Kit. The block diagram of the Line Control Circuit is shown below. SC PCB Ringer Signal Detection, TAM I/F, DTMF Remote Detection Off-Hook Detection 10MW DP Circuit Line CML Relay DC Hold Circuit DAA Line I/F Si3015 (IC23) DAA Control I/F Si3021 (IC24) MODEM MN195006 DP Control Connect only to one module Ringer Signal Detector for Wake-up (PC2) External Telephone Jack PNL CPU MJR PCB Line Control Circuit Ringer IC + ~ - ~ Hook SW Speech IC + ~ - ~ Optional Handset Kit 220 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Dial Pulse Generator The Dial Pulse Generator consists of a CML relay, a DC hold circuit, a dial pulse generate circuit and their peripheral circuits. The generator generates dial pulses. The CPU on the SC PC Board controls all dial pulse generation sequences. When the absence of the terminating message is confirmed by the Off-Hook detector in DAA (IC23), the CPU turns the CML relay ON and the dial pulse generate circuit ON through DAA to develop loop status (DC loop). After a few seconds, the CPU turns the PLS relay ON and OFF to generate dial pulses, making and breaking the loop. The line status during dialing is shown below. break CML Relay make Dial Pulse Generate Circuit break make Line release Speech condition break Prepause First digit Speech condition Second digit Speech condition Inter-digit pause Line status make DTMF Tone Generator The DTMF Tone Generator is incorporated in the MODEM on the SC PC Board. The DTMF tone is conveyed to the telephone line using the same route as the facsimile signal. The DTMF tone selection is controlled by the CPU. Digital amplitude signal is conveyed as analog amplitude signal through D/A converter in the DAA (IC23). The line status during dialing is shown below. break CML Relay make Line release Speech condition First digit Speech condition Signal time Inter-digit pause break Second digit Speech condition Line status make DTMF signal Ring Detector When the unit is in the Sleep Mode status, a Ringing signal is detected by a photo-coupler (PC2) in Ring Detector to cancel the power-save for waking up. Then DAA (IC23) detects the ringing signal for receive mode. When the unit is normal operating status, DAA (IC23) detects the ringing signal immediately. 221 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.8 SNS PC Board Each sensor consists of an LED and photo transistor. When documents are placed on the ADF tray or are moving, a shutter in the document sensor opens. The light from the LED turns the photo transistor “ON”, and the output voltage from the sensor becomes a “Low” level. With no document on the ADF tray, the shutter interrupts the light path, and output from the sensor is kept at a “High” level. Operation of the RP Sensor is exactly the same as the ADF Sensor. The ADF Cover Sensor operation is similar, except that the output from the sensor is kept at a “Low” level when the cover is closed and becomes a “High” level when the Printer Cover is opened. +5V Shutter ADF Cover Sensor (ILS PC Board) A PC2 K +5V nBPNT Shutter Read Point Sensor CPU (IC1) A PC3 MPU +5VP K GND +5VP Shutter PNL CPU IC1 A PC1 K ADF Sensor GND PNL1 PC Board SC PC Board 222 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.9 Control Panel The Control Panel consists of the Display PCB and Panel Unit, which display various status information.It is normally interfaced to the main CPU. Keyed input signals are received by the Panel CPU and the data is transferred to the main CPU on the SC PC Board. The Control Panel performs the following processes simultaneously: • Key inputting • LED, LCD display • Data transmission / reception Interface to main CPU The interfacing between the main CPU and the panel CPU are all executed with commands and responses in the following two formats: • Command / response (1 byte) + number of data + check sum • Command / response (1 byte) + number of data + data 1 + data 2........................ + data n + check sum. From /to SC PCB 11 20 characters, 2 lines, 5x7 dots control LED, KEY scanning PNLCK PNLRD LEDCT (1:0) PNLSD PNLRST 2 BZCLK 8 +5V +5VP LED LED (1:0) GND GND nPWSAVE nWAKEUP nBPNT 8 BATLVL Key matrix (59 keys) SCN (7:0) 8 KIN (7:0) PNL1 PC Board 223 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.10 Printer Motor Drive Circuit Motor Drive Circuit The Printer Motor is a 4-phase uni-polar PM-type step motor. The step signals (pMMP0A to pMMP3A) are transmitted to IC38 (the Chopper Drive Circuit) from IC3 SHINE output ports. The chopper current is determined by the voltage at IC38, Pin3 and Pin13. The Printer Motor has two speeds, Slow and Constant. The Printer Motor is powered by a +24 VDC supply. When the interlocks are open, the +24 VDC supply is cut off and the Printer Motor stops rotating. CN54 SHINE IC3 +24 VM 3 pMMP0a Motor Driver 1 nMMP0a IC38 6 pMMP2a 4 nMMP2a Pulse Motor Laser Printer Motor Drive Circuit Block Diagram 224 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Fuser Lamp Drive Circuit Thermal Fuse Thermostat R112 C109 1 4 R127 nSSR 9 SC PCB CN103 9 +24V 1 2 PC102 6 R111 3 2 TRC100 L301 R111 C108 L101 LVPS 2 CN102 Fuser Lamp CN102 1 1 Fuse 2 H The Fuser Lamp is powered by 100 VAC (200 VAC). It is driven by the LVPS and controlled by the nSSR signal from the SC PC Board. When the CN103, Pin11 (nSSR) on the LVPS goes LOW, the Fuser Lamp turns ON. This lights up the PC102 LED and activates the TRC100 photo-triac, and VAC 115 VAC is sent to the Fuser Lamp. The time at which TRC100 is actually activated depends on the 100 VAC (200 VAC) sine wave. When the cross-voltage for Pin 6 and Pin 4 of PC102 is other than 0 Volts (sine wave exceeds 0 volts), PC102 inhibits the activation of the triac and turns ON the Fuser Lamp. Fuser Lamp Drive Circuit Diagram 225 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Fuser Temperature Control Circuit The fuser temperature is controlled by IC1 on the SC PC Board, which contains A/D (Analog/Digital) converters ANI0 to ANI7. The Fuser Temperature Control Circuit uses A/D converter, ANI1. When the PC001 drive current is transmitted from the SC PC Board to the PSU (LVPS), the Fuser Lamp turns ON. IC32 is a comparator with open output at pins 1 and 7 and is used as an abnormal temperature detection circuit. IC32, pin 7, has a high impedance when Q44 is activated, turning ON the Fuser Lamp. An abnormal temperature is detected when the VTH voltage level becomes higher than V+, forcing IC32, pin 7 Low and deactivating Q44. Abnormally low and high temperatures, as well as Thermistor release status, are detected by IC1 (CPU) programming. CN6 IC3 SHINE 11 CN103 11 R221 +24v PC001 1 6 2 4 3 R401 2 pSSRA Q44 1 GND +3.3V PSU (LVPS) CN52 +3.3V TH2 2 1 R394 D26 +24V R396 8 5 D25 7 6 IC32 4 GND +3.3V Q42 C214 2 GND 79 (ANI1) Q43 3 1 TH2 1 GND R395 IC1 C263 3 2 R400 Thermistor R399 R398 R397 R78 +5v CPU SC PCB GND Fuser Temperature Control Circuit Diagram 226 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 High Voltage Drive Circuit (Charging, Development and Transfer) High Voltage is provided through a DC to DC converter, which changes the +24 VDC supply voltage to 650 VDC, and output approximately 0.64 KVAC (Steady current: 200 µA) for the Charging Block. The Developer Circuit converts the +24 VDC to between -300 VDC for the development bias, and outputs 1,500 VAC (p-p) at a frequency of 1.650 kHz to charge the toner. The Transfer Circuit changes the +24 VDC supply voltage to approximately +280 VDC (MAX) (steady current:3 µA/-1500 VDC steady voltage). CN53 pCR0 3 nCRCK 3 nCR1 4 2 Q40 Discharge Plate 3 1 pCR1 2 Q39 1 CPU nTR0 5 T Bias Transfer Roller C Bias Charge Roller Toner Cartridge Development Roller 3 pTR0 2 D Q3 FG 1 GND nDRCK pDRCK 2 3 2 Q41 1 HVPS SC PCB GND High Voltage Drive Circuit 227 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.11. Interlock Safety Circuit This safety circuit turns OFF the +24 VDC supply voltages when the Cover is opened. When the Cover is opened, the microswitch(es) on the ILS PC Board are de-actuated, turning OFF +24 VDC to the Printer Drive Circuit, the High Voltage Power Supply, and the Paper Feed Solenoid Circuits, turning OFF the +5 VDC supply voltage for the Laser Driver circuits on the Laser Unit. +24V +24V +24V Cover ILS PCB LVPS (Power Supply Unit) +24VD Rush Current Protection Circuit +24VM Motor pMPOW +24VM +24VM HVPS (Power Supply Unit) Paper Feed Solenoid DC/DC Converter +24VM L+5V Laser Unit (SC PCB) Interlock Safety Circuit Block Diagram 228 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.12 Laser Unit (LSU) Control Circuit The laser control signals are described below. nLDEN The LSU is activated when this output signal is LOW. If an error occurs, the nLDEN output signal level goes High and the LSU is deactivated. nVIDEO This is the actual Data Signal. The Laser is ON when the nVIDEO output signal level is LOW. nHSYNC This horizontal synchronization signal transmitted from the Beam Detection Sensor sets the horizontal position of the laser beam as it crosses the OPC Drum. nSTART This is the Scanner Motor Control Signal. The Scanner Motor rotates when the nSTART output signal level is LOW. nREADY A Phased-Lock Loop (PLL) circuit keeps the Scanner Motor speed constant when the nREADY is at a Low output signal level. CLK This is the Scanner Motor Clock. nS/H This is the Sample Hold Signal in order to adjust the Laser power. When the Laser switches on compulsorily, the Laser Power is adjusted to a suitable level and held until the next duty cycle in order to keep the Laser Power stable. CN68 1 nS/H Q24 20 3 2 19 1 IC34 6 nVIDEO 4 2 Laser Q23 +5V IC3 4 2 IC35 23 nHSYNC Circuit 1 R328 Laser 3 2 C189 30 Timing Sensor 3 nPMON Q21 1 21 2 Drive R330 24 163 nLDON 3 +5V R181 C190 SHINE 2 5 R326 2 nPMRY 1 nPMCK Scanner Motor Drive Circuit 3 2 1 Q22 Scanner Motor CN69 GND LSU SC PCB Laser Unit Control Circuit Block Diagram 229 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 Edition 1.0 0 0 E-F, G-H Voltage C-D Voltage B C103 RECTIFIER A CIRCUIT A-B Voltage INPUT CIRCUIT OVER CURRENT LIMITTER CONTROL CIRCUIT D CONVERTER CIRCUIT (Q100) C ERROR DETECTION CIRCUIT +24 VDC OUTPUT CIRCUIT -5 VDC OUTPUT CIRCUIT +5 VDC OUTPUT CIRCUIT GND +24 VDC OUTPUT -5 VDC OUTPUT GND GND +5 VP OUTPUT GND +5 VP OUTPUT 6.2.13 0 INPUT +5 VP OUTPUT CIRCUIT DX-600/800 Power Supply Unit (LVPS) Block Diagram of DZEA000057 230 APR 2002 DX-600/800 DZEA000057 Input Circuit AC line voltage travels to the rectifying circuit through the line filter. The line filter eliminates RFI noise which may otherwise pass to the AC line from the power supply unit. It also protects the power supply unit from transient noise which may pass into the unit from the AC line. Rectifying Circuit AC power is rectified by D100 and charges C103 to make high DC voltage, then supply power to converter circuit. Kick-on voltage for control IC (IC105) is supplied AC power through R134, R135 and R136. Inrush current is limited by TH100. Converter Circuit A IC (IC105), in combination with transformer T100, form a switching power supply circuit using the RCC (Ringing Choke Converter) system. As soon as power is applied to the Power Supply Unit, AC line voltage is rectified by D100 and is smoothed by capacitor C103. The protection circuit at the time of start-up is controlled by an IC (IC105) and resistors R134, R135 and R136. T100 Ei P --- Primary Winding S --- Secondary Winding B --- Control Winding D102 Eo P + S Q100 B Control Circuit Main Switching Circuit In the above circuit, when the main switching transistor, Q100, is turned On, input voltage, Ei, is supplied to the primary winding of transformer T100. However, no current will flow through diode D102 of the secondary side, due to reverse polarity of the secondary winding causing no current flow within T100. But the transformer charges with energy. When Q100 is turned Off, the supply voltage to the primary winding shuts off and the windings of T100 change polarity, allowing D102 to conduct, releasing the energy accumulated in T100 to the circuit. When the energy is discharged through D102, Q100 turns on, once again reversing the polarity on T100 windings, creating a self-oscillation circuit. 231 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 The value of output voltage is Eo=d/(1-d)*Ei Ton : ON time of Q100 d=Ton/Ts Ts : Period of oscillation Equivalent circuit model for the RCC. SW Ei D(D102) Eo (Q100) L VL C RL T100 In the equivalent circuit ; When SW is ON, current flows SW L When SW is OFF, current flows L D RL The value of inductance increase current between ON period. (d*Ts) IL=Ei/L*d*Ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(1) The value of inductance decrease current between OFF period. ((1-d)*Ts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(2) From equation (1) and (2), E0=d/(1-d)*Ei VL Ei T Eo Ts dTs IL (1-d)Ts dTs In the actual circuit, the fixed output voltages are obtained by changing the winding ratio of transformer T100. In this converter circuit, the output voltages are stabilized by controlling the duty cycle of the ON and OFF timing of the transistor. In this power supply, the bias winding is built into the transformer. The power supply has four outputs, +24 VDC, -5 VDC, +5 VP and +5 VDC. The +24 VDC output is protected by the Error Detection Circuit, and the +5VDC, +5 VP and -5 VDC outputs are protected by the circuitry inside of the voltage regulator IC. Control Circuit and Error Detection Circuit The control circuit amplifies the output of the duty cycle according to the error voltage detected by the Error Detection Circuit, and drives the main transistor Q100. The method used to change the duty cycle is to change the ON time period. When the output voltage of the +24 VDC circuit rises, the current of photo coupler PC103 increases, the output pulse width of the control circuit decreases and the ON time period of Q100 decreases. This control circuit decides the minimum OFF time period by itself. When the oscillation frequency becomes higher and the OFF time period becomes minimum, the OFF time period remains unchanged and only the ON time period decreases. This way, there is a upper limit of the oscillation frequency and the duty cycle is expanded. 232 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Over Current Limiter (O.C.L) The +24 VDC output is limited by Ton MAX Limiter (ON time period of transistor Q100) which is part of the control circuit. The +5 VP, -5 VDC and +5 VDC outputs have over current limiters provided inside the voltage regulator. 233 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 6.2.14 LAN Control Circuit LAN Controller Laser Printer MN86075 (IC30) CCD PCB LANB PCB SHINE DZAC000273 (IC3) Transformer (T1) RJ45 INTERNET (10Base-T/100Base-TX) (1) LANC PCB S-DRAM 8MB (IC7) LINK LAN Controller (IC1) ACTIVITY Page Line Memory Memory (2) D-BUS ECM Buffer FROM 4MB Image Memory (IC10) FROM 4MB Program (IC9) CPU V850E/MA1 (IC1) MODEM MN195006 (I22) DAA Si3021, Si3015 (IC23,24) Line 1. LAN Controller (IC1) This conforms to IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Controller. The CPU (SC PCB) bus is directly connected and the data interrupt is controlled by pLANINT. The 25 MHz clock is supplied by OSC 1. The LAN Controller for the system timing clock divides the frequency provided from OSC1. The clock signal is also supplied for the Manchester encoding/decoding circuit for data conversion. The LAN Controller is a mixed signal Analog/Digital device that implements the MAC and PHY portion of the CSMA/CD protocol at 10 and 100Mbps. The LAN controller contains a built in 8 KByte RAM for transmission and reception buffer. 2. EEPROM (IC2) This memory stores the configuration registers and MAC (Media Access Control) address for the LAN controller. Data is transferred to LAN controller (serial transfer) when the power is turned "On". The MAC address for the LAN controller represents the location on the LAN. 3. Filter Transformer (T1) A choke module transformer with a EMI filter. The output TX signal from the LAN controller is differentiated and transmitted on to the LAN via this module. Similarly, the input RX signal (differential input pair) is terminated by an externally connected 75 ohms resistor and input to the LAN controller via this module. 4. Ethernet Interface Provides the 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet interface. 234 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 LED 1. LINK LED (LED1) The LINK LED normally illuminates when the LAN cable is connected and when a link pulse is detected. Consequently, LED can be used to determine whether the 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable has become disconnected (RX side). 2. Activity LED (LED2) This LED illuminates when reception data is present on the LAN. (The LED also illuminates when reception data for other devices is present.) Signal Routing 1. LAN Transmission a. Transfers the MMR coded data from Image Memory (FROM) to CPU (SC PCB) and converts the MH coded data. b. Transfer the MH coded data of CPU (SC PCB) to SDRAM. c. Transfer the converted text data to buffer RAM on LAN controller (LANB PCB) sequentially. d. The transmission packet is processed by FIFO transfer to buffer RAM and then converted for Manchester code. Finally, they are converted for differential pair signal and transmitted to Internet. 2. LAN Reception a. Processed received data for Manchester coded signal at LAN controller. b. The decoded received packet goes to buffer RAM through the FIFO. The data stored in buffer RAM is transferred to SDRAM (SC PCB) by requests from SC PCB. c. Decodes the Base 64 for MH coded image data at SDRAM and transfers CPU (SC PCB). d. Inputs MMR coded data from CPU transfers Image Memory (FROM). 235 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7 General Network Information 7.1. 7.1.1. Network Protocol OSI Reference Mode Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining and describing the various processes underlying networking communications. The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware) layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software) in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network. Layer Name Function 7 Application 6 Presentation 5 Session Protocol SMB SMTP FTP DNS HTTP Telnet etc... NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc... TDI 4 Transport 3 Network TCP, UDP IP, IPX, etc... TCP/IP IPX/SPX Net BEUI Apple Talk IP Address etc... etc... ODI Driver, NDIS Driver 2 1 Datalink Physical Router PPP... NIC SW Hub Repeater Hub Ethernet Token Ring FDDI ATM etc... RS-232C, X21... MAC Address OSI Reference Model and Network Terms 236 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.1.2. Protocol One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone. TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the Internet at http://www.ietf.org/. The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers. Layer 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base Function Application This layer embraces functions of the OSI Application Session, Presentation and Application Presentation layers. Protocols at this layer provide Session network services. Compares to OSI Transport layer. Transport Transport Enables peer communication between hosts on the internetwork. Network Internet Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network layer. Protocols move data between devices on networks. Corresponds to the bottom two layers of Data Link Network the OSI model. This correspondence Interface enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist with existing Data Link and Physical layer Physical standards. This layer is concerned with all aspects of transmitting and receiving data on the network. Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model 7.1.3. Cable For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used. Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 Ω. Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet. Category 1 2 3 4 5 Purpose Voice grade telephone line ISDN 10Base-T Token Ring (4M) Token Ring (16M) 100Base-TX, ATM (155M) 237 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.2. 7.2.1. Layer Functions and Technology MAC (Media Access Control) The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network. These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the left end identify the manufacturer’s code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner. For Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from each station should be unique. XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX Unique value Manufacturer ID MGCS:080023 7.2.2. Network Control CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection. The General sequence is as follows: Wait for the next available timing to send, Send out a frame, Perform collision sensing simultaneously, Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary. (Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident) 802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format Least significant bit Most significant bit Pre-amble Destination MAC address Source MAC address Data type Data FCS 8 byte 6 byte 6 byte 2 byte 46 1500 byte 4 byte Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast) If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node, it must be passed to the upper layer. Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node immediately. Token Passing Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit. When the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network. The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the beaconing process continues every seven seconds. 238 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended recipient of the frame. When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer, updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring.When the computer that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission, takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring. Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission. Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission. Token Frame Format Least significant bit Most significant bit Start De-limiter (SFD) P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED) 1 byte 1 byte P: priority S: Status 0 = Token Frame 1 = Data Frame R: Reserved Data Frame Format Most significant bit Access Frame SFD 1 byte Control control 1 byte 1 byte Destination Source Data MAC MAC 6 or 2 byte 6 or 2 byte Least significant bit FCS ED Frame 4 byte 1 byte Status 1 byte Data: Max 4429 byte (4M) Max 17779 (16M) There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered. 239 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.2.3. Ethernet Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe 10Base-T) 10Base-5 Speed (bps) Topology Cable Type 10M Bus Yellow cable 10Base-T 10M 100Base-TX 100M Star Star Max Length 500 m (1640 ft) Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft) Twisted Pair (Cat. 5) 200 m (656 ft) 802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type Max length (x 100m) 10 BASE Logical speed (Mbps) 5 BASE : baseband (digital) BROAD: broadband (analog) 10 BASE - T TP Twisted Pair hyphen "-" means type of cable no "-" means max length Ethernet Configuration 240 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 1 2 3 6 TX (+) TX (-) RX (+) RX (-) 1 1 TX (+) 1 2 2 TX (-) 2 3 3 RX (+) 3 6 6 RX (-) 6 Straight Cable Crossed Cable Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly. The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration. "1" "0" 0V -2.05 V Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables. If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent. The node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for collision detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the end of transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period. There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion due to the star topology. 7.2.4. Repeater The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal, passing all network traffic in all directions. They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3 rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the segments being populated. Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are called multiport repeaters. 7.2.5. NIC (Network Interface Card) NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs. 241 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.3. 7.3.1. Network Layer IP Address An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember. The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class C addresses. Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number. Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID. Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make up the host ID. There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than 223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes. Class A : First octet reserved for the network address Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address Class A 0 Class B 1 0 Class C 1 1 0 Network address represented as Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below: Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255 Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255 Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255 242 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.3.2. Subnet Mask A subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated. IP 192.168.32.1 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Network Address 192.168.32.0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 192 168 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 255 IP Subnet Mask 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network Address Configuration Global IP Address 190.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 190.0.3.1 255.255.255.0 190.0.3.2 255.255.255.0 190.0.3.3 255.255.255.0 190.0.2.2 255.255.255.0 190.0.2.3 255.255.255.0 Router 190.0.2.1 255.255.255.0 Note Upper: IP address Lower: Subnet mask 190.0.1.1 255.255.255.0 190.0.1.2 255.255.255.0 190.0.1.3 255.255.255.0 Third Floor Second Floor Ground Floor Class B Subnet Outline For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned. 1. Host address is set to all “0” 2. Host address is set to all “1” Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations. 3. All 4 octets are set to all “1” IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified. Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network. 4. All 4 octets are set to all “0” Reserved for default route for non-destination address 5. Most significant bit starting with “127” Reserved for loop back address 243 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.3.3. Internet Protocol The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams. It performs the following typical functions: 1. Identifies the IP address 2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram 3. Routing of the IP address 4 byte Version Internet Header Length Type Of Service Total Length ID Time To Live Flags Fragment Offset Header Checksum Protocol Source Address Destination Address Option + Padding (size varies) Data IP Datagram Terms Version Internet Header Length Type Of Service ID Flags Fragment Offset Time To Live Protocol Header Checksum Source Address Destination Address Option Padding Detail Currently version 4 IP Header field length Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for precedence) Identification frame number for upper layer communication Packet disassembly information Offset from most significant bit Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h) Checksum is used for error checking on the header data Sender’s IP Address Destination’s IP Address When implemented Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit 244 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.3.4. Router Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination network address and a destination device address. Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by identifying its header information. These are the typical functions: 1. Routing This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table. 2. Packet Filtering This performs the access and security control for specified routing. access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23 192.168.32/24 PC-A 192.168.32.1/24 192.168.33/24 Router B PC-C 192.168.33.1/24 PC-B 192.168.32.2/24 OK PC-D 192.168.33.2/24 OK permission denied permission denied Packet Filtering Sample 3. Address Conversion NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to single private IP Address. 4. IP Masquerade: This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address. At the same time the port number is automatically assigned. Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX (Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known manufacturer. 5. Designated Reply These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically. Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well known techniques to keep a live connection. 245 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.4. 7.4.1. Transport Layer TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer. The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol. IP Datagram TCP segment IP Header (20 byte) TCP Header (20 byte) Application D ata (vary) TCP Segment in IP Datagram Source Port (2 byte) Destination Port (2 byte) Sequence Number (4 byte) Acknowledgment Number (4 byte) Header Length (4 bit) Reserved (6 bit) Control Flag (6 bit) Checksum (2 byte) Option Window (6 byte) Urgent Pointer (2 byte) PAD Data (Segment) TCP Segment Outline TCP Header Monitoring Sample 246 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Client SYN, Se quential No.=453 8970 Increments No. sequentially 538971 K No.=4 000 ACK, AC 1919424 .= o N l a ti quen SYN, Se ACK, AC K No.=191 9724001 Server Panasonic Device TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec. The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection. 247 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.5. 7.5.1. Upper Layer DNS (Domain Name System) The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain name structure, to access network resources. Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below: Panasonic.com Mail.panasonic.com ifax.panasonic.com can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device. Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names (i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be connected to an actual device. This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of the listed Domain Name. Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline. • The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code. • Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available. • Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots. • Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots. • Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.) DNS Server (root) DNS Server (jp) 3 2 1 Panasonic Device 5 4 6 10 8 DNS Server (panasonic.com) DNS Server (co.jp) 7 9 DNS Server Mail Server mlsv.panafax.co.jp (panafax.co.jp) domain DNS Name Resolution Sample The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it. There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world. 248 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below: 1. Query the local DNS Server. 2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company. 3. Com root DNS Server sends the query to the jp root DNS Server. 4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available. 5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name. 6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined. All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary Name Server. 7.5.2. Primary Name Server A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone, it retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files. 7.5.3. Secondary Name Server A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers in a domain improves performance. 249 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.5.4. SOA (Start of Authority) Record Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone’s primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as follows: IN SOA An example of the syntax is shown below: ; ; File: db.127.0.0 file ; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS. ; SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the ; default parameters for information this DNS is ; authoritative for: ; @ IN SOA nwr42.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. ( 951213 ; serial number 43200 ; refresh every 12 hours ; retry after 2 hours 7200 1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks 172800) ; default ttl is 2 days ; IN NS nwr42.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. 1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. ; SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line. The following list explains the other parameters: * Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file. * Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e. hostmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp instead of [email protected]). * Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file. * Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer. * Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer fails. * Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the expiration time passes, the old zone information is deleted. * TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value. 250 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.5.5. A (Address) Record The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machine’s name and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine. ; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy ; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais ; zone ' rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp' last serial 720 ; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy $ORIGIN mgcs.mei.co.jp. rdmg IN SOA nwmgr.mgcs.mei.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. ( 721 10800 3600 604800 86400 ) IN NS nwmgr.mgcs.mei.co.jp. IN MX 10 mlsv2.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. $ORIGIN rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. ifax-gz03 IN A 172.21.94.216 qmc-cco1 IN A 133.185.254.212 ifaxos01 IN A 172.21.97.26 ifpdyna IN A 202.244.202.29 A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file 7.5.6. PTR (Pointer) Record Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names. DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup. They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below: IN PTR 1 ; IN NS IN PTR nwr42.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. localhost.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp. PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file. 7.5.7. CNAME (Canonical Name) Record The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below: CNAME Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place. 251 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.5.8. NS (Name Server) Record The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server record is shown below: IN NS An example of a name server record follows below: @ IN NS nwmgr.mgcs.mei.co.jp The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "mgcs.mei.co.jp" is the name server. 7.5.9. MX (Mail Exchange) Record The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on. If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host’s name, pointing at your host’s name. The syntax of this record is shown below: IN MX For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/. 7.5.10. Reverse Lookup This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the natural grouping of hosts in a network. 7.5.11. Forwarding A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile commands. There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server’s cache or zones will be answered, and anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list. For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O’ Reilly & Associates, Inc. 252 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.6. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the senderSMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an OK reply. The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http:// www.imc. org/rfc821 Internet SMTP Server PC DNS Server SMTP POP Server PC POP 3 Internet Mail Sending and Receiving 7.6.1. Mail Header Sample Received: from nwr35 by labo.mgcs.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157 Delivery route for ; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST) Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST) Message-Id: <[email protected]> Message ID Mime-Version: 1.0 X-Mailer: Internet FAX, MGCS From: "MGCS" Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX To: [email protected] Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-MGCS-+-+-+" Content-Type X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572 253 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.7. 7.7.1. ITU T.37 and RFC2305 Mode of Operation The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations. Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes. Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be capable of transmitting in Simple Mode. Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this recommendation. 7.7.2. Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table Sender Required Strongly recommended Optional Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S file Provide notice in case of local transmission problem Provide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME compliant Include Message-ID Use Base 64 encoding for image data Use other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are supported by the receiver Provide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications Receiver Required Optional Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than display Be capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files within a single message Provide notice in case of reception or processing problems Use other TIFF Profiles 254 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Offramp Gateway (when implemented) Required Strongly recommended Optional 7.7.3. Be SMTP compliant Provide delivery failure notification Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile transmission Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile terminals Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification Use DSN for delivery failure notification Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple users Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3 facsimile terminal Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient Definitions and Abbreviations IETF RFC MIME POP3 SMTP DSN MDN TIFF IFD Offramp gateway Mailstore Notice Internet Engineering Task Force Request For Comment Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions Post Office Protocol version 3 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Delivery Status Notification Message Disposition Notification Tagged Image File Format TIFF Image File Directory Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/ G4 facsimile terminals Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by receiver Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a manner to be determined by the device RFC reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/ File Format for Internet Fax RFC2301 Tag Image File Format (TIFF) image/tiff MIME Sub-type RFC2302 Registration Minimal PSTN address format in Internet Mail RFC2303 Minimal FAX address format in Internet Mail RFC2304 A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail RFC2305 Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for facsimile RFC2306 255 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.7.4. File Format for Internet Fax Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files. The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding methods. S (MH) Color B/W C (JPEG) J (JBIG) F (MMR, MR) L (JPEG) M (MRC) MRC: Mixed Raster Content A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods. Class S F J C L Color B/W B/W B/W Color Color M Color Coding Method MH MMR, MR JBIG JPEG (lossy) JPEG (lossless, grayscale) Mixed Raster Content Remarks Internet Fax minimal set Internet Fax full mode Internet Fax mixed mode Color minimal set One bit per color,palletized color image, continuos tone color and grayscale images Multiple coders and resolution within a page 256 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.7.5. Minimal Set The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged. The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations. Baseline Fields Bits Per Sample Compression Fill Order Image Width Image Length New Sub File Type Page Number Photometric Interpretation Resolution Unit Rows Per Strip Samples Per Pixel Strip Byte Counts Strip Offsets X Resolution Y Resolution Extensions Fields T4 Options 7.7.6. Values 1 3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4 Least significant bit first 1728 (A-4) N: total number of scan lines in image 2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document N, m: page number n followed by total page count m 0: pixel value 1 means black 2: inch Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip 1 Number of byte in TIFF strip Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip 204, 200 (pixels/inch) 98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch) 0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned4: MH coding, EOLs byte aligned Addressing A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to PSTN-based services. (1) Offramp (2) Sub address (3) Others FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com Global-phone Service selector Domain FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org Sub address Selector Global-phone Service selector VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com Global-phone Service selector Domain Domain 257 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Note: For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words “MUST”, “MUST NOT”, “REQUIRED”, “SHALL”, “SHALL NOT”, “SHOULD”, “SHOULD NOT”, “RECOMMENDED”, “MAY”, and “OPTIONAL” in this document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119 1. MUST This word, or the terms “REQUIRED” or “SHALL”, means that the definition is an absolute requirement of the specification. 2. MUST NOT This phrase, or the phrase “SHALL NOT”, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the specification. 3. SHOULD These words, or the adjective “RECOMMENDED”, means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and carefully weighed before choosing a different course. 4. SHOULD NOT This phrase, or the phrase “NOT RECOMMENDED” means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior described with this label. 7.7.7. Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data Header Value Offset IFD (Page 0) Long Values Image Data (Page 0) Value Offset IFD (Page 1) Long Values Image Data (Page 1) First IFD Offset Next IFD Offset Strip Offset Next IFD Offset Strip Offset IFD (Page 2) File Structure 258 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Message Header Contents 7.7.8. Delivery Failure In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the format of a DSN. 7.7.9. Image File Format The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306. The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files. 259 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.8. Communication Protocols The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport, document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security. Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows: SMTP Command & Reply Procedure SMTP Server (sv2.labo.mgcs.com) your Panasonic Device (ef1.labo.mgcs.com) TCP 3 Way Handshake & Opening Session [5 minutes] Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25) 220 sv2.labo.mgcs.com Service ready SMTP Command HELO sv2.labo.mgcs.com 250 ef1.labo.mgcs.com MAIL FROM: [5 minutes] 250 OK RCPT TO: [5 minutes] 250 OK DATA [2 minutes] 250 Start mail out;end with . DATA BLOCK DATA BLOCK 1 [3 minutes] [3 minutes] DATA BLOCK n CR/LF . CR/LF [10 minutes] Closing DATA BLOCK 2 250 OK QUIT 221sv2.labo.mgcs.com Service closing transmission channel Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25) According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP: 1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or 2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message. A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code. The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123. 260 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.8.1. Opening and Closing At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the transmission channel for opening and closing: HELO: QUIT: In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as saying, “Hello, I am ”. 7.8.2. Mail (MAIL) This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more mailboxes. 7.8.3. RECIPIENT (RCPT) This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by multiple uses of this command. 7.8.4. Data (DATA) The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the character sequence “.”. This is the end of mail data indication. 7.8.5. Send This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal. 7.8.6. Reset (RSET) This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients, and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK reply. 7.8.7. Verify (VRFY) This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned. 7.8.8. Quit (QUIT) This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel. 7.8.9. Reply Codes from SMTP Server SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands. 261 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.8.10. 211 220 221 250 251 354 421 450 451 452 500 501 502 503 504 550 551 552 553 554 NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES System status or system help reply Service ready Service closing transmission channel Requested mail action okay# completed User not local; will forward to Start mail input; end with . Service not available: closing transmission channel [This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down] Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable [E.g.# mailbox busy] Requested action aborted: local error in processing Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage Syntax error# command unrecognized [This may include errors such as command line too long] Syntax error in parameters or arguments Command not implemented Bad sequence of commands Command parameter not implemented Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable [E.g.# mailbox not found# no access] User not local; please try Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed [E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect] Transaction failed 262 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.9. 7.9.1. POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3) Introduction On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an IP-style network for long amounts of time. The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it. For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939 7.9.2. Basic Operation Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted. Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long. Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long, including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case. Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet (decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response. Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing ".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response. A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state. In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the server @acquires resources associated with the client’s mail drop, and the session enters the TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP connection is then closed. A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server which is unwilling or unable to process the command. 263 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes’ duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client. 7.9.3. POP3 Command Summary Minimal POP3 Commands: USER name PASS string QUIT valid in AUTHORIZATION state STAT LIST [msg] RETR msg DELE msg NOOP RSET QUIT valid in the TRANSACTION state Optional POP3 Commands: APOP name digest valid in AUTHORIZATION state TOP msg n UIDL [msg] valid in the TRANSACTION state POP3 Replies: +OK -ERR Note: With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this reply. From: To: Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log 264 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure your Panasonic Device (ef1.labo.mgcs.com) TCP 3 way handshake & Opening Session AUTHORIZATION TRANSACTION UPDATE TCP 3 way handshake & Opening Session POP 3 Server (sv2.labo.mgcs.com) Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110) +OK POP Server ready <[email protected]> USER s50055 +OK Password required for s50055 PASS !xxxx +OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets). STAT +OK 2 126040 QUIT +OK POP Server at sv2 signing off. Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110) Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110) +OK POP Server ready <[email protected]> USER s50055 +OK Password required for s50055 AUTHORIZATION PASS !xxxx +OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets). TOP 1 1 +OK 69762 octets Text DATA Text DATA PETR 1 +OK 69752 octets Text DATA Text DATA Text DATA :end with .(period) TRANSACTION DELE 1 +OK Message 1 has been deleted. TOP 2 1 +OK 1 56288 octets Text DATA Text DATA PETR 2 +OK 1 56288 octets Text DATA Text DATA Text DATA :end with .(period) DELE 2 +OK Message 2 has been deleted. QUIT +OK POP Server at sv2 signing off. UPDATE Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110) 265 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.10. Troubleshooting from a PC Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble. One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC. Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer’s network PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail. Command Sample Ping Ping 192. 168. 1. 30 Ipconfig /all Tracert Netstat Net view Nslookup Purpose Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target destination (192.168.1.30) Ipconfig /all Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address, WINS etc) For Windows 95/98, please type “winipcfg” instead of Ipconfig/all Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target destination (192.168.2.245) NetstatNetstat -nr Active connection list Active route for your subnet. All special assigned IP addresses are also shown Net view Checking for the current file sharing Host Name Nslookup Checking for the DNS server IP address. This command is available for Windows NT only. Note: Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first. 266 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP) START Is the LAN connected to an ISP Yes No No DHCP Client? Is this a Dialup connection ? No Is static IP address available ? Yes Not supported Yes Is G3 Gateway function being used ? Yes Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ? No Yes Yes No Yes Not supported Is POP account available ? Is POP account available ? No No Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ? No Yes Not supported Yes Set network parameters for POP receiving If not ready Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account. Set network parameters for SMTP receiving If not ready Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup". Set network parameters for POP receiving and set G3 Gateway parameters for your Panasonic Device If not ready Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account. Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup". Important Notice: The customer who supposed to operate G3 Gateway function at MGCS models, the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may ask Security Policy Manager to allow relay message by changing configuration of Massage Transfer Agent like Sendmail. Otherwise the system denied any relay operation. 267 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options. The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts. The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a host using BOOTP. DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts. DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation. In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client. In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the client explicitly relinquishes the address). In "manual allocation", a client’s IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator. "DHCP client" A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network address. "DHCP server" A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients. Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use. Message Use DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers. DHCPOFFER Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration parameters. DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease on a particular network address. DHCPACK Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network address. DHCPNAK Server to client indicating client’s notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client has moved to new subnet) or client’s lease as expired DHCPDECLINE Client to server indicating network address and in use. DHCPRELEASE Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease. DHCPINFORM Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has externally configured network address. Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use 268 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address. Client Server (not selected) Server (selected) Begins initialization Determines configuration DHCPDISCOVER DHCPDISCOVER Determines configuration DHCPOFFER DHCPOFFER Collects replies Selects configuration DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST Commits configuration DHCPACK Initialization complete Graceful shutdown Discards lease DHCPRELEASE Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address. Server Client Server Begins initialization Locates configuration DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST DHCPACK DHCPACK Locates configuration Initialization complete Subsequent DHCPACKS ignored Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address 269 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message. Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type. INITIALIZATION INITIALIZE/ REBOOT DHCPNAK/ Restart -/Send DHCPREQUES DHCPACK (not accept.)/ Send DHCPDECLINE -/Send DHCPDISCOVER DHCPNAK, Lease expired/ Halt network DHCPNAK/ Discard offer SELECTING DHCPOFFER/ Collect replies REBOOTING Select offer/ send DHCPREQUEST REQUESTING REBINDING DHCPOFFER/ Discard DHCPACK/ Record lease, set timers T1, T2 DHCPNAK/ Halt network DHCPACK/ Record lease, set /timers T1,T2 DHCPACK/ Record lease, set /timers T1,T2 T2 expires/ Broadcast DHCPREQUEST BOUND DHCPACK/ Record lease, set timers T1, T2 T1 expires/ Send DHCPREQUEST to leasing server T1 expires/ Send DHCPREQUEST to leasing server RENEWING The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server that originally issued the client’s network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which the client’s lease will expire. To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times. State-transition diagram for DHCP clients More detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from following URL. http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html. 270 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents (MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined. (1) Delivery confirmation (required) (2) Additional document features (optional) In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively. MGCS supports MDN. Delivery Status Notification (DSN) A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support DSNs. MGCS Iternet FAX does not request DSN while sending. fail SMTP Server SMTP Server DSN DSN returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurred. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without display) of the message, or the recipient’s refusal to provide MDNs. SMTP Server SMTP Server MDN Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed properly. The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message transmissions. 271 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from Options menu of Outlook Express. MDN request MDN notify Additional Document Capabilities Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities. MDN Response Read Receipt Capabilities (1) MDN Request Internet FAX (3) SMTP Server SMTP Server (2) Internet FAX Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging Process (1) Request If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message Disposition Notification when sending the message itself. Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address as following formula. 272 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 MDN Request Sample Mime-Version: 1.0 X-Mailer: Internet FAX, MGCS Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500 Message-Id: <[email protected]> From: "MGCS Internet FAX" Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX To: [email protected] Disposition-Notification-To: Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-MGCS-+-+-+" (2) Recipient’s MDN Response Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent. MDN Response Sample MESSAGE HEADER BODY TEXT Mime-Version: 1.0 X-Mailer: Internet FAX, MGCS Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500 Message-Id: <[email protected]> From: Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX To: [email protected] In-Reply-To: <[email protected]> References: <[email protected]> Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-MGCS-+-+-+" ********** Read Receipt ********** This message was opened by ’[email protected]’ dd Mmm yyyy 15:42 ****************************************** ATTACHED FILE Final-Recipient: rfc822;[email protected] Original-Message-ID: <[email protected]> Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched Media-Accept-Features: (& (type="image/tiff") (color=Binary) (image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal) (MRC-mode=0) (ua-media=stationery) (paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal]) (image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR]) (| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) ) (& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) ) (& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) ) 273 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 (3) Processing Confirmation The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue. To see more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document. 274 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP). This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP. X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global directory structure. It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that http & html are used to define & implement the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they can use a web browser to peruse the global Web. From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at directory services. 7.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP) - Extended Feature The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. ChallengeResponse Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5. Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the risk of password capture is greatly enhanced. An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP command provides this functionality. A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3 server, the syntax of the timestamp might be: where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process’s PID, clock is the decimal value of the system clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is running. 275 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Client Server Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110) Challenge Response <[email protected]> Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD <[email protected]>PASSWD +OK POP3 server ready <[email protected]> APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb +OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets) Produces a 16 octet digest value of c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb Possible Responses: +OK -ERR permission denied STAT +OK 1 Continue to follow the POP3 procedure APOP overview The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name’’ parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including anglebrackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters. When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct, the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state. Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state. Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it. 276 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server, perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions. Client Server Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25) 220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready EHLO jgm.example.com 250-smtp.example.com 250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5 AUTH CRAM-MD5 334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4= ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ== 235 Authentication successful Continue to follow the SMTP procedure SMTP AUTH overview The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504 reply. Challenge Response 334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4= BASE64 decoded string Produces a Challenge Genrates Digest parameter Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message USER Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of: 9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e Fred BASE64 encoded string ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ== The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a 334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line 277 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a 501 reply. If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply. The service name specified by this protocol’s profile of SASL is "smtp". Error Codes The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described. 432: A password transition is needed This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication mechanism. 538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted. 454: Temporary authentication failure This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server failure. 530: Authentication required This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action. 278 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 7.17. Direct SMTP Transfer - Extended Feature Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as SMTP mail relaying by employing SMTP server. Direct SMTP transfer allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly employing no SMTP server. To enables this feature, you must configure its static IP address, subnetmask, default gateway and etc. accordingly. Domain Name System (DNS) must be required to run the system, so that hosts and some additional records must be properly existed in DNS entries. Please note that the system runs under DHCP dynamic updates with DNS meets its requirement also. In other words, DHCP runs non-Dynamic Updates in the Domain Name System can not be applied for Internet Fax who whish to enables Direct SMTP transfer function. Further more, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely reticent to open the firewall for other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats. So the Direct SMTP transfer can be operating throughout the organization’s Intranet. Capability exchanges and content negotiations are also available to take advantageous communication between Internet Fax communications. Several service extensions are newly assigned. (1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG" (2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command Sender Recipient Establish TCP connection 220 EHLO Check for Capability 250 Response of CONNEG MAIL FROM: 250 Request for Capability TCP Port No. 25 RCPT TO: CONNEG 250 Capacity Exchange Continue to follow the SMTP procedure Direct SMTP Overview Capability contents sample 250- recipient ok 250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal) 250- (MRC-mode=0) 250- (color=Binary) 250- (|(&(dpi=204) 250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) ) 250- (&(dpi=200) 250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) ) 250- (&(dpi=400) 250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) ) 250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR]) 250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG) 250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85) 250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) ) 250- (size-x<=2150/254) 250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) ) 250 (ua-media=stationery) ) 279 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8 Installation 8.1. Function Key Any function can be started by first pressing pressing or FUNCTION and then enter the function number, or by scroll key repeatedly until the desired function appears on the display. 1 Deferred Communication 1 = XMT 2 = Polling 2 Advanced Communication 1 = Not Used 2 = Confidential Communication 3 - 4 = Not Used 5 = LAN Relay XMT 3 Polling 1 = Polling 2 = Polled 6 Print List 1 = Journal (Print/View) 2 = One-Touch/Abbreviated/Directory Search List 3 = Program List 4 = Fax Parameter List 5 = Not Used 6 = Individual XMT Journal 7 = Directory Sheet 7 Set Mode 1 = User Parameters • Date & Time • Time Zone • Logo • Character ID • ID Number (Fax Telephone Number) • IP Address (This is a partial list, for additional Functions, see page 49) 2 = One-Touch/Abbreviated Numbers 3 = Program Keys 4 = Fax Parameters 5 - 7 = Not Used 8 = Maintenance • Cleaning Printer Roller • Toner Order Form 8 Select Mode 1 = Communication Journal = OFF/ON/INC 2 = Delivery Notice = OFF/ON 3 = Cover Sheet = OFF/ON 4 = Password-XMT = OFF/ON 5 = RCV to Memory = OFF/ON 6 - 8 = Not Used 9 = Memory XMT = OFF/ON 9 Edit File Mode 1 = File List (Print/View) 2 = Change Time/Station 3 = Delete File 4 = Print File 5 = Add Document 6 = Retry Incomplete File 280 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8.2. Main Unit and Accessories Unpack the carton and check that you have all the accessories illustrated. Machine Toner Cartridge Telephone Line Cable Power Cord Recording Paper Tray Operating Instructions CD-ROM 281 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8.3. Installing the Accessories Final Installed View Recording Paper Tray Hook the projections into the square holes on the machine. Handset [Available as an Option] Handset Cradle [Available as an Option] Handset Cord [Available as an Option] Hook the projections into the square holes on the machine. Connect the cable into the HANDSET jack on the machine. NOTE The handset may not be available in certain destinations due to its regulation or specification. 282 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8.4. 1 Installing the Toner Cartridge Unpack the Toner Cartridge and rock it back and forth as shown 5 or 6 times to even the Toner Cartridge toner inside. 2 Remove the protective seal. Note: Pull on the seal slowly and straight ou 3 Open the Printer Cover. Printer Cover Continued on the next page... 283 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4 Align the projections on both sides of the Toner Cartridge with the grooves in the machine as shown and insert the Toner Cartridge into the machine. Note: Lock the Toner Cartridge into place by pressing the handle down and then pushing towards the rear of the machine. 5 Close the Printer Cover. Printer Cover 6 If you are replacing the Toner Cartridge, it is recommended to clean the Printer Roller to maintain good printing quality. To clean the Printer Roller, follow the procedure on next page. 284 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Cleaning the Printer Roller If you find toner on the back of the recording paper, the printer roller in the fuser unit is probably dirty. To clean the Printer Rollers 1 2 MAINTENANCE ENTER NO. OR 7 (1-9) 8 * PRINTING * CLEANING CHARTS 1 1 The machine will print out 3 Cleaning Charts. Then, return to standby. HOW TO LOAD THE CLEANING CHARTS 1.REMOVE THE PAPER CASSETTE (If multiple cassette configuration, REMOVE THE UPPER PAPER CASSETTE) 2.SET THESE 3 CLEANING CHARTS IN THE CASSETTE FACE DOWN 3.RE-INSTALL THE PAPER CASSETTE 4.PRESS [FUNCTION][7][8][SET][1][SET][2] TO START CLEANING 5.DISPOSE OF THE CLEANING CHARTS *** SET THIS END TOWARDS THE FRONT, FACE DOWN *** 3 4 5 Load the Cleaning Charts into the cassette face down. (See Note 1) MAINTENANCE ENTER NO. OR 7 (1-9) 8 * CLEANING * PRINTER ROLLER 1 2 The Machine will feed out the charts and clean the printer roller. NOTE 1. If y ou have installed the optional cass ette(s), load the Cleaning Charts int o the upper c assette. 285 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8.5. Loading the Recording Paper How to Load the Recording Paper 1 Lift up the Paper Cassette slightly and slide it out from the machine. Paper Cassette 2 Remove the Paper Cassette Cover. Cassette Cover 3 1. Remove the Shipping Screw securing the Pressure Plate. 2. Store the screw by attaching it to the post provided under the Paper Cassette Cover for future use. Shipping Screw Cassette Cover 286 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 4 Max. Paper Capacity Mark Paper Width Guide 1. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette. Slide the paper width guide to the left until it lightly touches the stack of paper without bending the paper. The paper must fit squarely and firmly between the Paper Width Guide and the right side of tray. If it does not, the paper may feed into the printer incorrectly resulting in a paper jam. Caution: Make sure that the paper is set under the metal Paper Separation Clips and that it does not exceed the Maximum Paper Capacity Mark. You can load about 250 sheets (20 lb weight). 2. Re-install the Paper Cassette Cover. 3. Slide the Paper Cassette into the machine. 287 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8.6. Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Length How to Adjust the Paper Cassette for the Paper Length The factory default Paper Length setting for the Paper Cassette is on Letter size. To change the paper length to A4 or Legal size, follow the steps below. 1 Release Latch 1. Remove the paper from the Paper Cassette and place the cassette upside down on a flat surface. 2. While pushing down on the release latch, pull out the Paper Length Guide. 3. Turn the Paper Cassette upright. 4. Insert the Paper Length Guide hooks into the appropriate paper length slots (A4 or Legal) and slide the guide towards the back of the cassette until it locks in place. 5. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette. Paper Length Guide Slide the paper width guide to the left until it lightly touches the stack of paper without bending the paper. The paper must fit squarely and firmly between the Paper Width Guide and the right side of tray. If it does not, the paper may feed into the printer incorrectly resulting in a paper jam. Paper Width Guide Max. Paper Capacity Mark LTR A4 LGL Caution: Make sure that the paper is set under the metal Paper Separation Clips and that it does not exceed the Maximum Paper Capacity Mark. You can load about 250 sheets (20 lb weight). 6. Replace the Paper Cassette Cover to the appropriate paper position (LTR, A4 or LGL). 7. Slide the Paper Cassette into the machine. 2 The Recording Paper Size setting of the Fax Parameter No. 23 must match the paper loaded in the cassette. If you change the Recording Paper Size, please change the setting accordingly. NOTE 1. If you forget to change the Recording Paper Size setting in Fax Parameter No. 23 when different paper is installed in the cassette, the unit will Stop printing after the 1st page of an Incoming Fax and display a "PAPER SIZE MISMATCH" error. Then, the Recording Paper Size setting automatically adjusts to the proper size and the unit resumes printing the Incoming Fax from the 1st page. 288 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8.7. Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Width How to Adjust the Paper Cassette for the Paper Width The factory default Paper Width setting for the Paper Cassette is on Letter/Legal size. To change the paper width to A4 size, follow the steps below. 1 1. Release the left Paper Separation Clip latch. 2. Pull up the Paper Separation Clip to remove it. 3. Reposition the Paper Separation Clip into the A(A4) slot. 4. Swing the Paper Separation Clip downward to latch it in place. Paper Separation Clip 2 1. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette. Slide the paper width guide to the left until it lightly touches the stack of paper without bending the paper. The paper must fit squarely and firmly between the Paper Width Guide and the right side of tray. If it does not, the paper may feed into the printer incorrectly resulting in a paper jam. Paper Width Guide Max. Paper Capacity Mark Caution: Make sure that the paper is set under the metal Paper Separation Clips and that it does not exceed the Maximum Paper Capacity Mark. You can load about 250 sheets (20 lb weight). LTR A4 LGL 2. Replace the Paper Cassette Cover to the appropriate paper position (LTR, A4 or LGL). 3. Slide the Paper Cassette into the machine. 3 The Recording Paper Size setting of the Fax Parameter No. 23 must match the paper loaded in the cassette. If you change the Recording Paper Size, please change the setting accordingly. NOTE 1. If you forge t to change th e Recordin g Paper Si ze setti ng in Fax Parameter No. 23 when di ffere nt paper i s ins talled i n the cassette, the unit will Stop printin g after the 1st page of an Inc oming Fax and dis play a " PAPER SIZE MISMATCH" error. Then, the Recordi ng Paper Size settin g autom ati cal ly adjusts to th e prop er si ze and the unit resumes pri nti ng the Incoming Fax fro m the 1s t page. 289 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8.8. Connecting the Telephone Line Cable and Power Cord Power Cord Plug one end of the power cord into an ordinary 3 prong AC outlet and the other end into the receptacle on the rear of the machine. Warning: This apparatus must be properly grounded through an ordinary 3 prong AC outlet. Do not break off the earth (ground) prong to fit a 2 prong outlet. Power Cord (Included) External Telephone (Optional) You can connect an additional standard single line telephone to the machine. To connect the telephone, break off the protective tab on the TEL jack. RJ-45 LAN Jack (10Base-T/100Base-TX) LINK Lamp Illuminates when connected to the LAN. Lamp will not turn ON if the LAN Cable is defective (contains breaks). Telephone Line Cable (Included) ACTIVITY Lamp Blinks when there is data traffic on the LAN. RJ-11C Telephone Jack LAN Cable (10Base-T/100Base-TX Cable) Insert the plug until a click is heard. (LAN Cable is not included with the product.) Purchase a Category 5 Cable, compliant with EIA/TIA 568-A-5 standard. Telephone Line Cable Plug one end of the telephone line cable into the "RJ-11C" telephone jack supplied by the telephone company and the other end into the LINE jack on the left side of the machine. Ethernet LAN Cable Ethernet-Token-Ring Bridge (Optional Order No. UE-204006) 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet Hub NOTE Ethernet LAN (10Base-T/100Base-TX) Cable (Not included) 1. Your machine uses little power and you should keep it ON at all times. If the power is turned OFF for too long, the clock contents may be lost. 290 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8.9. Setting the Internet Parameters Before starting, you will need a completed copy of page 19 (Pre Installation Information). For your machine to be able to operate on the Network properly, the following five (5) Basic Parameters must be preprogrammed into the machine. . IP Address . Mask . Subnet Default Gateway IP Address . Server Name or IP Address . SMTP Email Address Note: If DHCP server is available on your network, the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address will be acquired automatically. 1 2 SET MODE ENTER NO. OR 7 (1-8) 1:USER PARAMETERS? PRESS SET TO SELECT 1 3 IP ADDRESS repeatedly until display shows; 4 Enter the IP Address using the keypad. Press or to enter the period ".". (See Note 3) Ex: 1 2 3 1 7 8 2 4 0 3 5 SUBNET MASK To continue setting other parameters, or press to return to standby. NOTE IP ADDRESS 123.178.240.3 STOP 1. To scroll the display to desired User Parameter in Step 3, press or . 2. If the DNS Server is not available, change the setting of the Fax Parameter No. 161 (DNS SERVER) to "Invalid", then enter the IP Address instead. 3. For convenience, you can use Otherwise to enter a period "." while programming IP Addresses only. is used to enter an asterisk under other conditions. 291 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Setting the User Parameters for the LAN Interface Depending on how your machine will be configured to communicate on the LAN, the appropriate parameters listed in the table below must be stored first. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7* 8* 9* 10* 11* 12* 13* 14 15* 16* 17* 18* 19* 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Parameter DATE & TIME TIME ZONE Comments Current Date and Time. The Time Zone is required as part of the Email header information when sending Internet faxes. LOGO Up to 25 characters & digits. CHARACTER ID Up to 16 characters & digits. ID NO. Your Fax Telephone Number. (Up to 20 digits) (MAC ADDRESS) Hardware Address hard-coded into your machine. (If required, can be obtained from the Fax Parameter List printout, by pressing [FUNCTION] [6] [4] [SET]) IP ADDRESS IP Address assigned to your machine by the Network Administrator or the DHCP Server. SUBNET MASK Subnet Mask assigned by the Network Administrator or the DHCP Server. DEFAULT GATEWAY Default Gateway IP Address assigned by the Network Administrator or the IP ADDR DHCP Server. PRIMARY DNS IP Address of the primary DNS Server. If the DNS Server is not available, SERVER IP ADDRESS change the setting of the Fax Parameter No. 161 (DNS SERVER) to "Invalid", then enter the IP Address instead. SECONDARY DNS IP Address of the secondary DNS Server. SERVER IP ADDRESS EMAIL ADDRESS The Email Address assigned to your machine for sending and receiving. (Up to 60 characters) SMTP SERVER NAME The name of the SMTP Mail Server. (Up to 60 characters) SMTP SERVER IP IP Address of the SMTP Mail Server. ADDR SMTP AUTH NAME User name required to login to the SMTP Server before it allow to send email messages. (Up to 40 characters). SMTP PASSWORD Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters) POP SERVER NAME The name of the POP Mail Server. (Up to 60 characters). POP SERVER IP IP Address of the POP Mail Server. ADDR POP USER NAME User Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 40 characters) POP PASSWORD Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters) LDAP SERVER NAME The name of the LDAP Server. (Up to 60 characters) LDAP LOG IN NAME Login Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 40 characters) LDAP PASSWORD Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters) LDAP SEARCH BASE ID for starting the search in the directory on the LDAP server. (Up to 60 Characters) HOST NAME The Host Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 60 characters) DEFAULT SUBJECT The default information to be added to the Subject Line for all outgoing Email (up to 40 characters). To manually input this information before transmission, change the Fax Parameter No. 159 (SUBJECT LINE ENTRY) to "2:Valid". DEFAULT DOMAIN When the outgoing email address is incomplete by SMTP standards, the Frequently Sent Domain specified here will be automatically added to the email address. This feature is also useful as a shortcut when manually entering email addresses to a frequently used Domain. (Up to 50 characters) 292 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. 28 29 Parameter SELECTABLE DOMAINS (01) ~ (10) REMOTE PASSWORD 30 31 32 33 RELAY XMT PASSWORD MANAGER’S EMAIL ADDR RELAY DOMAIN (01) ~ (10) Comments Enter up to 10 Domain Names that can be selected after the Domain "@" key is pressed using the "\/ or /\" key during Manual email addressing. (Up to 30 characters) This is a security password that allows Remote Programming of the Internet Parameters and Auto Dialer or the retrieval of the Journal via an Email. (Up to 10 characters) A password that provides Network security for your Relay Station (used exclusively for G3 relay purposes). (Up to 10 characters) Department Manager’s Email Address for notification of all Internet relayed transmissions for supervision and cost control purposes. (Up to 60 characters) Enter up to 10 Domain Name(s) that have been authorized to access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request. (Up to 30 characters) Relay Domain, a.k.a. Domain Name in your machine. Community Name used for the Network Device Locator. COMMUNITY NAME (01) ~ (02) 34 DEVICE NAME Device Name used for the Network Device Locator. 35 DEVICE LOCATION Device Location for the Network Device Locator. * Contact your Network Administrator for this Information. 293 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8.10. Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email Using Email to Program or Retrieve Parameters This feature is a powerful tool, which provides a convenient and easy way of retrieving or programming Internet Parameters, One-Touch, ABBR Dialing Numbers, Program keys and Journal retrieval from your PC by sending a text email message to your machine. Using your email application s "Subject:" line as a command-input field, you can request your machine to perform the following commands: "Subject:" Line Command 1 2 3 4 5 Where: #set parameters(password)# #get parameters(password)# #set abbr(password)# #get abbr(password)# #get jnl(password)# Function Programs the Internet Parameters Retrieves the Internet Parameters Programs the Auto Dialer Retrieves the Auto Dialer Data Retrieves the current Journal data "set" is used to program the data "get" is used to retrieve the data "parameters" represents Internet Parameters "abbr" represents Auto Dialer "jnl" represents Journal "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). Must be enclosed within the parenthesis "( )". The command must be enclosed within the hash (#) signs. Using a PC to Input the Internet Parameters Remotely This feature provides a convenient and an easy way to input the Internet Parameters right from your PC by sending a text email message to your machine. The following parameters can be input remotely via a PC. The other parameters must be entered from the machine in the User Parameters. . Sender Selection (up to 24 User Names) . Default Domain . Selectable Domains (up to 10 additional Domain Names) . Remote Password . Manager s Email Address . Relay XMT Password . Relay Domain (up to 10 Domain Names authorized for Relay XMT Request) . LDAP Server Name . LDAP Login Name . LDAP Password . LDAP Search Base . Community Name (up to 2 Community Names) . Device Name . Device Location Your machine interprets the command that you enter in the "Subject" line of your email message and performs one of the following functions, it Retrieves or Stores data into the Internet Parameters (User Parameters). The two types of commands that can be entered in the "Subject" line of your email: 1) To Store data, type : #set parameters(password)# 2) To Retrieve : data, type #get parameters(123456789)# NOTE : where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). You can enter the Internet Parameters shown above with this command the first time. However, if these fields already contain data, do not use this command as the existing information will be deleted and overwritten. Use the Retrieve command below instead. 1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid". 294 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Input the Internet Parameters for the First Time Create a script in the message body of a plain text email and send it to your machine’s email address. The "Subject" line of the email must be as follows: #set parameters(password)# : Important : where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters. For security, always input a Remote Password in the User Parameters. [If the password was not programmed, represent it with "( )" and assign a password now. Ex: #set parameters( )#]. Do not use the above command if these fields already contain data, the existing information will be deleted and overwritten. Retrieve and backup the existing data onto your PC first by following the procedures for Retrieving and Editing the Internet Parameters. The script sample to input the Internet Parameters is shown below. (1) (2) (3) (4) (a) (b) (5) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (6) (d) (a) (b) (c) (1) To From : : Subject : (7) (d) Your machine’s email address. This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet Parameters and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.) To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)# 295 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Input the Internet Parameters for the First Time (2) @sender to @end : (3) @select-domain to @end : (4) @relay-domain to @end : (5) @system to @end : (6) @ldap to@end : (7) @mib to @end : NOTE Defines the Sender information to be set in section (2) between @sender to @end block. Register up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses for the Sender Selection feature (See page 149). Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field) The data string for each Sender Selection should be defined within a single line. The syntax is: ;; (a) 01 to 24: Indicates the Sender Selection Numbers (b) User Name (25-characters maximum) (c) Email Address (60-characters maximum) Defines the Selectable Domains to be set in section (3) between @select-domain to @end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that can be selected during manual email addressing. (30-characters maximum) The syntax is: ; Defines the Domain Names to be set in section (4) between @relay-domain to @end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that have been authorized to access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request. (30-characters maximum) Defines the Internet Parameters to be set in section (5) between @system to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) Default Domain (50-characters maximum). The syntax is: domain; (b) Manager s Email Address (60-characters maximum). The syntax is: manager; (c) Relay XMT Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: relay; . Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. (d) Remote Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: remote; . Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. Defines the LDAP Parameters to be set in section (6) between @ldap to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) LDAP Server Name (60-characters maximum). The syntax is: server; (b) LDAP Login Name (40-characters maximum). The syntax is: login; (c) LDAP Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: password;Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. (d) LDAP Search Base (40-characters maximum). The syntax is: base; Defines the MIB to be set in section (7) between @mib to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) Community Name(1) (32-characters maximum). The syntax is: com_name1; (b) Community Name(2) (32-characters maximum). The syntax is: com_name2; (c) Device Name(32-characters maximum). The syntax is: device; (d) Device Location(32-characters maximum). The syntax is: location; 1. The machine cannot be programmed via email while it is communicating or printing. 296 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Retrieve the Internet Parameters for Backup To retrieve the existing Internet Parameters, send a plain text email to the your machine’s email address with the following command in the "Subject" line: #get parameters(password)# : where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). For security, always input a Remote Password in the User Parameters. If it was not programmed, signify with "()" (i.e. #get parameters()#). Make sure that the CC..., Bcc... lines and the body of the email message is Blank. (1) (1) To : Your machine’s email address. From : This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet Parameters and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.) Subject : To Retrieve data, type: #get parameters(password)# 297 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Retrieve the Internet Parameters for Backup After receiving the email message requesting the Internet Parameters, your machine sends back an email to the address specified in the "From:" line with the Internet Parameters in the body of the email. Your Machine s Internet Parameters Email Sample (1) (8) [Delete this header before sending the email.] (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) (2) To : Your email address that was used to retrieve the Internet Parameters. From : Your machine’s email address. Subject : Your machine s System Parameter List @sender to @end : Defines up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses programmed in your machine for the Sender Selection in section (2) between @sender to @end block. 298 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Retrieve the Internet Parameters for Backup (3) @select-domain to @end : Defines up to 10 alternate Domain Names programmed in your machine for the Selectable Domains in section (3) between @select-domain to @end block. (4) @relay-domain to @end : Defines up to 10 Domain Names programmed in your machine that have been authorized to access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request in section (4) between @relay-domain to @end block. (5) @system to @end : Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section (5) between @system to @end block. (a) Default Domain (b) Manager s Email Address (c) Relay XMT Password (d) Remote Password (6) @ldap to@end : Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section (6) between @ldap to @end block. (a) LDAP Server Name (b) LDAP Login Name (c) LDAP Password (d) LDAP Search Base (7) @mib to @end : Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section (7) between @mib to @end block. (a) Community Name(1) (b) Community Name(2) (c) Device Name (d) Device Location : This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming of Internet Parameters. The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine, therefore, you can leave it as is, or delete it if you wish. (8) To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File After receiving your machine s email with the Internet Parameters, store the email file as text (.txt) on your PC for backup purposes. To change or update the Internet Parameters, follow the steps below: 1. Create a New Email Message, fill out the "To" and "From" Address line and the Subject line information for section (1) below: To : Your machine’s email address. From : This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet Parameters and for error message notification. Subject : To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)# 2. Open the backup, Internet Parameter text file. Copy the body text and paste it on the body of the newly created email message. 3. Delete any headers that may be present in the body of the email, as unsupported data will be rejected. The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine. 4. Edit a parameter and/or add additional Sender Name(s) or Domain Name(s). 5. When finished, use the "File/Save as..." command and save the updated file with ".txt" extension as a backup. 6. Send the email message to your machine to update the Internet Parameters. 299 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File Your Machine s Internet Parameters Email Sample (1) (8) [Delete this header before sending the email.] (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) To : Your machine’s email address. From : This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet Parameters and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.) Subject : To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)# 300 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File (2) @sender to @end : Defines the Sender information to be set in section (2) between @sender to @end block. Edit, Delete or Register up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses for the Sender Selection feature (See page 149). Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field) The data string for each Sender Selection should be defined within a single line. The syntax is: ;; (a) 01 to 24: Indicates the Sender Selection Numbers (b) User Name (25-characters maximum) (c) Email Address (60-characters maximum) (3) @select-domain to @end : Defines the Selectable Domains to be set in section (3) between @select-domain to @end block. Register up to 10 alternate Domain Names that can be selected during manual email addressing. (30-characters maximum) The syntax is: ; (4) @relay-domain to @end : Defines the Domain Names to be set in section (4) between @relay-domain to @end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that have been authorized to access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request. (30-characters maximum) (5) @system to @end : Defines the Internet Parameters to be set in section (5) between @system to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) Default Domain (50-characters maximum). The syntax is: domain; (b) Manager s Email Address (60-characters maximum). The syntax is: manager; (c) Relay XMT Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: relay; . Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. (d) Remote Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: remote; . Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. (Notice that for the above example, we have changed the Manager s Email Address, Relay XMT Password and the Remote Password) (6) @ldap to@end : Defines the LDAP Parameters to be set in section (6) between @ldap to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) LDAP Server Name (60-characters maximum). The syntax is: server; (b) LDAP Login Name (40-characters maximum). The syntax is: login; (c) LDAP Password (10-characters maximum). The syntax is: password;Quotation marks " " enclosing the password, is required, as shown in the example above. (d) LDAP Search Base (40-characters maximum). The syntax is: base; (7) @mib to @end : Defines the MIB to be set in section (7) between @mib to @end block. Register the following Internet Parameters. (a) Community Name(1) (32-characters maximum). The syntax is: com_name1; (b) Community Name(2) (32-characters maximum). The syntax is: com_name2; (c) Device Name(32-characters maximum). The syntax is: device; (d) Device Location(32-characters maximum). The syntax is: location; : This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming of Internet Parameters. The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine, therefore, you can leave it as is, or delete it if you wish. (8) 301 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Using a PC to Update the Auto Dialer Remotely This feature provides a convenient and an easy way to Update, Backup or Restore the Phone Book data right from your PC by sending a text email message to your machine. Your machine interprets the command that you enter in the "Subject" line of your email message and performs one of the following functions, it Retrieves or Stores data into the Auto Dialer (Phone Book). The two types of commands that can be entered in the "Subject" line of your email: 1) To Store data, type : #set abbr(password)# 2) To Retrieve : data, type #get abbr(123456789)# NOTE : where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). You can program any known unused Auto Dialer location(s) with this command for the first time, without having to Retrieve the Phone Book data first. If the desired Auto Dialer location already contains data, your machine will overwrite the existing data, therefore, we recommend that you use the Retrieve command below instead. To edit existing Auto Dialer locations, refer to pages 65 to 66. 1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid". 302 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Deleting the Entire Auto Dialer If you wish to delete the entire Auto Dialer data in your machine, type the following command in the body of the email message: @command delete @end This command can also be inserted before the @begin to @end block, to erase the entire Auto Dialer data first, then reprogram it with new data. This method will also prevent the "Overwrite Warning Message" that is sent back from your machine, when the current Auto Dialer station is overwritten. To erase the entire Auto Dialer data, type the following command in the "Subject" line of your email: #set abbr(password)# : where the password is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters. Retrieve and backup the existing data onto your PC first by following the procedures for Retrieving and Editing. 303 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Program One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the First Time Create a script in the message body of a plain text email and send it to your machine’s email address.The "Subject" line of the email must be as follows: : #set abbr(password)# where the password is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters. The script sample to program the One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the first time is shown in the illustration below: First Time Remote Programming of One-Touch/ABBR. No. Sample (1) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (2) Headquarters (a) (d) (c) (f) (e) (f) (h) (b) (3) (g) 304 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Program One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the First Time Explanation of Contents (1) To : Your machine’s email address. From : This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Phone Book data and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.) Subject : To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)# To Retrieve data, type: #get abbr(password)# (2) @begin to @end block : Defines the data to be set into the Phone Book between @begin to @end block. Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field) The data string for each station should be defined within a single line. (a) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed 001 to 100: indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum) 1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28 2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as One-Touch dialing number) (b) Station-name: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (c) Station-address: email address or telephone number of the station being programmed (d) Routing-subaddress: sub-address to be used for routing (20-digit maximum) (e) Routing-id-number: TSI to be used for routing (20-digit maximum) (f) The End Receiving Station s telephone number is entered after the hash sign (#). (3) @program to @end : Defines the data to be set into Program Keys as a Group Key or POP Access Key between @program to @end block. (a) Program Key: P01 - P04 (b) Station-name as a Group Key: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (c) GROUP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a Group Key (d) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed 001 to 100: indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum) 1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28 2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as One-Touch dialing number) (e) POP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a POP Access Key (f) POP User-name: Name of the station being programmed (40 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (g) POP Password: POP Password (10 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (h) Set whether the emails on the POP Server are deleted after retrieving the emails. NOTE 1. If a POP user account is programmed into the P1 to P4 program keys, the data programmed for this key cannot be deleted, even when the delete command is specified. 2. The email address and the telephone number cannot be programmed via email when: One-Touch Number has been used for communication reservation. Received documents are stored in the image data memory of the machine. While the machine is communicating or printing. 3. When the email address and telephone number are programmed via email, a program result email is sent back. 4. Some email applications automatically insert a line feed in the middle of a line when the number of characters in a line exceed a specific number. Turn "Off" the automatic line feed, or define the number of characters per line to prevent a line feed, or the data will be ignored. 305 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Retrieve One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data for Backup To retrieve the existing auto dialer data, send a plain text email to your machine’s email address with the following command in the "Subject" line: : #get abbr(password)# where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). Make sure that the Cc, Bcc lines and the body of the email message is Blank. Retrieving One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data Sample (1) (1) To : Your machine’s email address. From : This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/ ABBR. No. data and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.) Subject : To Retrieve data, type: #get abbr(password)# 306 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Retrieve One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data for Backup After receiving the email message requesting the existing auto dialer data, your machine sends back an email to the address specified in the "From:" line with the auto dialer information in the body of the email. Your Machine s Auto Dialer Email Sample (1) [email protected] MMM-dd-yyyy 14:15 (2) Headquarters (3) (1) To : Your email address that was used to retrieve the Auto Dialer data. From : Your machine’s email address. Subject : ONE-TOUCH/ABBR. List (2) @begin to @end block : Defines One-Touch Keys, Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Program Keys stored as a One-Touch Key programmed in your machine in section (2) between @begin to @end block. (3) @program to @end : Defines Program Keys stored as a Group Key or POP Access Key programmed in your machine in section (3) between @program to @end block. 307 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Edit the Retrieved or Backup One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data File After receiving your machine email with the auto dialer data, store the email file as text (.txt) on your PC for backup purposes. To change or update the auto dialer, follow the steps below: 1. Create a New Email Message, fill out the "To" and "From" Address line and the Subject line information for section (1) below: To : Your machine’s email address. From : This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/ ABBR. No. data and for error message notification. Subject : To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)# 2. Open the backup, auto dialer text file. Copy the body text and paste it on the body of the newly created email message. 3. Delete any headers that may be present in the body of the email, as unsupported data will be rejected. The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine. 4. Edit and/or add additional One-Touch/ABBR. No. stations. 5. When finished, use the "File/Save as..." command and save the updated file with ".txt" extension as a backup. 6. Send the email message to your machine to update the auto dialer. Your Machine s Auto Dialer Email Sample (1) (5) [Delete this header before sending email] [email protected] MMM-dd-yyyy (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (2) (f) Headquarters (4) (a) (b) (d) (h) (f) (g) (c) (e) (3) 308 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 To Edit the Retrieved or Backup One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data File (1) To : Your machine’s email address. From : This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s). It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/ ABBR. No. data and for error message notification. (Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.) Subject : To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)# (2) @begin to @end block : Defines the One-Touch Keys, Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Program Keys stored as a One-Touch Key to be set in section (2) between @begin to @end block. Edit, Delete or Register the information. Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field) The data string for each station should be defined within a single line. The syntax is:;;;; (a) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed 001 to 100: indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum) 1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28 2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as One-Touch dialing number) (b) Station-name: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (c) Station-address: email address or telephone number of the station being programmed (d) Routing-subaddress: sub-address to be used for routing (20-digit maximum) (e) Routing-id-number: TSI to be used for routing (20-digit maximum) (f) The End Receiving Station s telephone number is entered after the hash sign (#). (3) @program to @end : Defines the Program Keys stored as a Group Key or POP Access Key to be set in section (3) between @program to @end block. Edit, Delete or Register the information. (a) Program Key: P01 - P04 (b) Station-name as a Group Key: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (c) GROUP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a Group Key (d) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. to be programmed 001 to 100: indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum) 1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28 2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as One-Touch dialing number) (e) POP:The syntax used to set the Program Key as a POP Access Key. (f) POP User-name: Name of the POP user account (40 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (g) POP Password: POP Password (10 alpha-numeric characters maximum) (h) Set whether the emails on the POP Server are deleted after retrieving the emails. (4) These 2 ABBR. No. stations were added to the list. (5) This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming of One-Touch/ABBR. No. The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine, therefore, you can leave it as is or delete it if you wish. 309 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Using Email to Retrieve the Journal To retrieve the existing Journal data, send an email to your machine’s email address with the following command in the "Subject" line: #get jnl(password)# : where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine’s User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). The Journal will be send back to the originating station s email address. After receiving the journal, use a fixed width font (i.e. Courier), in order to align the received journal s contents on the PC. A separate email message is sent by your machine, an "Internet Fax Return Receipt" to the Manager s email address programmed in the User Parameters, informing of the Journal transfer. NOTE 1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid". 310 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 8.11. Customizing Your Machine General Description Your fac simile machine has a variety of adjustabl e Fax Pa rameter s. Thes e parameters, listed in the Parameter Table, are pr eset for you a nd d o not need to be ch ang ed. If you do want to mak e a change , read th e table careful ly. Some paramete rs, suc h as the Resoluti on and Contrast parameter s, can be temporaril y change d by simp le key op erati on just befor e a tr ans mi ss io n i s made. When t he tr ansm is sion end s, howev er, th ese parameter s return to thei r preset values (Home positi on) . Other parameter s can only be change d by th e pr oc edur e desc ribed b elow. Setting the Fax Parameters 1 SET MODE (1-8) EN TER NO. OR 7 2 FA X PARAMETER(01-174) NO.= 4 3 4 Enter Fax Parameter numb er fr om the Parameter Table. 5 6 Enter th e new setting value . FA X PARAMETER(01-174) NO.=01 Ex: 0 1 for CONTRAST 01 CONTRAST 1:NORMAL 01 CONTRAST 2:LIGHTER Ex: 2 for LIGHTER 02 RESOLUTION 1:STANDARD To set another par ameter, press sCLEAR to return to ste p 3 or pr ess STOP NOTE to return to stand by. 1. To scroll the Fax Parameters in Step 2 or 4, press or . 311 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Fax Parameter Table No. Parameter Setting Number Setting 01 CONTRAST *1 Normal 2 Lighter 3 Darker 02 RESOLUTION 04 STAMP 05 06 MEMORY DIALING METHOD 07 08 09 HEADER PRINT HEADER FORMAT RCV’D TIME PRINT 10 12 KEY/BUZZER VOLUME COMM. JOURNAL 1 Standard Setting the home position for the RESOLUTION. Fine 3 S-Fine 4 Halftone (Fine) 5 Halftone (S-Fine) *1 Off 2 On 1 Off *2 On 1 Pulse *2 Tone *1 Inside 2 Outside 3 No Print *1 Logo, ID Selecting the header format. No. 2 From To *1 Invalid 2 Valid 1 Off *2 Soft 3 Loud 1 Off *3 AUTO JOURNAL PRINT Setting the home position of the CONTRAST key. *2 2 13 Comments Setting the home position of the STAMP key. To select the stamp function when document is stored in memory, see Fax Parameter No. 28. Setting the home position for memory transmission/ copy mode. (This setting can be temporarily changed by using F8-9 (MEMORY XMT)) Selecting the dialing method. Selecting the printing position of the header. Inside : Inside TX copy area. Outside : Outside TX copy area. No Print: Header is not printed. Selecting whether the machine prints the received date & time, remote ID, percentage of reduction and page number on the bottom of each received page. Selecting the volume of the Key/Buzzer tone. Selecting the home position of printout mode for COMM. Journal Off/Always/INC. Always Off : Does not print Inc. Only Always : Always prints Inc. Only: Prints only when communication has failed. 1 Invalid *2 Valid Selecting whether the machine prints the journal automatically after every 32 transactions. 312 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. Parameter Setting Number Setting 17 RECEIVE MODE 1 TEL *2 FAX 3 FAX/TEL SW. 4 TAM/FAX *1 20 sec. 2 30 sec. 3 40 sec. 4 50 sec. 1 1 sec. --- --- 60 60 sec. 18 OPERATOR CALL TIMER 19 20 22 23 24 25 OGM LENGTH (TAM I/F) SILENT DETECTION (TAM I/F) 1 Invalid *2 Valid SUBSTITUTE RCV 1 Invalid *2 Valid 1 A4 *2 Letter 3 Legal 1 Fixed *2 Auto 70 70% ---- ---- *100 100% RECORDING PAPER SIZE PRINT REDUCTION REDUCTION RATIO 26 POLLING PASSWORD 27 POLLED FILE SAVE 28 STAMP AT MEM. XMT (----) *1 Invalid 2 Valid 1 Invalid *2 Valid Comments Setting the receive mode. Selecting the length of time that your machine signals (rings) for an incoming voice call in Fax/Tel Auto Switching mode. Setting for the OGM length of your TAM from 1 to 60 seconds. The machine will not start to detect SILENCE until the time setting has lapsed. (Default = 20 sec.) Selecting the Silent Detection Mode. Selecting whether the machine receives to memory when recording paper runs out, toner runs out or recording paper is jammed. Setting the recording paper size installed in your machine. Selecting print reduction mode. Fixed:Reduce received document according to setting of Parameter No. 25. Auto :Reduce received document according to the length of received documents. Selecting fixed print reduction ratio from 70% to 100%. This parameter functions only when fixed print reduction is selected on Fax Parameter No. 24. Setting a 4-digit password for secured polling. Selecting whether the machine retains the polled document in memory even after the document is polled once. Selecting whether the machine stamps the original documents when storing the documents into memory. (Depending on the Stamp setting on the Control Panel) 313 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Setting Number Setting Comments INCOMPLETE FILE SAVE *1 Invalid 2 Valid Selecting whether the machine retains the document in memory if the document is not successfully transmitted. COPY REDUCTION z 1 Manual *2 Auto ENERGY SAVER MODE 1 Off 2 EnergySaver DAYLIGHT TIME 1 Invalid *2 Valid *1 Invalid 2 Valid Select a ring pattern for automatic answering. 1: A Standard ring pattern. 2: B Double ring pattern. 3: C Triple ring pattern (Short-Short-Long). 4: D All other triple ring patterns, except the type C described above. No. Parameter 31 32 34 35 36 RING PATTERN DETECT (DRD) (See Note 2) Selecting whether the machine performs the copy reduction ratio automatically or manually. Manual :The machine will prompt you for the Zoom ratio (100% to 70%) when making copies. Auto :The machine will automatically determine the reduction ratio according to the length of the original document. To reduce the power consumption in standby, select either Energy-Saver or Sleep mode and specify the Delay Time (1 to 120 minutes) for the machine to enter into the selected mode. The Delay Timer setting is only available in the Energy-Saver or Sleep Modes. Off : The unit will remain in standby mode and consume more energy than when in Energy-Saver or Sleep modes. Energy-Saver Mode: Saves energy by consuming less power than when in standby mode by turning off the fuser unit after the specified time. Selecting whether the clock adjusts for Daylight Saving Time automatically. The built-in clock will advance 1 hour at 2:00 am on the first Sunday in April and fallback 1 hour at 2:00 am on the last Sunday in October. All ring patterns. 37 RCV TO MEMORY (----) Enter a 4-digit password used to print out the received document in memory by using F8-5 (RCV TO MEMORY). When F8-5 is set to On, this parameter will not be shown on the LCD display. 38 ACCESS CODE (----) Enter a 4-digit Access Code to secure the machine from unauthorized use. 39 PIN CODE ACCESS *1 None 2 Suffix Selecting the access method (Prefix or Suffix) to dial a number with PIN Code. 3 Prefix *1 Invalid 2 Valid 42 CONF. POLLED FILE SAVE Selecting whether the machine saves the confidential polled file even after the file is polled once. 314 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. Parameter Setting Number Setting Comments 43 PASSWORD-XMT *1 Off 2 On Setting a 4-digit XMT-Password and selecting whether the machine performs and checks the XMT-Password of the receiving station when transmitting. *1 Off 2 On *1 Invalid 2 Valid 1 Invalid *2 Valid *1 Invalid 2 Valid 44 PASSWORD-RCV 46 SELECT RCV 47 REMOTE RECEPTION 51 REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC Setting a 4-digit RCV-Password and selecting whether the machine performs and checks the RCV-Password of the transmitting station when receiving. Selecting whether the machine performs selective reception. Selecting whether or not the machine accepts remote reception command. Selecting whether or not the machine accepts to update the firmware or Remote Diagnostics from the remote station. Please ask your Panasonic Authorized Dealer for details. 52 DIAGNOSTIC PASSWORD (----) Setting the password for Remote Diagnostic Mode. Please ask your Panasonic Authorized Dealer for details. 53 SUB-ADDRESS PASSWORD (----) Setting a 20-digit password for secured sub-address communication. 54 FAX FORWARD 56 COVER SHEET 58 LANGUAGE *1 Invalid 2 Valid *1 Off 2 On *1 2 65 PRINT COLLATION 82 QUICK MEMORY XMT Selecting whether the machine performs Forwarding to the specified destination. Fax Setting the home position of the Cover Sheet parameter in the Select Mode. A-English Selecting the language to be shown on the display C-French and reports. 3 Spanish 1 Invalid *2 Valid 1 Invalid *2 Valid Selecting whether the machine prints out documents in sequence. Selecting whether the machine performs Quick Memory Transmission. Invalid: Stores all documents into memory first before dialing the telephone number. Valid : Starts dialing the telephone number immediately after storing the first page. 99 MEMORY SIZE (Flash Memory) - - Displays the amount of base and optional memory installed. (Base Memory + Optional Memory) 140 LAN RELAY XMT REQUEST *1 Invalid 2 Valid Selecting whether the machine performs LAN Relay XMT Request. RELAY XMT (a.k.a. LAN RELAY STATION on UF-770i) 1 Invalid *2 Valid 142 Selecting whether the machine accepts and performs G3 relayed transmission. (Relay Station Functions) 315 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. Parameter 143 RELAY XMT REPORT Setting Number Setting 1 Off *2 3 Setting how the COMM. Journal for relayed Always transmission is sent to the originator. Off : Don’t send. Inc. Only Always : Always send. Inc. Only : Send only if communication has failed. 144 EMAIL CHARACTER SET *2 145 SENDER SELECTION *1 Invalid 2 Valid POP TIMER ---- 0 to 60 min. Setting the time interval for the machine to check for email on the POP Server. (0 = Does not check the POP Server for email.) 1 Invalid *2 Valid Selecting whether the machine automatically downloads an email from the POP Server. 1 Invalid *2 Valid DELETE POP ERR EMAIL *1 Invalid 2 Valid IFAX RETURN RECEIPT 1 Invalid *2 Valid 1 All *2 Subject/ From/To 3 Off SUB-ADDRESS ROUTING *1 Invalid 2 Valid TSI ROUTING *1 Invalid 2 Valid 146 1 Comments Japanese Selecting the Character Set when receiving or sending English email text. 3 147 148 149 AUTO POP RCV DELETE POP RCV EMAIL 150 151 EMAIL HEADER FORMAT 152 153 154 ROUTING HEADER FORMAT *1 PRINT ROUTED DOCUMENT *1 155 156 PRINT FORWARDED DOCUMENT 2 2 *1 2 Selecting a pre-programmed sender’s name and email address before each transmission. Selecting whether the email will be deleted automatically after retrieval from the POP Server. Selecting whether to delete the email that includes an incompatible file attachment from the POP Server. Selecting whether to send a return receipt when receiving from another Panasonic Internet Fax. Selecting the header information to print when an email is received. (Normally used for Troubleshooting. It shows the path of the email transmission before arriving at your machine.) Selecting whether to automatically route a received fax or email using ITU-T Sub-address. Selecting whether to route a received fax to a telephone number or an email address preprogrammed in Phone Book using the originating fax’s Numeric ID (TSI frame information). Originator Selecting the type of email header to be included in the "From" field of each routed faxes. Relay Station Originator : The originating fax machine’s TSI will appear in the "From" field of the routed email. Relay Station: The routing station’s email address will appear in the "From" field of the routed email. Inc. Only Selecting whether a received fax to be routed is Always always printed or only when the routing operation fails. Inc. Only Selecting whether a memory received fax or email to Always be forwarded is always printed or only when forwarding is incomplete. 316 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 Setting Number Setting Comments TRANSACTION JOURNAL *1 Invalid 2 Valid Selecting whether the machine sends a transaction journal to the pre-programmed email address. PC REMOTE UPDATE *1 Invalid 2 Valid SUBJECT LINE ENTRY *1 Invalid 2 Valid DEFAULT DOMAIN 1 Invalid *2 Valid 1 Invalid *2 Valid 1 None *2 English 3 English+ Japanese *1 Invalid 2 Valid No. Parameter 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 DNS SERVER TIFF VIEWER URL ROUTING HEADER IFAX XMT HEADER (Email only) *1 DHCP CLIENT 1 Invalid *2 Valid *1 Invalid 2 Valid *1 Invalid 2 Valid 169 170 SMTP AUTHENTICATION (See Note 3) 171 POP BEFORE SMTP (See Note 3) 2 Selecting whether the machine will accept commands from an email application, to: (a) Program the Internet Parameters (b) Program the Auto Dialer (c) Allow retrieval of the Journal Selecting whether the "Subject" line programmed during each transmission. can be Selecting whether the machine accepts to insert the Default Domain when entering Manual Number Dialing. Selecting whether to use the DNS Server for the Internet communication. Selecting whether to include the URL address in the email message body. Selecting whether to add the Header Print information of the Routing Station on the top edge of each routed pages. Included Selecting whether to include the header when sending a document to an addressee in the same Domain as Not Included specified in the Default Domain parameter. (This is useful when using the machine to scan documents back to your PC) Note: When sending to a Domain other than as specified in the Default Domain parameter, the header will be included regardless of the selection. Select whether the machine would automatically acquire the Network Parameters from the DHCP Server. (Such as IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP Address, etc.) Note:If you change the setting of this parameter, the machine will reboot automaticaly. Selecting whether your SMTP Server (Outgoing Mail Server) requires authentication with a user name and password before accepting email. After change the setting to "Valid", you can enter the user name and password assigned to your machine by your network administrator. Selecting whether your SMTP Server (Outgoing Mail Server) requires authentication by first retrieving incoming email from the POP Server before accepting email. (Please consult with your network administrator). 317 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 No. Parameter Setting Number Setting Comments 172 DIRECT IFAX XMT *1 Invalid 2 Valid Selecting whether to be prompted during One-Touch/ ABBR registration if the station you are programming is to receive Internet Fax directly without going through a Mail Server. 1 Off *2 On *1 Invalid 2 Valid 173 174 DELIVERY NOTICE (HOME) APOP AUTHENTICATION (See Note 3) NOTE Setting the home position of requesting a Delivery Notice (MDN) on the Function Select Mode (F8-2) when sending an email/Internet Fax. The delivery notice received will not be printed. It is used to update the communication status on the Transaction Journal of the original email sent. Selecting whether to use APOP authentication method when retrieving email/Internet Fax from the POP Server. (This setting is server dependant; consult with your network administrator). 1.Setting number marked with an asterisk (*) indicates the factory standard setting. 2.This parameter supports an optional telephone service "Distinctive Ring Service" provided by your local telephone company. It allows up to 4 different telephone numbers to be assigned on a single telephone line with a distinctive ring for each telephone number. By selecting the appropriate ring pattern associated with the telephone number assigned for your fax machine. It can differentiate and answer the incoming call on the fax number. All other calls on the other telephone numbers will not be answered. This optional service from your local phone company is also called Custom Ringing, Distinctive Ringing, Ident-a-call, Ident-a-ring, Personalized Ringing, RingMaster, RingMate, Selective Ringing, Smart Ring or something similar. Check with your local telephone company on the availability of this service in your area. 3."Valid" can be selected when the SMTP server or the POP server support the capabilities. 318 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 9 Options and Supplies 9.1 Options and Supplies Please contact your local Panasonic dealer for availability. 1. Options Order No. Picture Description UE-403176 Handset Kit UE-409070 250 Sheet Letter / Legal / A4 Size Paper Cassette with the Feeder Unit UE-410046 UE-410047 Expansion Flash Memory Card, 2 MB Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB UE-410048 Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB 2. Supplies Order No. DZHT000027 (For USA / Canada) Picture Description Verification Stamp DZHT000004 UG-5510 (For USA / Canada) Toner Cartridge UG-3350 Note: For some destinations, the Handset Kit may not be available because of the destination’s regulation or specification. 319 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 9.2 Installing Optional 250 Sheet Paper Cassette (UE-409070) 1. Contents Qty. 1 Description 250 Sheet Paper Cassette with Feeder Unit Part No. UE-409070 Remarks 2. Installation Note: Install this Feeder Unit as the 2nd Feeder Unit only. (3) (2) (5) (1) (4) (1) Disconnect the Telephone Line Cable (1009) and the Power Cord (1008). (2) Remove the Recording Paper Tray Assembly (1107). (3) Open the Printer Cover (106). (4) Remove the Paper Cassette from the machine. (5) Remove the Toner Cartridge from the machine. (6) Remove 1 Screw (B1). (7) Remove the Connector Access Cover (114). (7) (6) (9) (10) (8) (8) Place the machine on its Rear side over a clean cloth to prevent damaging the Rear Cover. (9) Break off the protective tab on the machine. (10) Remove 4 Screws from the top of the 250 Sheet Paper Cassette. (11) Remove the shipping tape and place the CST2SNS2 Harness (1035) to the outside of the cassette. (11) 320 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 (12) Insert the 250 Sheet Paper Cassette into the machine. (12) (15) (13)x4 (16) (13) Secure the 250 Sheet Paper Cassette with the 4 screws removed in step 10. (14) Place the machine upright. (15) Connect the CST2-SNS2 Harness (1035) into the Connector CN66 on the SC PC Board. (16) Re-install the Connector Access Cover (114). (17) Re-install the Recording Paper Tray Assembly (1107), Paper Cassettes and the Toner Cartridge. (18) Re-connect the Telephone Line Cable (1109) and the Power Cord (1108). (19) Print some pages from the Optional Paper Cassette to confirm its operation. 321 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 9.3 Installing Handset Kit (UE-403176) 1. Contents Qty. 1 1 1 Description Part No. DZDU000031 DZFN000066 DZML000436 Handset Handset Cord Cradle Assembly Remarks 2. Installation (1) Disconnect the Power Cord (1108) and the Telephone Line Cable (1109). (2) Break off the protective tab on the TEL/HANDSET Jack on the machine. (2) (1) (1) (3) (4) (3) Hook the projections of the Cradle Assembly into the holes on the Left Cover. (4) Connect the Cradle Cable (123) to the TEL/HANDSET Jack on the rear of the machine. (5) Connect the Handset Cable (121). (6) Re-connect the Telephone Line Cable (1109) and the Power Cord (1108). (5) 322 Edition 1.0 APR 2002 DX-600/800 10 Schematic Diagram 10.1. General Circuit Diagram A B C D CN50 1 3 10 11 3 GND LCD 5 pPNLRD LANC 1 nWAKUP 1 8 pPNLRST Sensors 9 pBZCLK 10 nBPNT PNL1 11 DZEP000648 51 1 *LAN LEDV 52 2 GND LEDV 53 3 GND GND 54 4 GND A16 55 5 D15 A15 56 6 D7 A14 57 7 D14 A13 2 (B8B-PH-K-M) RD+ 58 8 D6 A12 59 9 D13 A11 3 4 N.C. 5 RD7 N.C 60 8 1 N.C 5 6 10 D5 6 A10 N.C 7 61 11 D12 A9 62 12 D4 A21 63 13 Vcc *WE 64 14 Vcc *RESET 65 15 D11 A20 66 16 D3 A19 67 17 D10 A18 8 2 Keys A-Point Keypad B-Point One-touch keys B4 Width Program keys S-Door e.t.c CN30 CN7 TD- 4 CN201 1-50 TD+ 3 RJ-45 LMP202C10-FR LANB DZEP000649 2 FR 1 FCK1 (S8B-PH-K-M) 2 FCK2 3 FSG 4 AGND CCD 5 +5V 6 DOS DZYC0539C 7 OS 8 FBX8703 2 Link Activity +24V 1 68 18 D2 A17 69 19 D9 A8 70 20 D1 A7 71 21 D8 A6 72 22 D0 A5 73 23 *OE A4 CN1 nLEDON 2 (B2B-PH-K-M) CN202 3 CN5 (B4B-PH-K-S) (B4B-PH-K-S) 1 2 3 4 RX- 5 RX+ 6 TX- MTnB 1 2 4 CN200 74 24 GND A3 75 25 GND A2 76 26 Vdd A1 77 27 Vdd Vdd 78 28 A15 Vdd 79 29 A14 *CE 80 30 A13 D0 81 31 A12 D1 3 MTpB TRANSMIT MTnA MOTOR MTpA 4 FBX8705 FG (42S1S22D6NB) 7 TX+ 8 FBX8751 * OPTION Handset Kit CN28 CN23 CN90 (B2(3)B-PH-K-S) 3 1 82 32 A11 CN12 83 33 A10 D3 84 34 A9 D4 3 35 A8 D5 7 MEMORY CARD 36 537 FROM 39 56 57 41 58 59 25 43 60 61 45 62 46 63 (68-pins) 47 64 (A32-068-020-BGBB) 65 31 49 66 51 68 D10 ID0 GND 40 A3 5 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 6 1 (Not Mounted) (T2) 3 (T1) 4 EXT.TEL D10 91 41 A2 D11 92 42 A1 D12 93 43 Vdd D13 94 44 Vdd D14 95 45 AEN D15 96 46 ARDY *WR 97 47 GND *RD 6 CN20 (T2) 1 (L2(T)) 3 (L1(R)) 4 USA, CAN:DZEP000499 5 Others (T1) 98 48 GND RESET 99 49 GND INTR0 100 50 GND GND LINE * SRU :DZEP000168 6 4 nWEL RDY/nBSY MJR nWEH +5V 17 34 CN91 6 D2 A22 16 33 DZEP000168 A15 D1 A21 15 32 50 67 DZEP000499 A14 D0 A20 D9 (AI) A9 A1 D8 14 (AIS) 5 6 CN21 A10 A19 13 30 48 4 3 SRU 2 A2 ID1 29 (N.C.) 3 4 A12 A3 A18 12 HLIN2 (HLIN2) 3 5 nOE A4 ID2 28 5 (AIS) (B6B-PH-K-S) A11 RSV 11 2 nCE1 RSV N.C 27 11 4 2 5 A5 RSV 10 D9 90 A6 N.C 9 26 44 D8 A4 pHKOF (T1) (N.C.) HLIN1 D7 nCE2 nMB4 A5 39 pCTON 3 (HLIN1) 2 A7 N.C 8 38 89 pCMLD 2 (T2) 1 D6 D15 7 24 42 88 GND CN29 1 FBX8702 A8 RSV 8 D5 D14 6 23 D7 +5VP (N.C.) 3 D4 A13 N.C 22 40 *:Option D6 A6 9 A16 D13 5 A7 37 10 A17 D12 N.C 21 55 36 87 D3 D11 N.C 4 86 GND nCD 3 20 1-17 18-34 N.C GND 197 38 2MB,4MB,8MB N.C 2 37 54 GND 1 18 +24V 1 Shield 35-51 52-68 35 52 L1(R) (B8(11-2.4.5)B-PH-K-S) 6 85 (AI) 1 D2 CN18 (31 5027 068 030 833) L2(T) MIC(+) 2 LINK RCV(+) 3 1 +5V RCV(-) 2 (A4:LNR304713 / B4:LNR314707) (S8B-PH-K-S) ACTIVITY MIC(-) 1 LED ARRAY FBX8701 CN97 (B3B-PH-K-S) 4 16 7 DZEP000616 (Solenoid:TDS-SY5-21M) 15 14 6 nPWSAVE FBX8704 51-100 13 4 pPNLSD (3-pins) (B3B-PH-K-S) 12 GND nSTAMPON CN93 11 V5 Stamp 2 (FX8C-100P-SV2) (FX8C-100S-SV5) 1 10 +5V CN96 CN3 +24V 9 +5V 9 8 GND 8 7 DB7 (B11B-PH-K-M) 6 DB6 (B2B-PH-K-M) 7 5 DB5 CN14 4 DB4 6 (2-pins) +5VP 3 DB3 5 2 DB2 4 CN9 2 DB1 1 2 FAP8706 (S50C26C-1) DZEP000712 1 GND (S11B-PH-K-M) DB0 3 pSPKOT Speaker 1 +5V E 2 GND R/W 1 RS SC +5V GND DZEP000635 (Continued on the next page) Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 323 Drawing Name General Circuit Diagram (1/2) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D DZEA000057 (120V) DZEA000058 (230V) CN6 FBX8700 (B11B-PH-K-S) +24V 1 3 GND 4 4 GND 5 SC +3.3V 6 +5V 7 -5V 8 DZEP000712 (B16B-PH-K-S) 2 GND 3 1 CN103 1 +24V 2 +5VP 9 Voltage 7 Power 8 Supply 1 10 nSSR 11 Low 6 9 nMPOFF 10 5 11 12 13 CN53 14 (B10B-PH-K-S) +24VM 15 nDRCK 16 1 2 4 5 1 nHSYNC 2 Tranfer 7 FBX8728 Laser Unit T T T CN202 FG 6 GND 7 200M 5 nVIDEO 6 Supply (B7B-PH-K-S) 4 nLDON 5 Power nTR0 3 GND 4 Voltage nCR1 2 L+5V 3 LSU CN68 nS/H 1 (B7B-PH-K-S) High nCRCK 3 Toner Development Cartridge CN201 D D Charge 1 C (B5P-VH) C (White) 3 2 2 nPMCK 1 1 nPMRY 2 (179123-5) CN69 DZEP000620A 4 +24VM 5 Fuser Unit 3 MGND 4 (173981-5) 2 nPMON 3 5 CN102 5 Thermal Fuse Termostat ACI (B2P3-VH-M) FBX8729 HEAT1 1 (Green) Black/L (LPA1602F02) Black Fuser Lamp CN101 HEAT2 1 White/N MMpA 1 (173979-6) CN52 CN54 CN118 2 4 Motor 5 TH2 2 N AC Line E (White) 3 Thermistor WHITE/N INLET (PHR-2) 3 MMpB FBX8738 4 +24VM 5 MMnB 6 (B2B-PH-K-S) (B6B-PH-K-S) White L (B2P3-VH) FBX8720 2 MMnA 3 Main 1 +24VM TH1 1 BLACK/L Not Mounted FBX8739 6 FAP8708 1 (55SPM25D7NA2) 2 DZEP000427A FG CN86 SNS4 (B2B-PH-K-S) CN56 3 CN58 (B2B-PH-K-S) +24VM Pick Up (B6B-PH-K-M) 1 nCCHK1 1 GND 2 nADF1 2 Solenoid nRSEN 3 4 +5V 5 (TDS-F08G-21B) nESEN 6 CN87 1 (B6B-PH-K-M) CN85 3 nCCHK1 1 (B4B-PH-K-M) 4 2 5 3 6 4 GND nRSEN LDRE Paper Exit Sensor FBX8713 (B4B-PH-K-M) 1 SNS1 2 3 (B3B-PH-K-M) FAP8715 CN57 (B2(3)PH-K-M) ILS 1 +24V nCCHK1 1 GND 2 Timing Sensor CNA1003 1 LDSC1 3 USA, CAN:FBX8727 Others 3 Printer Cover Sensor +24VD DZEP000377 CN82 CN80 4 CNA1003 DZEP000650 3 DZEP000376 CN81 2 (B3B-PH-K-M) 1 SNS2 2 3 Casette Detect Sensor CNA1003 :FAP8727 3 DZEP000408 CN83 FBX8717 CN59 CN73 (B5B-PH-K-M) nPCHK1 1 LDSP1 2 (S2(3)B-PH-K-S) GND 3 TONER 4 +5V 5 6 (B5B-PH-K-M) 1 SNS3 2 3 No Paper Sensor 4 5 1 CNA1003 FAP8725 2 CN66 3 (B7B-PH-K-M) 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN84 7 GND TONER +5V FAP8724 1 Toner Sensor 2 3 (S-3B-ZR-SM3A-TF) (B3B-PH-K-S) (TS0505ANA-83CE) DZEP000406 1 2 3 5 6 nOP nCCHK2 pADF2 nPCHK2 4 DZFAP8730 7 CN82 (B7B-PH-K-M) Pick-Up Solenoid +5V * 2nd Cassette Option GND 4 +24VM 4 +24VM nADF2 CST2 1 CN74 CN70 (B3B-PH-K-M) 2 1 2 3 CN71 (B2B-PH-K-S) No Paper Sensor nCCHK2 GND SNCMN DZEP000377 (B3B-PH-K-M) 1 SNS2 2 3 DZFAP8732 Casette Detect Sensor CNA1003 CNA1003 Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 324 Drawing Name General Circuit Diagram (2/2) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.2. SC PC Board A B C D nSDRAS 002:A4;003:A2 nSDRAS 002:A4;003:A2 nSDCAS 002:A3;003:A1 SDCLK 003:A1 SDCKE 002:D2;003:A1;004:A1;014:B2 A[23-1] nSDCAS SDCLK 50MHz SDCKE nREVCK 007:C4 nLTCK 007:C4 A[23] A[22] A[21] A[20] A[19] A[18] A[17] A[16] A[15] A[14] A[13] A[11] A[12] A[8] A[10] A[7] A[9] A[6] A[5] A[4] A[1] D[15-0] A[3] 002:A2;003:A1;004:A3;014:A2 A[2] +3.3V C4 R12 47K R13 47K 0 47K 0 R11 0 47K 0 47K R10 0 1 R9 16V 22uF 2 +3.3V 1 1 R474 R473 R472 R471 R470 C5 25V 0.1uF C6 25V 0.1uF C7 25V 0.1uF C8 14 D[3] 2 D[4] 13 D[5] 12 D[6] 11 10 D[7] D[8] 7 D[9] 6 D[10] 5 D[11] 4 D[12] 3 D[13] 2 D[14] 1 D[15] 144 JW15 JW14 JW13 JW78 +3.3V 25V D2/PDL2 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K R22 R23 R24 R18 R25 R26 R27 R28 R30 R31 R32 R33 R34 R35 R36 R37 AVDD/AVREF R20 GND 71 61 134 CVDD 124 98 VDD VDD 81 VDD VDD 47 VDD 112 37 VDD VDD 27 VDD VDD 8 108 109 110 D1/PDL1 PCD2/*LBE/*SDCAS D0/PDL0 PCD1/SDCLK 114 111 PAH9/A25 PAH8/A24 PAH7/A23 115 0.1uF 116 PAH6/A22 117 JW77 JW76 118 PAH5/A21 119 120 PAH4/A20 PAH3/A19 121 PAH2/A18 PAH1/A17 PAH0/A16 122 126 123 PAL15/A15 127 PAL14/A14 128 129 PAL13/A13 PAL11/A11 PAL12/A12 130 JW11 JW10 131 132 PAL10/A10 PAL8/A8 PAL9/A9 133 JW9 JW8 JW7 PAL7/A7 PAL6/A6 136 JW6 JW4 JW5 137 138 139 PAL5/A5 PAL4/A4 PAL3/A3 JW2 JW3 140 141 25V 0.1uF PCD3/*UBE/*SDRAS 15 D[2] 25V 0.1uF C9 C10 PCD0/SDCKE 16 PAL2/A2 TL2 143 17 D[1] PAL1/A1 PAL0/A0 D[0] 142 JW1 JW12 GND 107 nFROMP PCS0/*CS0 106 nSDRAM PCS2/*CS2/*IOWR PCS3/*CS3/*RAS3 PCS7/*CS7 D9/PDL9 97 JW17 96 JW18 PCT4/*RD 94 D12/PDL12 PCM0/*WAIT 90 *1 005:A3 nRESET 003:C1;004:A2;014:B2 Mounts at the technical trial production. 18 *2 JP1 R21 GND Mounts when DSW1 is not mounted 47K 58 47K 57 CVSS AVSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS pMVOL0 64 72 135 125 113 99 82 48 38 9 28 70 69 68 67 66 3 TL4 +3.3V nRESOUT 0 002:A4 *1 Serial I/F GND 1 4 2 3 *1 B7B-PH-K-S D1 3 1 1 CN98 Vpp MA704 7.8V KHS02C GND 47K GND 65 5.000MHz*10 56 C3 005:A3 36 47K nBPNT pMVOL1 +3.3V DSW1 PROGRAM MODE NORMAL MODE 1-4 PIN OFF ON 2-3 PIN ON OFF R17 002:D4;012:B4 005:A3 35 47K CID0 007:C4 pMVOL2 34 R16 014:C3 011:A1 pBRING 33 47K CID1 011:A1 26 R14 014:C3 011:A2 pCR1 DSW1 CKSEL=0:PLL MODE R390 CID2 pCR0 pTR0 R15 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1 nCDOPT 004:C1 *1 GND 014:C3 nFRPRST 25 GND AT-49-5.000MHz 014:C3 005:D2 24 *2 VSS 2 MODE0 VSS X1 TXD0/SO0/P40 X2 RXD0/SI0/P41 CKSEL *SCK0/P42 63 50.0V 5.000MHz 27pF 47K 47K 47K 47K C2 50.0V 1 +3.3V 62 330 X1 MODE1 TL34 R7 PWM1/P10 MODE2_VPP/MODE2 55 0.022uF GND 27pF GND *RESET TXD1/SO1/P43 60 RXD1/SI1/P44 59 TL33 25.0V 54 1K C1 47K R6 012:B4 nMDMRST 23 +3.3V *SCK1/P45 16.0V 0.1uF 47K P77/ANI7 53 C263 TI010/INTP010/P11 (pRBT) P76/ANI6 SO2/INTP130/P30 nLANOPT INTP011/P12 P75/ANI5 52 014:A2 144-pins P74/ANI4 SI2/INTP131/P31 73 TO01/P13 *SCK2/INTP132/P32 74 P73/ANI3 TXD2/INTP133/P33 75 PWM0/P00 51 nOP P72/ANI2 50 nESEN 012:B4 TI000/INTP000/P01 49 012:B1 76 INTP001/P02 P71/ANI1 46 nRSEN TO00/P03 V850E/MA1 P70/ANI0 TI020/INTP020/P21 012:B1 77 CPU 45 +24LVL 011:C4 pPNLRST 83 P52/TO03 (nPDOR2) INTP021/P22 TONER P51/INTP031 *DMAAK1/PBD1 44 012:B3 nPWOFF 84 RXD2/INTP120/P34 79 013:A3 85 *DMAAK2/PBD2 *DMAAK0/PBD0 002:A3 USBENB 86 PCM5/SELFREF P50/INTP030/TI030 (n3CRST) INTP121/P35 1K 78 009:B2 PCM4/*REFRQ *DMARQ0/INTP100/P04 INTP122/P36 80 GND R78 3 32 002:A3 nHLDRQ 87 uPD703105GJ(mask) TO02/P23 BATIN THERM PCM3/*HLDRQ *DMARQ1/INTP101/P05 43 012:B1 011:A3 47K 002:A3 nHLDAK 88 *DMARQ2/INTP102/P06 ADTRG/INTP123/P37 31 R8 014:A4 SYSCLK BLM11A121S PCM2/*HLDAK uPD703105GJ *TC0/INTP110/P24 nPCHK1 50MHz NF1 89 *DMARQ3/INTP103/P07 42 nCCHK1 012:B3 014:B4 LANRDY 91 *TC1/INTP111/P25 012:B1 pLANRST 92 (PWSVCNCL) 30 002:A4;003:A2 TL3 PCT6/*OE PCT7/*BCYST D15/PDL15 NMI/P20 TL1 002:D1;003:A1;004:A1;014:A3 nWE 93 (nG3RST) D14/PDL14 *DMAAK3/PBD3 nRD JW19 PCT5/*WE D13/PDL13 uPD70F3107GJ-UEN(flash) 29 2 95 D11/PDL11 47K +3.3V 002:D1 nWRU_DQMU002:A3;003:A1;014:B4 PCT1/*UCAS/*UWR/UDQM 47K 22 R80 nI_O2 nWRL_DQML 002:A3;003:A1;004:C1;014:B2 PCT0/*LCAS/*LWR/LDQM D10/PDL10 *TC2/INTP112/P26 pADF1 002:D1;003:C3 D8/PDL8 *TC3/INTP113/P27 010:C4 21 002:D1 nFROMI 100 D7/PDL7 41 nPCHK2 nI_O1 101 PCS6/*CS6/*RAS6 40 nCCHK2 012:B4 002:D1;003:A3 102 PCS5/*CS5/*IORD D6/PDL6 39 012:B4 002:D1;004:C2 nSRAM PCS4/*CS4/*RAS4 D5/PDL5 R19 20 014:B3 nFROMC 103 D4/PDL4 R29 19 nFROML 104 D3/PDL3 PCM1/CLKOUT/BUSCLK LANINT 002:D1;003:A1 105 IC1 014:B4 003:C1 JW16 PCS1/*CS1/*RAS1 2 4 CN98 nRESET CN98 DBGTXD CN98 DBGRXD CN98 DBGCLK 4 3 4 5 005:B4 nBZHIGH 005:A3 nMNTON 005:B2 nMDMINT 6 CN98 BOOT GND CN98 GND 7 002:D4 nPRTINT PNLTXD 012:B3 002:D4 nSCNINT PNLRXD 012:B3 002:D3 nPCINT PNLCLK 012:B2 002:A3 nSYSINT Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 325 GND Drawing Name SC PC Board (1/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D +3.3V for USB i/f AT-49-8.9806MHz 50.0V TC7SU04FU 2 R73 2 50V C20 X5 1M 15.975MHz LAL02VD2R2K GND C29 R71 50V 1 Not Mounted GND 5pF C21 75 50V R65 C26 0.01uF 0 0 GND 47K 47K 25V D3 001:D2;003:A1 nRD 001:D2;003:A1;004:A1;014:A3 A[23-1] 001:A1;003:A1;004:A1;014:B2 pMPOW 009:A3 PLSD 006:D1;007:C3 pSTAMP 010:C2 nHKOF 006:D4 pCMLD 006:B4;007:C3 R55 47K D[14] 81 R56 47K D[15] 80 A[1] A[3] A[4] A[5] A[6] A[7] A[8] A[9] A[10] A[2] A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 *RD *CS1 *CS3 *CS4 *CS5 *CS6 *CS7 FR *SHB *LEDON TST0 TST1 CVDD(2.5V) CVDD(2.5V) 106 R492 0 157 R493 0 181 R494 0 C32 50V D14 0.01uF D15 005:B2 nMODEM PLLGND *IO1 CPOUT1(PWM) 42 014:A4 nLANC GND 15 *IO0 41 *IO2 16 R74 5.1K 17 R77 VCOIN1(PWM) 43 TL5 44 TL6 GND *IO4 IC3 *IO5 DZAC000273 158 45 TL7 BOFST0/ID4 46 TL8 *IO6 BOFST1/ID5 *IO7 BOFST2/ID6 SCANENB BOFST3/ID7 *WR BOFST4/ID8 47 TL9 115 013:A3 SCANENB 36 003:A3;005:B2 nWR 107 001:D2;003:A1;004:C1;014:B2 nWRL_DQML SHINE *WRL/*DQML 108 001:D2;003:A1;014:B4nWRU_DQMU *WRU/*DQMU DATA8 76 001:D3 nHLDAK DATA7 *HLDAK 77 001:A1;003:A1 SDCLK 001:D2 SYSCLK DATA6 SDCLK (System Handling and Image Navigation Engine) 103 SYSCLK DATA5 35 3 003:A3;005:B2 nUBE *UBE DATA4 *LBE DATA3 34 +3.3V 003:A3;005:B2 nLBE DATA2 37 001:D3 nHLDRQ 004:C2 nDIRD 004:D2 nDIRV 208-pins *HLDRQ 100 47K 001:A4 IC2 *SELIN DIR1 *AUTFD nSYSINT *SYSINT *STRBE +3.3V 1K R59 DBT1R 010:A2 IOBR1 010:A2 IOBR0 010:A2 PHBR 4 159 VOUT 2 IN OUT GND 1 TL13 160 TL14 161 TL15 GND 162 TL16 GND DATA[8-1] 203 DATA[8] 202 DATA[7] 201 DATA[6] 200 DATA[5] 198 DATA[4] 197 DATA[3] 196 DATA[2] 195 DATA[1] 204 nSELIN nAUTFD 013:A2 nSTRBE 013:A2 pPERR 013:A2 206 207 4 nACK pBUSY 013:A1 nFAULT 013:A1 8 pSELECT 013:A1 pBUSOUT 013:A1 nPCINT 001:A4 9 119 155 *INIT MMP3 MMP2 013:A2 nCTON 006:D3 MMP0 010:A3 MMP1 010:A4 13 12 nINIT 140 *CTON R72 VSCD[7] VSCD[0] VSCD[1] VSCD[2] VSCD[3] VSCD[4] 013:A2 5 6 MMP2 VSCD[5] 013:A2 205 GND VSCD[6] 013:A1 3 *PCINT MMP1/MMON MMP0/*MMRDY 11 10 *HSYNC *PMRY 163 30 *ZCRS VDO/LDCTL 31 19 S/H PMON *PMCK 23 21 20 DRCK/HVBCNT 29 28 SSR LDON *PRTINT 24 118 *BPNT VREQ 133 MCLK *SCNINT 122 117 127 CKVG/DREQ1 MACK/*MOE 141 136 *VSDA 138 *VSEN *VSCK *SYNC 137 139 VGSD0/ID3 135 149 VGSD1/ID2 VGSD2/ID1 148 VGSD4/*DACK0 VGSD5/*DACK1 VGSD3/ID0 147 146 145 PHAR 142 IOAR1 DATIR IOAR0 187 189 190 188 IOBR0 PHBR 191 192 IOBR1 DBTIR 193 194 VSS CVSS VSS VSS 3 14 25 26 VSS 27 VSS 38 58 VSS CVSS VSS 78 VSS VSS 79 87 95 VSS VSS 102 VSS VSS 110 120 CVSS VSS 130 131 VSS VSS 132 153 VSS 165 VSS VSS VSS 1 *WE 144 VGSD6/DREQ0 3 114 R58 1 BUSOUT *SDCAS TL12 LM1117MPX-2.5 3 47K nWE 010:A2 *SDRAS 113 174 nSDCAS 112 182 nSDRAS 001:D2;003:A2 *FAULT 186 nRESOUT R57 R40 001:D3 MA786 3 MA786 D3 D2 47K GND 001:A1;003:A2 BUSY SELECT GND 001:A1;003:A2 *ACK +3.3V 47K =44.9ms *RESET *RESOUT 47K td=0.69*6.5M*C12 129 39 0.1uF C13 R3112Q29C 47K *PWRDWN 25V GND PERR 32 R39 OUT 199 R38 DATA1 DIR0 101 116 7.5 C34 *IO3 IC6 +5V C35 nFRIP 25V 004:C1 +2.5V PLLVDD(2.5V) 1 82 16V D[13] D12 22uF 47K CVDD(2.5V) D11 0 C42 R54 D10 0 R491 2 83 0 R490 1 84 D[12] R489 53 22uF D[11] 47K 2 18 2 47K R53 CVDD(2.5V) PLLVDD(2.5V) 0.1uF R52 PT6/ID15 D8 D9 16V 85 C41 88 D[10] 173 25V 89 D[9] 47K 2 172 C40 D[8] 47K R51 PT5/ID14 0.1uF 47K R50 PT4/ID13 25V R49 D5 D6 0.1uF 90 25V 91 D[7] TL35 171 C39 D[6] 47K 170 25V 47K R48 PT3/ID12 0.1uF R47 D4 C38 92 40 0.01uF nSDRAM NCU I/F : positive logic (pPLSD) TL11 25V 93 D[5] DAA I/F : negative logic (nPLSD) 169 0.1uF D[4] 47K D13 25V 001:D2;004:C2 168 0.1uF 47K R46 PT2/ID11 D7 0.1uF 001:D2;003:A3 nFROMC 167 PT0/ID9 PT1/ID10 C37 R45 RS/RB/*CISCLK D2 2 VCOIN0(SYNC) PLLGND SCNCLK CPOUT0(SYNC) XIN0 CLK48 XIN1 XOUT0 XOUT1 DP DM VDD3 VDD3 VDD3 VDD3 VDD3 VDD3 VDD3 VDD3 VDD3 VDD3 VDD3 96 VDD3 D[3] VDD3 47K VDD3 97 R44 VDD3 98 D[2] VDD3 99 D[1] 47K VDD3 D[0] 47K R43 VDD3 47K R42 VDD3 R41 D1 50V 001:D2 nSRAM D[15-0] D0 C11 001:D2;003:C3 48 49 50 51 54 55 56 59 A[11] 62 61 63 60 A[12] A[18] A[20] A[21] A[19] 64 65 66 67 A[22] A[23] 69 68 75 111 74 109 73 72 TL10 134 71 126 125 124 R67 123 128 178 179 183 164 184 154 175 176 151 152 7 1 33 52 22 57 70 86 94 104 105 121 143 150 156 166 177 185 208 R66 25V R64 C23 GND C12 nFROMI 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 4 001:D2 nI_O1 GND 20K C22 0.1uF 2 008:D1 nI_O2 25V 180 C19 4 008:D1 FR 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF VDD 008:D4 RS 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF C18 CD L1 25V 0.1uF C17 3 3pF 25.0V GND R482 0 R481 R480 0 0 R479 0 R478 0 R477 R476 0 C16 1 50.0V 1 C30 R75 47K 2 C31 0 1000pF X4 1M C36 R76 pLEDON GND 001:A1;003:A1;004:A3;014:A2 5pF +3.3V R475 R511 47K DM 47K 013:A4 50V 0 R512 DP 50.0V 1 C27 GND 013:A4 R70 1 3 NC 4.7K 27pF 1 C28 2 IC4 50V R62 0.01uF 50.0V 4 0 R63 C25 7.9312MHz 5 R68 1M X3 GND 1 3 NC AT-49-15.975MHz R510 TC7SU04FU 27pF 4.7K 27pF C33 3pF IC5 +3.3V 50.0V 2 R60 1 1 AT-49-7.9312MHz C24 R61 8.9806MHz 50.0V AT-49-48.000MHz(8pF) 2 0 1M X2 27pF C15 5 4 0.01uF C14 GND 010:A3 MMP3 010:A4 pHSYNC 009:C3 nPMRY 009:C2 010:A2 DAT1R 010:A1 IOAR1 pS_H 009:C4 010:A1 IOAR0 pVDO pPMON 009:C1 009:C3 pPMCK 009:C2 010:A1 PHAR 008:B4 nSYNC pSSRA 011:A3 008:D3 nVSCK pLDON 009:C3 008:D4 nVSEN nPRTINT 001:A4 008:D3 nVSDA 008:B4 MACK DRCK 4 011:A2 nBPNT 001:A4;012:B4 nVREQ 004:C1 JW20 008:D4 VSCD[7-0] Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 326 MCLK 004:C1 nSCNINT 001:A4 Drawing Name SC PC Board (2/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A D D[15-0] A[23-1] +3.3V nRD JW46 +3.3V 0 C47 1 37 25V 001:D3;004:A2;014:B2 nRESET 0.1uF +3.3V 13 0 0 47 +3.3V nSDRAM 001:D2;002:A4 nWE 001:A1;002:A4 nSDCAS 001:A1;002:A4 nSDRAS 15 19 LDQM 0.0 16 *CS *RAS DQ3 DQ2 64Mbit 128Mbit A[1] 23 A[2] 24 A[3] 25 A[4] 26 A[5] 29 A[6] 30 A[7] 31 A[8] 32 A[9] 33 BANK1 A22 A23 A[10] 34 BANK0 A21 A22 A[11] 22 A[12] 64Mbit 128Mbit JP2 35 A[23] *1 JP2 A[22] *1 JP3 JP3 *1 JP4 *1 JP5 JP4 A[21] JP5 0 21 # 20 A1 A2 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 DQ10 A4 DQ11 A5 DQ12 A6 DQ13 A7 DQ14 A8 DQ15 A9 R497 2 4 RA1 5 RA1 7 RA1 8 RA1 10 RA2 11 RA2 13 RA2 42 RA2 44 RA3 45 RA3 47 RA3 48 RA3 50 RA4 51 RA4 53 RA4 RA4 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 8 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 8 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 8 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 8 D[0] 33 33 # D[1] D[2] 33 D[3] 33 D[4] 33 D[5] WORK,PAGE MEMORY GND SDRAM 64M A10/AP 25 A[2] 24 A[3] 23 A[4] 22 A[5] 21 A[6] 20 A[7] 19 A[8] 18 A[9] 8 33 D[7] A[10] 7 33 D[8] A[11] 6 33 D[9] A[12] 5 33 D[10] A[13] 4 33 D[11] A[14] 3 33 D[12] A[15] 2 33 D[13] A[16] 1 33 D[14] A[17] 48 33 D[15] A[18] 17 A[19] 16 A[20] 9 33 # A[21] JP6 10 0 52 NC *BYTE IC9 90.0ns # 1 *CE *OE *WE RY/BY *RESET NC DQ0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 A8 DQ10 A9 DQ11 A10 DQ12 A11 DQ13 A12 DQ14 A13 DQ15 A14 15 TL17 29 D[0] 31 D[1] 33 D[2] 35 D[3] 38 D[4] 40 D[5] 42 D[6] 44 D[7] PROGRAM FROM 16M 30 D[8] 32 D[9] 34 D[10] 36 D[11] 39 D[12] 41 D[13] 43 D[14] 45 D[15] 2 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 NC GND GND 46 VSS FROM JP6 JP25 0 :Mounted :Not Mounted 0 D[6] VSSQ 46 BA0 14 A[1] 12 A11 BA1 JP25 33 6 0 0 DQ4 A3 28 *1:table A0 41 2 DQ0 DQ1 40 NC 1K 0.1uF 17 *WE 18 *CAS 36 SDRAM 49 UDQM R82 0.1uF C46 25V VDDQ 43 CKE 12 25V 54 001:D2;002:D1 C45 9 25.0V 39 3 IC7 0.022uF SDCKE 001:D2;002:A3;014:B4nWRU_DQMU 28 11 C48 37 CLK HY57V641620HGT-P 001:A1 38 SDCLK R496 VDD 001:A1;002:A3 26 nFROMP 27 14 1 001:D2 VCC 25V R495 0.1uF 001:D2;002:A3;004:C1;014:B2 nWRL_DQML C50 001:A1;002:D2;004:A1;014:B2 001:D2;002:D1;004:A1;014:A3 C MBM29LV160B-90PFTN-SFKS 001:A1;002:A2;004:A3;014:A2 B 16Mbit MBM29LV160B 32Mbit MBM29DL32XBD Not Mounted Mounted 27 GND GND 004:C4;005:B1;014:B4 DD[15-0] 004:C1;005:B1;014:A4;014:C1 AD[15-1] +3.3V JW47 37 # 3 41 17 nWR 002:A3;005:B2 nUBE 002:A3;005:B2 nLBE 40 39 *CE *OE *WE 4 4 A[3] 3 A[4] 2 A[5] 1 A[6] 44 A[7] 43 A[8] 42 A[9] 27 A[10] 26 A[11] 25 A[12] 24 A[13] 21 A[14] 20 A[15] 19 A[16] 18 nRDD 28 11 12 IC8 R83 15.0ns *BHE I/O1 *BLE I/O3 A0 A1 I/O4 CY7C1021V33-15ZCT A[2] 5 004:C2;005:B2;014:B4 26 VCC VCC I/O2 A[1] nFROMI 1K # 25.0V 002:A3;005:B2 nSRAM 001:D2;002:D1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 A7 I/O11 A8 I/O12 A9 I/O13 A10 I/O14 A11 I/O15 A12 I/O16 A13 A14 A15 N.C. N.C. N.C. VSS 12 7 D[0] 8 D[1] 9 D[2] 10 D[3] 13 D[4] 14 D[5] 15 D[6] 16 D[7] 29 D[8] 30 D[9] 31 D[10] 32 D[11] 35 D[12] 36 D[13] 37 D[14] 38 D[15] 0.022uF 001:D2;002:D1 6 47 +3.3V 0.1uF 33 11 for CODEC SRAM 1M GND 22 14 0 AD[1] 25 AD[2] 24 AD[3] 23 AD[4] 22 AD[5] 21 AD[6] 20 AD[7] 19 AD[8] 18 AD[9] 8 AD[10] 7 AD[11] 6 AD[12] 5 AD[13] 4 AD[14] 3 AD[15] 2 A[16] 1 A[17] 48 A[18] 17 A[19] 16 A[20] 9 23 28 JP26 A[21] # JP7 10 0 VCC NC *BYTE IC10 90.0ns *OE *WE RY/BY *RESET NC DQ0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 A8 DQ10 A9 DQ11 A10 DQ12 A11 DQ13 A12 DQ14 A13 DQ15 A14 15 TL18 29 DD[0] 31 DD[1] 33 DD[2] 35 DD[3] 38 DD[4] 40 DD[5] 42 DD[6] 44 DD[7] 30 DD[8] 32 DD[9] 34 DD[10] 36 DD[11] 39 DD[12] 41 DD[13] 43 DD[14] 45 DD[15] IMAGE FROM 16M A15 A16 4 A17 A18 A19 NC GND GND 46 # Not mounted FROM JP7 JP26 GND 16Mbit MBM29LV160B 32Mbit MBM29DL32XBD Not Mounted Mounted 27 GND Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 3 *CE VSS 34 25V 25V 0.1uF C44 25V C49 # C43 13 C51 # MBM29LV160B-90PFTN-SFKS JW28 0.1uF +3.3V 327 Drawing Name SC PC Board (3/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A 001:A1;002:D2;003:A1;014:B2 A[23-1] 001:D2;002:D1;003:A1;014:A3 nRD B C D AV[2-1] 1 008:D4 IC16 *G A[1] AD[15-1] 2 003:C3;005:B1;014:A4;014:C1 A[2] 1 1 2 A[2] 4 A[3] 6 A[4] 8 +3.3V Y1 A2 Y2 A3 Y3 A4 Y4 4 IC14 *G A[1] A1 6 A1 Y1 A2 Y2 A3 Y3 A4 Y4 18 AD[1] 16 AD[2] 18 AV[1] 16 AV[2] 14 8 nRDV 008:D4;014:C3 nWLV 008:D4;014:C3 12 001:D2;002:A3;003:A1;014:B2 nWRL_DQML TC74VHCT244FT 14 AD[3] 12 AD[4] To: 19 1 FRIP5 IC16 *G 11 20 IC14 002:A2 nFRIP 001:D3 nFRPRST 002:D4 MCLK IC14 002:D4 nVREQ A[5] 11 A[6] 13 A[7] 15 A[8] 17 9 AD[5] 7 AD[6] Y3 Y4 5 AD[7] 3 AD[8] 25V 1 Y2 A[11] 6 A[12] 8 A3 Y3 A4 Y4 AD[10] 16 14 AD[11] 12 AD[12] TC74VHC244FT 25V A2 4 5 VCC GND IC42 TC7S04FU 3 2 A[17] 4 A[18] 6 A[19] 8 20 19 TC7S04FU VCC GND GND IC15 A[13] 11 A1 A[14] 13 A[15] 15 A2 GND 9 AD[13] 7 AD[14] 5 AD[15] A3 Y3 Y4 Y2 A3 Y3 18 AV[16] 16 AV[17] 14 AV[18] 12 AV[19] nFROMCV 014:C3 pRESET 012:B2 Y4 To: TC74VHCT244FT FROM CARD 19 IC17 *G GND 11 A[21] 13 A[22] 15 nFROMC A1 Y1 A2 Y2 A3 Y3 A4 Y4 9 AV[20] 7 AV[21] 5 AV[22] 2 3 TC74VHCT244FT Y2 A4 Y1 A2 17 001:D2;002:D1 Y1 17 A1 IC17 10 *G 3 014:C1 TC74VHCT244FT A[20] IC11 AV[22-15] IC17 A4 5 VCC GND A[16] +5V 0.1uF Y1 25.0V A1 008:D4 *G 10 C58 GND AD[9] 18 0.1uF 2 008:B4 nVREQV 3 TC74VHCT244FT GND +3.3V A[9] +3.3V 0.1uF IC16 LAN CONTROLLER IC15 *G 10 Y4 20 VCC GND FROM CARD 1 TC74VHC244FT A[10] C52 0.1uF MODEM 20 C277 25V IMAGE FROM C56 0.1uF To: IC15 A4 TC74VHCT244FT TC74VHC244FT GND 008:B4 MCLKV +5V +3.3V VCCL 008:D4 nFRPRSTV 5 Y2 A3 A4 nFRIPV 7 Y2 Y3 17 Y1 A2 GND Y1 A2 A3 15 A1 2 A1 *G 10 9 13 19 TC74VHC244FT 25V GND C57 VCCL C55 0.1uF 25V TC74VHC244FT 3 nRDD GND 003:C3;005:B2;014:B4 TC74VHC244FT GND 2 001:D3;003:C1;014:B2 4 nRESET +3.3V 1 IC11 +5V R498 R499 TC7S04FU 0 NC 002:A3 nDIRV 002:A3 nDIRD 2 C59 4 1 0.1uF IC42 0 25V C61 1 25V 0.1uF 24 TC7S04FU VCCA GND NC 22 001:A1;002:A2;003:A1;014:A2 D[15-0] VCCB 23 NC *G D[15-0] GND IC18 2 To: *DIR(BA) FRIP5 FROM CARD TC74LVXC3245FS D[0] 4 19 *G RA13 To: 1 D[1] MODEM LAN CONTROLLER 1 8 RA5 3 D[1] D[2] RA5 D[3] +3.3V RA5 VCCL C53 0.1uF 25V D[4] GND RA6 D[5] 20 IC12 TC74VHC245FT RA6 D[6] RA6 D[7] 3 6 4 5 1 8 2 7 3 6 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 4 5 A1 33 33 33 33 33 33 16 15 14 13 12 11 33 1 3 B2 A2 B3 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 A6 B6 B7 A7 B8 A8 4 5 6 7 8 9 RA9 RA9 RA10 RA10 RA10 3 4 5 1 8 2 7 3 6 DD[1] 4 5 RA10 33 33 33 RA14 D[5] DD[2] D[6] DD[3] D[7] RA14 RA14 10 DD[5] 33 3 6 2 7 1 8 4 5 3 2 1 6 7 8 RA14 DD[4] 33 9 8 7 5 4 3 20 4 33 B2 A3 B3 19 18 6 B4 A4 33 7 33 17 A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 16 8 33 33 A2 5 33 15 9 10 14 A8 33 11 B8 3 4 5 7 8 9 6 6 1 1 19 *G +3.3V C60 12 D[8] 1 6 D[9] RA7 D[10] RA7 D[11] RA7 D[12] RA8 D[13] RA8 D[14] RA8 D[15] RA8 9 8 7 5 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 RA18 DV[2] DV[3] 33 DV[4] 33 DV[6] 33 DV[7] 33 +5V 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 1 RA27 6 0 4 3 2 B1 33 2 7 3 6 GND 25V 4 5 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 33 33 33 33 33 33 16 15 14 13 12 11 B2 A2 A3 B4 A4 A5 A6 B7 A7 B8 A8 TC74VHC245FT 4 5 6 7 8 9 RA11 RA11 RA11 RA12 RA12 RA12 RA12 DD[8] 8 D[8] 1 33 2 7 3 6 4 5 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 33 33 33 33 33 33 DD[9] D[9] DD[10] D[10] DD[11] D[11] DD[12] D[12] DD[13] D[13] DD[14] D[14] DD[15] D[15] RA15 RA15 RA15 RA16 RA16 RA16 33 RA16 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 3 8 RA15 33 2 7 3 6 4 5 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 21 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 20 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 5 19 6 18 17 7 10K 6 1 1 6 16 A6 B6 9 15 A7 B7 10 14 A8 B8 GND 2 12 8 2 7 RA19 RA19 3 6 RA19 RA20 RA20 RA20 RA20 DV[8] 33 4 5 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 DV[9] 33 DV[10] 33 DV[11] 33 DV[12] 33 RA24 RA26 GND DV[14] 33 DV[15] 33 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 13 10K GND 6 1 1 6 RA28 003:C3;005:B1;014:B4 DV[15-0] GND 008:D4;014:C1 GND Model DX-600 / 800 328 4 DV[13] 33 10K DD[15-0] GND B5 A5 8 1 RA19 B1 A1 4 11 RA22 GND 23 NC TC74LVXC3245FS 1 RA11 B3 B6 VCCB IC19 *G 2 3 B5 0.1uF *DIR(BA) A1 17 33 24 VCCA 1 10K Edition 1.0 3 DV[5] 33 2 C62 1 22 GND 2 18 8 RA7 TC74VHC245FT 10 5 1 33 13 25V 0.1uF RA23 IC13 20 IC13 4 DV[1] 33 R501 *DIR[BA] 25V RA18 6 GND +3.3V 1 GND 0.1uF RA18 0 GND C54 RA18 7 3 10K RA25 10 GND 4 RA17 2 10K RA21 GND RA17 10K 2 10K 10 RA17 DD[7] 33 GND GND 33 GND 2 R500 VCCL DV[0] 8 RA17 B1 A1 DD[6] 33 TC74VHC245FT 2 RA13 D[4] 7 6 RA13 D[3] 33 2 RA9 DD[0] 8 RA9 17 7 RA6 10 B1 33 2 RA5 2 RA13 D[2] IC12 18 33 1 IMAGE FROM *DIR[BA] D[0] 21 3 5 Drawing Name SC PC Board (4/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 B C D R159 for Intel Endian mode: Host UB ----- Modem LB Host LB ----- Modem UB GND 3.3K 0 0 R487 0 R486 0 R485 R484 53 REGOUT2 AD[6] 93 DPA06/A06 MINTEST 46 AD[7] 94 DPA07/A07 INTEST 48 AD[8] 95 DPA08/A08 MODE0 49 AD[9] 96 DPA09/A09 MODE1 50 AD[10] 98 DPA10/A10 *RESET 41 AD[11] 100 DPA11/A11 IC22 MN195006 DD[8] 2 DPD00/D00 EYECLK 57 DD[9] 4 DPD01/D01 EYEDAT 58 DD[10] 6 DPD02/D02 59 ASPCLK 60 ATXD 63 DD[14] 12 DPD06/D06 ARXD 61 DD[15] 13 DPD07/D07 BBITCLK 65 DD[0] 14 DPD08/D08 BSPCLK 66 DD[1] 16 DPD09/D09 BTXD 69 DD[2] 18 DPD10/D10 BRXD 67 IC21 *G3 DD[3] 19 DPD11/D11 DD[4] 20 DPD12/D12 GPIO0/A12 76 A[0] DD[5] 22 DPD13/D13 GPIO1/A13 DD[6] 24 DPD14/D14 GPIO2/A14 DD[7] 25 DPD15/D15 GPIO3/A15 81 GPIO4/A16 82 GPIO5/A17 83 14 MAGND 4 Z BLM11A601S R172 VEE -5VA 007:D1 C92 50V TP1 nMDMRST 001:D3 1000pF TP2 GND EYE PATTERN MONITOR CHECK LAND ABITCLK 006:D2;007:D2 ASPCLK 006:D2;007:D2 ATXD 006:D2;007:D2 ARXD 006:D2;007:D2 +3.3V TL21 R175 47K 77 R176 47K 79 R177 47K *1 R178 47K *1 R179 47K 3 nCOMRST 006:D2;007:D2 ID_0 ID_1 AFE_CLASS0 AFE_CLASS1 VSS VSS DAA I/F NCU I/F JP15 5 11 VSS VSS VSS 17 23 VSS *1:table # # JP16 R173 R178 R174 25V R158 2 6.8K 0.022uF 2 R160 3 33K 6 R161 47K 5 +5V 0V A + 7 R163 R164 1K 10K 1 +5V MAGND 0V -5V A class AMP to Speaker B2B-PH-K-M C91 1 BA4558F 10k Q3 Q5 2SD1992A 340 1 IC20 - 3 DTC114EKA +5V 3 1 16V 2 47uF Q4 2SB1321A 340 2 CN9 pSPKOT CN9 GND 4 25V 25V :Mounted :Not Mounted 47K # 0.1uF 220K MAGND 1K C93 C79 2200pF C77 50V R156 Gi:30min nBZHIGH R180 R162 0V 0.047uF 001:A4 AFECLK R179 3V -3V 10K 006:D2 GND C78 4 *1 25V MAGND R155 2 DAACLK 24.576MHz GND 0.1uF pBZCLK *1 0 0 GND 7 TC74HC4053AF 012:B4 50.0V 5pF GND JP15 47K # JP16 R165 Z1 C95 NF2 *1 *1 15 Y 24.576MHz 47K X 2 9 52 REGOUT1 21 42 62 45 ABITCLK Z0 C76 VDD2 VDD2 VDD2 VDD2 VDD2 86 VDD2 VDD3 97 3 15 VDD3 VDD3 30 44 VDD3 VDDREG 54 55 68 VDD3 VDDREG AVDD 51 SCANNT DPD05/D05 C 3 LON DPA05/A05 DPD04/D04 Y1 5 DPA04/A04 91 DPD03/D03 Y0 9 001:D3 pMVOL2 90 AD[5] 8 B 1 CNT AD[4] 7 X1 2 DPA03/A03 37 VSS 13 43 10 X0 10 CLKOUT 40 6.8K MAGND 001:D3 pMVOL1 DPA02/A02 88 VSS 2.2K 12 87 AD[3] VSS 2.2K R154 AD[2] 100K R151 38 50.0V 8pF TL20 R157 R148 39 CXOUT AVSS 11 001:D3 pMVOL0 CXIN DPA01/A01 DD[13] 47K R152 001:A4 nMNTON 3 DPA00 85 DD[12] MAGND 6 84 AD[1] DD[11] for Intel Endian mode: D-BUS Up Side Down +3.3V MAGND MAGND 28 47 C75 50V 1 1uF 2 R145 R142 GA -3V TDO 56 0V 100K 16 VCC IC21 GND TC74HC4053AF 8 C94 *UB VSS 470K AT-49-24.576MHz (7pF) 47K 71 35 R146 25V 2 3V 0.1uF R150 47K R171 TDI VSS R153 MA152A +3.3VA +5VA 1 MAGND 47K 2SC2412K Q1 560 1 2 2SC2412K Q2 560 1 C73 3 100K MAGND D4 3 R170 *LB 64 BA4558F 47K 47K 31 29 70 IC20 TCK 47K R169 72 VSS 1 A *DPWR/*WR 73 R168 TL19 X6 1 nLBE 33 47K 002:A3;003:A3 TMS 47K nUBE 36 *DPRD/*RD 74 R174 002:A3;003:A3 27 PLLON *DPCS/*CS 47K 0V DBGMOD 75 47K R173 nWR +3.3V R167 R166 002:A3;003:A3 3 R144 +5VA + +5V -5V 6800pF 3 nRDD 6.8K 1K 150K 2200pF C65 2 R143 003:C3;004:C2;014:B4 R149 10V 1uF 100K 50V 0 MAGND 50V R140 C70 C68 R513 nMODEM 26, 29, 31, 33-pins: for Emulation board JTAG I/F 26 T3IRQ/*IRQ VSS 330K -1.5V nMDMINT 1 *DBGREQ 1 80 0V GND 89 50V 100pF 001:A4 002:A2 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF GND 34 0.1uF DD[15-0] 16V 2 C87 C90 MAGND R147 2 003:C3;004:C4;014:B4 47uF C86 1 C89 99 1.5V AOUT AD[15-1] +1.8V C88 VDD3 IC20 BA4558F 4 C74 C80 003:C3;004:C1;014:A4;014:C1 MAGND C71 006:D3;007:C3 C82 C81 A 25V MAGND MAGND C83 -5VA 0.1uF C72 C69 0.1uF 25V 16V 2 C67 1 0.1uF C66 47uF 25V 1 2 47uF C64 16V 8 V+ +5VA V- -5VA R141 R139 +5VA 25V 10 10 1 16V 1 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF 78 47uF C85 2 C84 92 -5V VDD3 +5V R483 0 +3.3V 32 A 2 -5V GND 10k 1 # Not Mounted MAGND Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 329 Drawing Name SC PC Board (5/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 B C # 33K C107 250.0V 1800pF # 50.0V 1000pF 250V 0.022uF 0 R217 47 SCLK 3 R218 47 VD 4 DCT 2 13 VA IGND# 3 12 GND# 11 C1A SDO 5 R219 47 10 M1 SDI 6 R220 47 FC/*RGDT 7 9 AOUT *RESET R221 1K VREG2 6 VREG QB 7 QE 8 D10 5.6 2 1 MMSZ5232B D11 50V 0.1uF 50V 0.1uF C111 0.1W 10 D12 RNG2 R211 DE0807B151K-KH 250V # C121 150pF 250V # C120 150pF # 8 4 IGND 1 C125 GND 005:D3;007:D2 ARXD 005:D3;007:D2 ATXD 005:D3;007:D2 2 nCOMRST 005:D3;007:D2 50V AOUT 005:A2;007:C3 nCTON 002:D4 2200pF JP17 0 Line side 005:D3;007:D2 ABITCLK DSP side C272 # 005:D2 ASPCLK 50.0V 2200pF 3 DAACLK Si3021 C126 REF 10 DE0807B151K-KH C118 250V 150pF C119 250V 150pF # 0.1W 10 10.0V 11 R207 1uF 5 2 4 3 MA157A C1B 1 D13 5.6 2 1 MMSZ5232B C123 REXT REXT2 RNG1 50V 10pF 13 12 Si3015-KS C109 R199 C101 JP28 2 C122 R200 M0 *FSYNC 2 10K 50V 0.68uF 215 QE2 50V 0.01uF 50V 0.01uF RX 1 *RGDT/FSD C114 FILT 14 *OFHK MCLK 14 C113 15 IC24 16 15 +3.3V 50.0V 1000pF 50.0V 1000pF 78.7 402 1% R197 R196 50V 1800pF 50V 1800pF C100 K PTZ43A 150 A R194 # GND # C98 C271 16V 0.22uF C110 50V 0.1uF FILT2 002:D2;007:C3 +3.3V 1 C270 C102 16 PLSD (nPLSD) +5V 1 GND 2.2K IC23 # C269 100 C103 Q7 2SC3588 R503 150pF 3 MA157A 0.1W R195 50V 1uF 100 R189 # C108 R198 50V 1000pF C267 2 R184 250mW 1% 250mW 1% 4.87K 250mW 1% 4.87K 4.87K 1 2 3 MA152A 3 D31 1 Q9 2SD2136-R 3 R187 3 100 1 1 MA157A 2 Not Mounted DE0807B151K-KH C116 250V 150pF 250V # C117 25.0V 5 R188 1 +3.3V 0.1uF CN18 C268 N.C. (No Pin) 4 R206 9 D9 CN18 DE1007E222M-KH C273 2200pF DE1007E222M-KH C274 2200pF N.C. (No Pin) Not Mounted 2.2K 2 D24 3 K D8 1SR154-400 C99 50V 0.01uF R183 120K A A 1SR154-400 K D6 C97 R182 # 0.1W 10 DSSA-P3100SB 3 100K 1 A D7 1SR154-400 K K 1SR154-400 R79 # 250mW 1% 4.87K R185 250mW 1% 4.87K R186 250mW 1% 4.87K CN18 0.022uF Q6 2SA1400K CN18 L1(R) 250V TL36 N.C. (No Pin) C266 # VA1 2 1000pF 2 CN18 # 1 10M L2(T) # A R181 to MJR PCB C96 D5 10M 1000pF 4 2 Q8 2SC3588 R205 B8(11-C1)B-PH-K-S 15K # R204 # R203 0 33K R193 250V 1000pF R505 R192 C106 2 22uF 1 C128 50V 1000pF # Not mounted the parts of this circuit as for S3000i. 10.0V 1uF 16V # 1 15K C127 Not Mounted R202 47K 250V 1000pF R504 C105 DAA Circuit 50V 250.0V 1800pF 1000pF # C104 C265 33K 250V 33K R191 D 1000pF R190 C112 A 3 +24V +5VP CN18 GND CN18 6 +3.3V +5VP 7 *4:Mounted as for S3000i. 8 10K CN18 R208 +24V 3 GND R209 2 pCTON DTC114EKA 1000pF pCTON CN18 10 Q10 10k GND 1 Gi:30min *4 +3.3V R213 GND 007:C3 pHKOF *4 *5 50V 2.2K GND 3 2 10k DTC114EKA 11 22K CN18 R210 pHKOF R201 4 22K Q11 10k 1 Gi:30min *5 002:D2 nWAKUP 012:B3 4 GND *4 *5 nHKOF +5VP 10K 007:C3 3 10k R215 002:D2;007:C3 1000pF 50.0V 2.2K *4 pCMLD C124 C264 100 10K R502 R212 9 50V CN18 C115 pCMLD 1000pF GND 3 GND 2 2SC2412K Q12 560 1 * :Mounted when having the function, the hook-off detection of the handset in the saving energy mode. R214 22K GND Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 330 Drawing Name SC PC Board (6/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D 16.0V +3.3VA 7 B + C140 10V V11 6 R242 3.3 5 4.3K 31 7 C + 27 IC26 LMV324MT 28 R249 22K 13 R248 MAGND 22K 12 MAGND - 30 14 C + 29 10 2 AVDD 1 11 12 13 14 22 23 24 NC NC 5 MCM AUXIN- XTALOUT XTALIN/MCLK IN+ IN- SCLK IC27 FS DIN STLC7550TQF7 DOUT + R245 +5VA MAGND C138 25.0V 0.1uF B C139 8 V+ V- 2% 10K VCM VCM 0.1uF -5VA MAGND 20 pHSDT CN8 pEAKD CN8 pPLSD CN8 pTCKD CN8 pCMLD CN8 2 4 R224 5 C130 7 100 50.0V 6 100 50.0V 21 6 0 R257 0 45 R258 0 15 2012 CN17 pATELDC CN17 pBTEL CN17 pBTELDC CN17 pBRING CN17 2 R234 1K 3 R235 1K 4 R236 1K 5 R237 1K R238 1K R239 1K 6 005:D3;006:D2 ASPCLK 005:D3;006:D2 ATXD 005:D3;006:D2 ARXD 005:D3;006:D2 16 42 18 43 TL23 41 GND R259 17 NC 37 38 46 47 48 # nCOMRST 005:D3;006:D2 1K 2 GND # Not Mounted # JP18 AOUT 005:A2;006:D3 GND pCTON 006:B4 pHKOF 006:B4 PLSD 002:D2;006:D1 pCMLD 002:D2;006:B4 3 pATEL 008:D2 pATELDC 008:D3 pBTEL 008:D3 pBTELDC 008:D3 pBRING 001:D3 nLTCK 001:D1 nREVCK 001:D1 +3.3V 9 50.0V 0.22uF C133 0.1uF # R232 nLTCK C142 R233 CN17 +5V CN17 #:Not Mounted GND CN17 560K 1K C143 1 9 50.0V 1000pF R240 8 +5V GND 560K 7 2012 nREVCK 11 CN17 MAGND 50.0V 4 1000pF GND NCU Interface Circuit Mounted the parts of this circuit,only S3000i. (excluded C155,C156,R252,R253) GND Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 ABITCLK 52806-0920 25.0V CN8 0.22uF 50.0V AGND C132 # 3 25.0V CN8 33 R256 44 005:D2 to NCU PCB (for Japan) pATEL 1 C129 4 GND AGND2 AGND1 DGND 4 AFECLK (pPLSD) R225 C131 +5VP CN8 NC 0 1000pF +24V +5VP *PWRDWN R255 8 GND CN8 *RESET VCM 3 13 1000pF +24V VREFN TL22 0.1uF CN8 TSTD1 VREFP 9 JP24 C136 3 pHKOF TS M/*S 7 8 0 0 CN8 OUT- MAGND AOUT pCTON 32 HC0 25 26 34 35 36 IC25 BA4558F 4 25.0V 0.01uF 50.0V 3 10K C HC1 OUT+ 0.1uF IC26 LMV324MT 2% 40 22.0uF C153 16.0V 1 2 C154 25.0V 1 10V 0.22uF 39 0.1uF C141 C147 2% 10K C150 16.0V 2 1 22.0uF + R231 3 2% 19 22.0uF C151 16.0V 2 1 C152 25.0V IC25 BA4558F 2 2% 10K 10K 0.1uF C149 25.0V B R244 2% - 1 2% 560 2 10K R223 - R251 R246 TX 2 C144 2% 62K 25.0V 0 1 DVDD AUXIN+ IC26 LMV324MT R250 C145 R226 2% 10K 25.0V 560pF 560pF R241 50.0V 390pF R228 25.0V 0.1uF C158 16.0V 1 2 22.0uF VCM C134 C157 Mounted MAGND - VCM R229 IC26 LMV324MT 27K 47K 0.22uF IC25 BA4558F VCM C 25.0V 0.1uF C156 16.0V 2 1 22.0uF 47K - R253 C155 4 V+ R243 1 10K +3.3VA 47K 5 R227 50.0V 1000pF 3.3 R261 10K # C146 +3.3V R252 R260 CN8 10K MAGND D14 HYBSR 6 R222 2 R230 RX 10 +3.3VA IC26 LMV324MT 50.0V 50.0V 2200pF 3 MA157A C135 + R247 1 1 C 10 D15 0.1uF 1000pF C137 C159 12 8 0.1uF C148 25.0V CN8 - 100K HYSIG +3.3V 9 1.8 52806-1320 R254 2 to NCU PCB 3 MA157A +3.3VA 331 Drawing Name SC PC Board (7/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D CCD I/F B8B-PH-K-M LMD[7] FETD2 AGUR2 *VSDA 23 LMA[12] 2 109 LMA[13] 26 108 LMA[14] 1 A8 I/O4 A9 I/O5 A10 I/O6 A11 I/O7 A12 I/O8 A13 A14 GND 4 116 R291 100K R297 100K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 25V 10K 0.1uF LMD[0] LMD[3] LMD[4] 17 LMD[5] 18 LMD[6] 19 LMD[7] 2 14 #:Not Mounted GND R292 100K R293 100K 121 9 R298 100K R299 100K R300 100K 7 6 R294 100K R295 100K 119 007:C3 pATELDC 007:C3 pBTEL 007:C4 pBTELDC 007:C4 pBATCHK 012:B1 +5V R303 8 5 pATEL R301 100K R302 100K 100K pADF2 012:B4 PNLDIR 012:B2 nVSDA 002:A4 nVSCK 002:A4 nVSEN 002:A4 3 GND MCLKV VSCD[7] VSCD[6] VSCD[5] VSCD[4] VSCD[3] DV[7] DV[6] DV[5] DV[4] DV[3] DV[2] DV[1] DV[0] VSCD[0] 004:D1 AV[2] nSYNC VSCD[2] JW52 VSCD[1] +5V 2 nFRPRSTV R289 1K C177 50V 004:D1 nVREQV 004:D1 VSCD[7-0] 002:A4 DV[15-0] 004:D4;014:C1 AV[2-1] 004:D1 pLEDON 002:D1 nFRIPV 004:D1 nWLV 004:D1;014:C3 nRDV 004:D1;014:C3 4 GND MGND #:Not Mounted Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 # 100K 123 118 # LMD[2] 124 LBP7 # 16 125 120 # LMD[1] 126 10 # 15 127 122 # 100K 115 114 R296 # 13 +5V TL31 R290 # 12 106 98 R311 LMA[11] GND I/O3 R310 21 A7 R309 LMA[10] I/O2 R308 24 A6 11 R307 LMA[9] I/O1 R306 LMA[8] TL30 A5 R305 3 25 A4 R304 LMA[7] A2 A3 51 *VSCK *VSEN 50 *VREQ 49 47 VSCD7 VSCD6 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 69 70 71 72 73 VSCD5 LBP6 MAST VSCD4 NCO 100 *WE CY7C199L-15VC A0 IC31 A1 C178 LMA[13] LMA[12] LMA[11] LMA[10] LMA[9] LMA[8] LMA[7] LMA[6] LMA[5] LMA[14] 105 LMA13 LMA14 2 LMA12 102 103 LMA11 LMA10 104 LMA9 96 97 LMA8 LMA7 88 LMA6 LBP5 VSCD3 LBP4 DVSS 6 *OE 1000pF 1 3 10K 2SD592A Q14 340 1 10K LMA[4] DVSS MACK 002:A4 Q16 Gi:30min 2 89 LBP3 LMA[4] +5V VCC R270 50V # C163 50V # 0.22uF 4 90 DVDD AV[1] R276 10K DTC114EKA LMA5 LBP2 VSCD2 LBP1 DVDD JW50 002:A4 3 2 C162 CN1 91 AVSS VSCD1 LBP0 VSCD0 AVDD D7 LAP7 D6 *DACK D5 LAP6 D4 LAP5 OFOUT2 D3 OFHC2 D2 LAP4 7 107 LAP3 VINIG2 8 LMA[3] 5 111 LAP2 FRIP5 AGDR2 #:Not Mounted 1K +24V 1 0.22uF nLEDON CN1 LMA4 LAP1 LMA[2] *CS AGND GND B2B-PH-K-M LMA3 LAP0 AGOUT2 9 4 110 LRA11 FETG2 10 LMA[1] LMA[6] 112 LRA12 +5V +24V 92 94 93 LMA2 LMA1 LMA0 MN86075 L-mode FETS2 0 -5VC to LED ARRAY LMA[3] LMA[2] LMA[1] LMD[6] LMD[5] LMD[4] LMD[3] LMA[0] 95 LMXD7 11 12 LMXD6 LMXD5 13 LMXD4 14 15 LMXD3 LMXD2 16 TL29 LMXD1 79 17 18 SENTIM LMXD0 TL28 81 84 80 FR2 FR1 FSG FCK2 TL26 TL27 82 83 FCK1 43 LRA10 LMA[0] LMA[5] 113 *LROE *LRWE VREFL 3 -5V AGND 44 MN86075 ADIN2 D1 87 ADIN1 74 1 25V 100 0.1uF 117 100K IC30 # JP8 R275 25V 22 99 101 LSID7 VREFH MACK V- R286 0.1uF IC28 LM6172IM 2 8 V+ 4 C165 1 +5V C173 0.1uF 25V 22 D 65 AGND LSID6 D0 R274 C164 64 128 FETS1 75 33 +5VC 22uF C172 16V +5V LSID5 76 10 LSID4 FETD1 A1 30 R281 FETG1 67 MA724 48 +5VF 3 DA1 2 21 +5V LSID3 A0 23 AGOUT1 *CS 24 AGND 0.1uF LSID2 *WR 25 AGND AGUR1 68 26 # 25V LSID1 63 27 AGDR1 61 29 22 3 LMD[2] JW51 28 LSID0 *RD 25V 35 VINIG1 62 31 *LMCE 80/68 36 OFHC1 *RESET R267 AGND 28 20 OFOUT1 *MCLKI 330 IC28 LM6172IM C170 +5V GND *LMOE *LMWE 60 # 38 32 C176 3.9K 100 R265 220K R278 1.5K 2 7 D + 2.2K R287 34 - 5 R269 1 # 37 220K D - 40 150K AGND R283 + 3 22K 41 1 1K 6 150K 39 C175 16V 2 1 22uF DA1 R263 42 R285 AGND 4 8 R277 AGND LM6172IM IC28 50.0V 100pF R273 CN7 1K C168 MA724 3.9K CN7 # 50.0V 2200pF R271 R264 DOS OS 1K C166 TL25 50V 1 R284 # R262 20 ABC 77 C174 2 46 19 1uF -5V 2 TL24 *SYNC 1 78 Q17 *PEAK2 2.7K R280 R266 10K R268 AGND 2SC2412K MCM1 2 85 10K R279 3 66 25V +5VF +5VF 45 R272 Q13 560 1 LMA[0-14] 27 CLAMP 2 2SC2412K +5V 1K AGND LMD[1] GND 2 Q15 560 1 3 7 002:D1 LMD[0-7] IC29 TC7SET08FU LMD[0] 0.1uF C169 1uF 3 5 VDD 3 2SC2412K 5 10K CN7 +5V GND 0.1uF AGND BLM21P300S C167 C160 25V NF3 25V 6 0.1uF C161 10V CN7 002:D1 FR 1 +5V +5V RS +5V *PEAK1 JW80 MCM0 2 TC7SET08FU 86 CN7 JW79 2 680 CN7 FCK1 JW49 3 +3.3V 1 IC29 R288 FCK2 4 4 0.1uF CN7 JW48 0.1uF FSG 1 25V CN7 C171 1 FR 332 Drawing Name SC PC Board (8/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C 1 # D Not Mounted JP9 +24V 1 0.1W +24VM 0 173981-5 5 NF5 10K A C192 SAS-101KD07 47K 001:A3 1 25V 0.1uF C187 1 GND # 4 LSU I/F IC34 TC7SET04FU L+5V 3 B7B-PH-K-S 3 2 pVDO +24V V- 1 6 2 CN68 nVIDEO CN68 nLDON 3 4.7K D16 1 IC33 IC32 BA10393F 5 VCC GND 100 2 TC7SH14FU IC35 TC7SH14FU 1 GND DTC143ZKA GND 002:D4 pS_H 2 3 4 MGND laser R328 4 +3.3V 25V 3 GND IC35 002:D4 pHSYNC CN68 nHSYNC CN68 nS/H CN68 GND CN68 GND 50V 2 TA78M05F OUT GND 0.1uF 2.0W IN 0.1uF 1 1 2.0W 47K SCHMITT INVERTER for Jitter-Free Output 25V 82 L+5V 2 82 3 C186 R322 82 MA152A 22uF C185 16V R321 2.0W C190 1 R320 1 S Q20 2SJ327-Z R330 +24VM 35V G 3 +5V 47K 100pF 10uF 25V 2 pLDON C188 E 002:D4 C184 50V C182 2012 0.22uF C181 50V GND 8 V+ 0.22uF 2012 L+5V Q23 D +24V R314 GND NF4 5 DTC143ZKA 22uF 33K +24VM: High Voltage Power Supply Main Motor Paper Clutch LSU 2 + R315 IC32 BA10393F CN68 BLM11A601S 2 33K 1 E C183 - 3.3K R312 10K 3 R318 pMPOW 1 NC 47K R313 002:D2 4 1 IC34 TC7SET04FU 2 MGND 2 GND 002:D4 3 CN69 GND GND GND nPMCK MGND +5V 5 VCC # # to CPU P73 (5V Pressure Proof) 10K 10K 3 DTC114EKA Q18 +24LVL 1K CN69 polygon 1000pF Q22 R325 1 A K RD8.2S C193 50.0V VA2 4.7K 2 pPMCK 3 VA3 002:D4 R319 47K 2 DTC143ZKA 560.0 R324 +5V GND 100pF GND 3 nPMRY +5V # SAS-101KD07 D18 2 2012 CN69 2012 2 50V GND nPMON # 100 1 Q19 2SA1037AK CN69 2012 R326 nPMRY C189 10K 2012 R323 # C180 50V # R316 2 D17 47K 002:D4 # R327 1.0W 2.7K GND GND INTERLOCK SW (DOOR SENSOR) 50V 47K 0.22uF +3.3V 0.22uF 4.7K K 2 Q21 R516 2.7K 1.0W 2.7K R514 3 33K CN57 +24VD (No Pin) R317 +24VD 2 50V CN57 1 0.22uF N.C. 1 C179 CN57 0.22uF +24V pPMON 1 1.0W +24V 002:D4 560.0 3 DTC114EKA Q51 R515 2 to ILS PCB B2(3)B-PH-K-S 2 C191 22K 3 +24VM # 50V R506 +5V 1 Q52 2SA1037AK 3 RD30S R507 3 DTC143ZKA CN69 BL02RN1-R62 # 2 3 4.7K Q24 4 47K 7 1 GND GND 4 GND 4 #:Not Mounted Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 333 Drawing Name SC PC Board (9/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D +24V #:Not Mounted F0805B1R50FW 1 D19 A F1 +5V K 1 SFPB54 +3.3V 750mA *ST: Mounted with the stamp function. 1 Gi:30min 0.68 10K 5 12 13 400mA GND GND ON # # 8 ON N.C. CN3 nSTANPON 0.22uF 2012 2 2012 ON ON ON C210 50V 2SD874A Q35 340 3 R386 *ST ON *ST 2 1 ON 7 3 50V R384 4 *ST CN3 *ST 2SC2412K Q32 560 1 47uF R375 3 6 R353 10k 2 ON 5 1K R365 2 680 DTC114EKA Q26 1 ON 4 10 10k 2 DBT1R 4 ON 16 SENSR COMPI PLSTM GND I1 3 250mW 470 I0 1 R369 R344 PHASE ON GND ON The rotation direction is CW, as seen from the mounted surface side R371 7 2 25V 820pF 9 1K OB 1 15 25V 820pF 1K R338 3 002:A4 R352 1K R337 OA step 14 C199 IOBR1 8 R336 REF IC37 2 4 3 C201 150 002:A4 10K 10K IOBR0 R348 PHBR 002:A4 R346 002:A4 VA 3 16V 2 +24V 0.22uF 4.7K *ST VB VCC 2 C211 R378 002:D2 pSTAMP TEA3718SDP 6 *ST C209 1 *ST 3 2012 2 11 *ST TM +3.3V 2 *ST R385 R372 1 CN3 K 2) +5V D22 MTpB ( F0805B0R75FW A CN5 B3B-PH-K-S 1 F2 1SR154-400 4) 250mW 1) MTnB ( 150 3) MTpA ( CN5 10K 100K MTnA ( CN5 *ST 47K 50V 0.22uF 1 500mA 2012 0.22uF 0.68 C203 2 680 Gi:30min 2 CN5 to Stamp *ST *FN +24V 47K 1 C204 10k R351 Q25 10K 10K DTC114EKA 47uF C202 35V 2 5 12 13 4 1K R364 50V 10 COMPI PLSTM GND I1 1 10k 2 DAT1R I0 470 3 002:A4 R350 7 R343 4 16 250mW 1K 1 R368 R335 9 SENSR R370 1K REF OA IC36 OB PHASE 3 25V 820pF IOAR1 R334 8 15 25V 820pF IOAR0 002:A4 1K B4B-PH-K-S 14 VA C200 002:A4 R333 to TX MOTOR 3 VB VCC C198 PHAR 11 R347 002:A4 R345 10K 150 TEA3718SDP 6 JP10 0.1W 0 MGND +3.3V +5V +24VM 4) 001:A3 4.7K 3 16V 2 2 47uF 1 47K 1W R376 R367 R366 MGND 1 2SC2412K Q33 560 1 3 2 1 MM COM MGND C208 1 R377 pADF1 50V ( GND 2SD874A Q36 340 3 nADF1 # # 2012 2012 4 MGND 2 COM 4 MGND MGND step 1 MGND #:Not Mounted 1 2 ON ON 2 ON 3 4 Edition 1.0 CN56 0.22uF MMnB C212 CN54 500mA 50V 2) K ( D23 MMpB 1SR154-400 CN54 2 +24VM A 3) 250mW 1) ( 220 ( MMnA CN56 0.22uF 6 MMpA CN54 300mA C213 15 CN54 R387 0.22uF 47K 1 C206 4 MA152A REFB OUT*B GA GB 3 (Com) 1 OUTB 1 2012 6 (Com) +24VM 47K RSB 1 10 +24VM CN54 B2B-PH-K-S 1 10K 2SC2412K Q28 560.0 1 OUTA OUT*A CN54 +24VM R388 4.7K RSA REFA 5 4 12 82 R342 13 IC38 2 R359 MMP3 R357 002:D4 150 3 2 9 1W R358 MGND 2.2K 3 50V 2200pF 1 50V 470pF 50V 470pF MGND 2.2K C196 R363 100mW 4.7K R362 7 50V 2200pF C197 +5V 470 MMP1 C194 002:D4 2SC2412K Q27 560.0 1 C195 3 2 R340 TDA TDB +5V B6B-PH-K-S D21 11 INB to Paper Clutch to MAIN MOTOR 2012 3 2 8 VS R381 14 INA R374 50V 47K R355 47K R354 47K 47K 47K R341 R339 5 0.22uF MMP2 SMA7029M(LF1060) 50V 002:D4 3 K SFPB54 2 MMP0 D20 47uF C205 35V 002:D4 R332 R331 47K A C207 3 4 GND 3 4 ON ON ON ON ON 334 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 SC PC Board (10/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D 1 1 B5B-PH-K-S High Voltage Power Supply I/F 3 4.7K C215 DTC143ZKA Q40 1 4.7K 1 50V C230 3 4 1 22uF 16V 3 3.3K C214 4 R402 DTC143ZKA Q44 47k 1 GA 3 DTC114EKA Q47 Gi:30min 10k 1 GND GND 220K R399 012:B3 nPWSAVE 2 DTC114EKA 3 2 Q45 Gi:30min 10k 2SC2412K Q43 560 1 1 GND 220K 2SC2412K Q42 560 1 10k 3 001:D3 nPWOFF 2 10k DTC114EKA Q46 Gi:30min 10k 1 GND Edition 1.0 nMPOFF 10k 10K 1 16V 4.7K R400 100 CN6 3 2 R395 nSSR 3 2 R403 47uF 7 - GND 50V 2 CN6 GND 6.8K 1 D25 E +3.3V GND 0.01uF CN52 -5V 2 0.1uF 6 2 IC32 + 3 TH2 GND CN6 22K R401 10K 5 GND 0.1uF C276 # 3 R398 3 1 16.0V CN52 10 BA10393F 16.0V 2 MA153A B2B-PH-K-S TH1 C275 +3.3V Thermistor I/F R397 1K GND +5VP C222 MA152A 1 D26 +3.3V R396 CN6 25V 8 11 10K R394 THERM GND 0.1uF C226 -5V 2 pSSRA C225 AGND +3.3V 001:A3 GND CN6 0 5 3 CN6 2 JP14 GND 002:D4 +5V 0.22uF C229 50V 0.1W 0 # GND Gi:50min CN6 25V JP13 DTC143ZKA Q41 47k +3.3V 0.1uF C223 2 7 C227 nDRCK 25V CN53 3 0.1uF 2 Low:10mA Max CN6 25V BL02RN1-R62 C224 Development +5VP 0.22uF 0.22uF 1 +5V NF8 GND CN6 Low Voltage Power Supply I/F 25V 0 Gi:50min DRCK 9 6 0.1W # 1 1 +24V 2012 BL02RN1-R62 JP12 22uF 16V 2 pCR0 47k 002:D4 nCRCK +24V CN6 2012 NF7 CN53 CN6 0.1uF Low:10mA Max GND 2 3 # C228 Electrification 2012 2 0.1uF +3.3V Gi:50min # 2 1 2 22uF 16V DTC143ZKA Q39 C217 pCR1 4.7K 1 2 47k 001:D3 +5VP nCR1 CN53 0 # 25V 001:D3 4 Low:10mA Max 3 C218 Electrification GND C221 Gi:50min 0.1W 2012 0.1uF 1 C216 47k 50V DTC143ZKA Q38 22uF 16V pTR0 4.7K 2 001:D3 2 C219 3 50V nTR0 CN53 1 NF6 JP11 0.22uF Low:10mA Max +24VM CN53 BL02RN1-R62 C220 5 22uF 35V 1 Transcription B11B-PH-K-S +24V 2 +24VM 4 #:Not Mounted GND 335 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 SC PC Board (11/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D 1 1 +3.3V 001:A3 1 R419 100 nCCHK1 001:A3 (Casette Check Sensor) 3 R420 nRSEN 001:A3 (Resist Sensor) 008:D3 6 R421 100 CN58 nESEN 560.0 2 25V CN14 100 25V *1 A1 100 R468 100 4 47K 5 47K 470 470 R409 R408 R455 47K 6 R456 47K 7 R457 47K 8 R458 47K 9 *1 *1 R414 R422 100 R423 100 nPCHK1 001:A3 TONER 001:A3 47K *1 (Toner Sensor) 50V 50V CN59 B3 B4 A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 B8 GND 47K R461 47K CN4 pPNLCK CN4 pPNLSD CN4 pPNLRD 100pF *1 *1 *1 14 R462 47K 13 R463 47K 12 R464 47K 11 R465 47K GND +5V *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 5 VDD GND IC39 8 TC7SET08FU 3 GND IC39 GND 4 R433 5 100 2 CN14 pPNLSD PNLTXD 7 C245 TC7SET08FU 50V 100pF +5V 47K GND C235 C232 R460 15 1 R429 GND 16 50V +3.3V 100pF 3 100pF 001:D4 B2 A4 47K TC74VHCT245AFT R428 (Paper Check Sensor) A2 A3 R459 25V 47K R454 17 0.1uF R453 *1 +3.3V 4 GND 3 *1 1 CN59 47K *1 2 CN59 R452 *1 +3.3V CN59 TONER GND B1 C239 CN59 nPCHK1 CN4 5 *1 R467 18 2 PNLCLK +5V 5 LDSP1 GND 2 GND C261 +5V GND 4 *1 R469 GND CN14 *DIR[BA] IC41 001:D4 CN14 4 *G 1 B5B-PH-K-M CN4 1 *1 GND (NO PAPER SENSOR) 0.1uF 25V +5V 10 47K PNLDIR +5VP TC74VHCT245AFT R466 pRESET 008:D3 0.1uF GND C244 GND IC41 19 004:D2 CN4 +5VP 3 VCC GND to SNS3 PCB +5V 3 *1 2 CN4 JW54 20 0.1uF C260 50V 100pF C237 50V 50V 100pF C231 GND 100pF *1 2 +5V +5VP 1 C234 CN58 CN14 Q48 4 CN58 1 2 DTC114EKA 10k +5V GND B11B-PH-K-M +5V JW53 001:A3 (Exit Sensor) N.C. PNL I/F 3 10k 2 GND pBATCHK *2 *1 C243 nESEN 330K *BT *1 100 CN58 R432 330K *BT *BT *1 nRSEN BATLVL Mounted when the Battery is used. 2 220K R431 R427 R416 CN58 R413 nCCHK1 CN4 *BT: *1 R410 CN58 B13B-PH-K-M 1 *BT 5 +5V 3 BATIN +5V PNL I/F (for S3000i) *2:Not Mounted as for S3000i. Q49 2SA1037AK *1 47K 47K B6B-PH-K-M 47K *BT (PAPER EXIT SENSOR) *1 *1:Mounted as for S3000i. to SNS4 PCB R437 001:D4 6 100 PNLRXD CN14 pPNLRD 6 +5VP C240 R430 3 50V 100pF 22K 3 GND R438 011:C4 CN14 nPWSAVE 12 C241 2nd Casette I/F +3.3V B7B-PH-K-M 50V 47K 47K 47K R434 006:D4 CN14 CN4 pPNLRST 9 C246 50V 100pF R418 R415 R411 CN66 nWAKUP nWAKUP +5V nPCHK2 CN4 8 100 nWAKUP 3 CN66 nPWSAVE GND CN66 +5V CN4 100pF +24VM 1 +24VM 7 100 nPWSAVE Option 4 R424 100 6 R425 100 R435 nPCHK2 001:A3 001:D3 100 R439 100 9 pPNLRST CN14 pPNLRST 11 C247 nCCHK2 CN66 pADF2 CN66 5 R426 nCCHK2 001:A3 pADF2 008:D3 50V 100pF 100 GND R436 005:B4 10 220 pBZCLK CN14 pBZCLK 7 10 001:A3 CN4 100pF 50V 50V 50V C238 GND 100pF CN66 C236 GND C233 2 100pF nOP 47K CN66 R412 nOP pBZCLK +3.3V 001:A4;002:D4 nBPNT R440 47K R441 100 11 CN14 nBPNT 13 C242 50V CN4 nBPNT 100pF 4 GND 4 GND GND Edition 1.0 336 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 SC PC Board (12/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B +3.3V side C250 JW55 C251 C252 25V 0.1uF 25V 0.1uF C253 25V 0.1uF 002:D3 pSELECT 002:D3 nFAULT 002:D3 pBUSY 002:D3 nACK 002:D3 pPERR 002:D4 nINIT 002:D3 nSTRBE 002:D3 nAUTFD 002:D3 nSELIN DATA[1] 8 DATA[2] 9 DATA[3] 11 DATA[4] 12 DATA[5] 13 DATA[6] 14 DATA[7] 16 DATA[8] 17 DIR *2 A1 4 5 6 20 21 22 23 19 +5V 24 40 38 A4 B4 37 A5 B5 36 A6 B6 35 A7 B7 33 B8 32 A9 Y9 47 A10 Y10 46 A11 Y11 45 A12 Y12 44 A13 Y13 43 A14 C14 29 R443 100 A15 C15 28 R444 100 A16 C16 27 A17 C17 26 PLHin PLH 30 HLHin 25 IC40 2 2 JW67 3 4 JW57 JW68 5 6 JW58 7 JW69 JW59 8 JW70 9 JW60 13 32 JW71 11 JW61 JW72 10 12 JW62 JW73 31 1 JW63 JW74 14 36 JW64 18 GND # GND C254 39 34 15 10 1 R41-2181C JW56 B3 HLH TL32 41 B2 A8 3 B1 GND A3 A2 2 1 Centronics i/f Centronics Connector +5V HD *2:Not Mounted as for S3000i. +5V side 50V 100pF 50V 100pF 48 pBUSOUT VCC VCC 1 D *1:Mounted as for S3000i. 42 31 18 7 74LVX161284MTD 002:D3 25V 0.1uF DATA[8-1] VCC-cable VCC-cable 002:D3 +5V JW75 C255 +3.3V C GND GND 15 D27 33 1 20 2 19 3 18 4 17 5 16 6 15 7 14 34 35 JP22 JP23 17 0 FG 20 21 22 23 24 11 10 16 19 12 9 25 26 74F1071MTC 27 28 29 GND DATA1 CN91 DATA2 CN91 DATA3 CN91 DATA4 CN91 DATA5 CN91 DATA6 CN91 DATA7 CN91 DATA8 CN91 pSLCT CN91 nFAULT CN91 pBUSY CN91 nACK CN91 pPE CN91 nINT CN91 nSTB CN91 nAFTX CN91 nSELIN CN91 PLH CN91 NC NC CN91 CN91 NC CN91 NC CN91 FG CN91 GND CN91 GND CN91 GND CN91 GND CN91 GND CN91 GND CN91 GND CN91 GND CN91 GND CN91 GND CN91 GND CN91 GND CN91 GND 2 0 13 8 CN91 30 #:Not Mounted GND 3 3 *1 Printer Terminal Board i/f to PRTA PCB +3.3V 001:D3 R445 USBENB 2SK680A Q50 1 3 22K 52806-2220 USB i/f 2 22 20 USB Connector 18 67068-0001 002:A1 1 R451 SCANENB 15K DP 27 NF9 4 1% 8 0.1uF 25V C259 2 10 1 19 3 2 CN92 4 D+ 6 2 3 2 CN92 17 D- 21 2 NNCD6.2MF 1 6.2 3 # D28 5pF 50.0V 5pF 50.0V # 12 VBUS PLP3216S121SL2 27 C256 4 DM C257 002:A1 R447 14 CN92 1 1 22uF 16V 0 C258 # JP19 R450 1% R448 R446 33K 1.5K 002:A3 16 # 0 JP20 3 7 5 4 JP21 CN92 9 GND 11 0 GND FG 13 GND 15 Not Mounted CN94 DATA1 CN94 DATA2 CN94 DATA3 CN94 DATA4 CN94 DATA5 CN94 DATA6 CN94 DATA7 CN94 DATA8 CN94 pSLCT CN94 nFAULT CN94 pBUSY CN94 nACK CN94 pPE CN94 nINT CN94 nSTB CN94 nAFTX CN94 nSELIN CN94 PLH 4 CN94 CN94 CN94 CN94 GND Edition 1.0 337 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 SC PC Board (13/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D Option FLASH Memory Card I/F 2M,4M,8M 003:C3;004:C1;005:B1;014:A4 AD[15-1] 004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1,004:D1, AV[22-15] 31 5027 068 030 833 1 004:D4;008:D4 AD[1] 29 AD[2] 28 AD[3] 27 AD[4] 26 AD[5] 25 AD[6] 24 DV[15-0] AD[7] 23 AD[8] 22 AD[9] 12 CN12 A1 CN12 A2 CN12 A3 CN12 A4 CN12 A5 CN12 A6 CN12 A7 CN12 +3.3V AD[10] 47K 1 CN93 *LAN LEDV CN93 CN93 GND LEDV CN93 CN93 GND GND CN93 CN93 GND A16 CN93 CN93 D15 A15 CN93 52 D[14] 57 D[6] 58 D7 A14 CN93 CN93 D14 A13 CN93 CN93 D6 A12 CN93 CN93 D13 A11 CN93 59 D[5] 60 D[12] 61 D[4] 62 CN93 D5 CN93 D12 CN93 D4 A10 CN93 A9 CN93 A21 CN93 *WE CN93 63 Vcc CN93 Vcc *RESET CN93 0.1uF C249 25V 66 D[10] 67 CN93 D11 A20 CN93 CN93 D3 A19 CN93 CN93 D10 A18 CN93 CN93 D2 A17 CN93 69 D[1] 70 D[8] 71 CN93 D9 A8 CN93 CN93 D1 A7 CN93 CN93 D8 A6 CN93 CN93 D0 A5 CN93 72 D[0] 001:D2;002:D1;003:A1;004:A1 nRD CN93 *OE A4 CN93 CN93 GND A3 CN93 CN93 GND A2 CN93 CN93 Vdd A1 CN93 CN93 Vdd Vdd CN93 CN93 A15 Vdd CN93 74 75 GND AD[15] 78 AD[14] 79 AD[13] 80 AD[12] 81 3 AD[10] 83 AD[9] 84 AD[8] 85 AD[7] 86 AD[6] 87 AD[5] 88 AD[4] 89 AD[3] 90 AD[2] 91 A14 *CE CN93 A13 D0 CN93 CN93 A12 D1 CN93 CN93 A11 D2 CN93 +3.3V A10 D3 CN93 CN93 A9 D4 CN93 A8 D5 CN93 CN93 A7 D6 CN93 CN93 A6 D7 CN93 CN93 A5 D8 CN93 CN93 A4 D9 CN93 CN93 A3 D10 CN93 CN93 A2 D11 CN93 CN93 A1 D12 CN93 93 CN93 Vdd D13 CN93 CN93 Vdd D14 CN93 CN93 AEN D15 CN93 94 95 002:A3 nLANC 96 001:D2 LANRDY CN93 0.1uF 25V AV[22] 50 A[12] ARDY *WR CN93 *RD CN93 9 A[11] 10 A[10] DV[0] 11 A[9] DV[1] 31 12 A[21] DV[2] 32 DV[3] 2 DV[4] 3 nRESET GND CN93 GND RESET CN93 A[20] CN93 GND INTR0 CN93 99 A[19] 17 A[18] 18 A[17] (to FROM for Program) AD[15-1] DV[6] 5 DV[7] 6 DV[8] 64 19 A[8] DV[9] 65 20 A[7] DV[10] 66 21 A[6] DV[11] 37 A[5] GND A17 A18 CN12 A19 CN12 A20 CN12 A21 CN12 A22 CN12 GND (Not used A23) CN12 D0 CN12 D1 CN12 D2 CN12 D3 CN12 D4 CN12 D5 2 CN12 D6 CN12 D7 CN12 D8 CN12 D9 CN12 D10 CN12 D11 CN12 23 A[4] DV[13] 39 24 A[3] DV[14] 40 A[2] DV[15] A[1] D12 CN12 D13 CN12 D14 CN12 D15 CN12 *CE1 CN12 *CE2 CN12 *OE CN12 *WEL CN12 *WEH 41 +5V R138 +3.3V 100K 7 42 004:D2 nFROMCV 9 nFROML 30 DD[0] 31 DD[1] 001:D2 004:D1;008:D4 nRDV 15 004:D1;008:D4 nWLV 33 DD[2] 33 DD[3] 34 DD[4] 35 DD[5] 36 DD[6] 37 DD[7] 38 DD[8] 39 DD[9] 40 DD[10] 41 DD[11] 42 DD[12] 43 DD[13] 44 DD[14] 45 DD[15] 59 CN12 *MB4 CN12 RDY/*BSY CN12 *CD CN12 *ID0 CN12 *ID1 CN12 *ID2 16 +3.3V R134 3 100K 36 001:A4 nCDOPT 001:A4 CID0 001:A4 CID1 001:A4 CID2 R135 100K 67 R136 (to LAN Controller) 100K 63 R137 100K 62 44 Card ID Panasonic ID0 ID1 ID2 H L L HP H L H PB H H L Others H H H CN12 nRDD 003:C3;004:C2;005:B2 pLANRST 001:D2 LANINT 001:A3 RSV 45 CN12 RSV CN12 RSV CN12 RSV CN12 +5V 57 60 nWRU_DQMU001:D2;002:A3;003:A1 +5V 17 51 50 GND A16 CN12 38 DV[12] 49 CN93 A15 CN12 4 DV[5] 48 100 A14 CN12 30 001:D3;003:C1;004:A2 CN93 GND 003:C3;004:C1;005:B1;014:C1 GND nWRL_DQML 001:D2;002:A3;003:A1;004:C1 47 CN93 98 CN12 53 46 97 C248 A[13] 32 CN93 A13 48 AV[20] CN93 92 AD[1] 47 29 CN93 (to LAN Controller) 46 AV[19] 28 82 AD[11] AV[18] 8 27 CN93 A12 CN12 19 7 16 A11 CN12 20 49 26 77 14 AV[21] 25 76 AD[15] A[14] 22 73 13 6 15 68 D[9] A[15] 14 65 D[3] A[16] 13 CN93 64 D[2] A10 CN12 GND 5 CN93 AD[14] DD[15-0] 003:C3;004:C4;005:B1 25V 56 D[11] 21 0.1uF +3.3V 10 AD[13] C63 2 AD[12] AV[17] 4 55 D[7] D[13] 8 AV[16] 3 54 (to FROM for Program) AD[11] 001:A1;002:D2;003:A1;004:A1 2 53 D[15] A[23-1] C262 nLANOPT 0.1uF 25.0V FX8C-100P-SV2 51 001:A3 A9 CN12 CN12 to LANB PCB D[15-0] R442 001:A1;002:A2;003:A1;004:A3 A8 CN12 11 +5V LAN Board I/F 1 CN12 +5V CN12 GND CN12 GND CN12 GND CN12 GND CN12 NC CN12 NC CN12 NC CN12 NC CN12 NC CN12 NC CN12 NC CN12 NC 1 34 35 68 GND 4 4 18 GND 43 52 54 55 56 58 61 Edition 1.0 338 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 SC PC Board (14/14) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.3. PNL1 PC Board B D BAT nLED[1-0] SCN_DB[3] 8 SCN_DB[4] 9 SCN_DB[5] 10 SCN_DB[6] 11 SCN_DB[7] GND 35 4.7K P64/*RD 53 LCDE P65/*WR 54 LCDRW P66/*WAIT 55 LCDRS P67/ASTB 56 P36/*SCK31 17 R13 100K P35/SO31 16 R14 100K R23 100K 1 100K SCN_DB[1] 58 P41/AD1 P32 13 R17 100K SCN_DB[2] 59 P42/AD2 P31 12 SCN_DB[3] 60 P43/AD3 P30 11 SCN_DB[4] 61 P44/AD4 SCN_DB[5] 62 47 P45/AD5 P70/TI00/TO0 TL4 SCN_DB[6] 63 P46/AD6 ENERGY SAVER LED1 P71/TI01 48 TL5 49 64 P47/AD7 P73/TI51/TO51 50 TL6 pBZCLK KIN[0] 1 P50/A8 P74/PCL 51 CLKOUT KIN[1] 2 P51/A9 P75/BUZ 52 TLCNT KIN[2] 3 P52/A10 KIN[3] 4 33 P53/A11 P10/ANI0 KIN[4] 5 P11/ANI1 32 P54/A12 P12/ANI2 31 P13/ANI3 30 nPWSW P14/ANI4 29 nAPNT P15/ANI5 28 pSDOOR P16/ANI6 27 nB4 P17/ANI7 26 nWAKUP 6 P55/A13 KIN[6] 7 P56/A14 KIN[7] 8 P57/A15 39 IC 34 (IC) AVREF GND 2 TP1 4.7k 002:A1 0.1W To: SC PCB Q6 DTC143ZKA S11B-PH-K-M 1 +5VP +5V 2 47k 1 +5VP +5VP GND 3 ENERGY SAVER SW1 R27 1 2 1K EVQ11L04M-1 TP2 4 GND R36 C13 GND 1K 5 R30 1K 6 C18 C14 R31 1K R32 1K R33 1K 1 C15 R34 1K +5V +5V GND CN50 pPNLSD CN50 pPNLRD 8 CN50 nPWSAVE CN50 9 nWAKUP R37 1K C20 50.0V 10 CN50 pPNLRST CN50 pBZCLK CN50 nBPNT 3 47k 4 3 11 1K C21 50.0V 2 100K *1 SNCMN2 1 3 1 2 RPI-352 PC4 4 GND R21 100K 0.1W R20 R19 0.1W RPI-352 PC1 Q2 DTC143ZKA 1 68 4.7k *1 2 R35 0.01uF 100 100K 1 3 2 CN50 0.01uF nBPNT +5V SNCMN1 4 R18 KIN[7-0] R10 470 002:A1 +5VP 0.1W +5VP R9 SCN_DB[7-0] +5VP (Vpp) GND 002:A1 50.0V 0.01uF GND 0.125W 0 7 0.01uF 50.0V 0.01uF JP2 50.0V 50.0V 0.01uF 470 LMP202C10-FR +5V CN50 100K R29 50.0V 0.01uF R11 16 GND CN50 +5V GND GND C19 15 CN50 (for FG strap) 13 14 2 220 +5V 12 002:A1 pLEDCT0 +5VP R25 2 1 LN376GCPX-2UT 3 pLEDCT1 0.1uF 100K R16 1 R15 14 25.0V 15 P33 2 2 P34/SI31 P40/AD0 4.7K C23 P03/INTP3/ADTRG KIN[5] Q8 2SA1037AK 560.0 3 R43 TL3 P72/TI50/TO50 Q9 2SA1037AK 560.0 3 2 +5V 0.1uF nPWSAVE 57 VSS0 7 23 1 R44 46 9 SCN_DB[2] P25/ASCK0 0.1W GND 6 PNLTXD SCN_DB[0] JP1 0 PNLRXD 22 AVSS C9 V5 SCN_DB[1] 16.0V VIN SCN_DB[0] 5 21 P24/TxD0 100K 22.0uF VDD 4 0.1uF VSS LCDE P23/RxD0 +5V R24 GND 2 DB7 10 C8 DB6 R3 P22/*SCK30 20 10K DB5 3 3 25.0V DB4 LCDRW C7 DB3 LCDRS 10 750 DB2 10 R2 R4 DB1 R1 2 19 1 P02/INTP2 P21/SO30 25.0V 45 100K 18 2 P01/INTP1 1 R12 P20/SI30 100K 44 R5 E DB0 1 IC1 SNSCT SCN_DB[7] RS *RESET P00/INTP0 TL2 IC4 XT2 36 nPWDWN 43 TL1 LCD MODULE uPD780022A 37 Q4 DTC143ZKA R28 0 GND R/W XT1 4.7k 2 50.0V R45 15pF PST9339U 3 GND 25 2 2 X2 38 VSS1 GND 40 42 R6 3 AVDD 10 G 2 3 4.7K VOUT 50.0V NC 50.0V DT-26-32.768KHz-7.3PF 32.768KHz 100pF 25.0V 0.1uF C3 1 X1 C2 X1 2 50.0V 12pF 4 25.0V 47k CST8.00MTW 8MHz 1 C1 24 VDD0 1 41 X2 VDD1 GND 1 nLED[0] 1 GND GND VCC Q3 DTC143ZKA 47k 0.22F Gold Capacitor C11 4.7k 0.1uF 1 IC2 5.5V 2 22.0uF C16 16.0V Q1 DTC143ZKA 2 C5 1 47k +5VP nLED[1] 1000pF 4.7k 002:A1 3 1 C12 0.01uF 50.0V 3 2 A 2 MA748 RN5VD20A 3 K 3 100 CD GND C6 # R8 50.0V 25.0V 0.1uF # +5VP D1 NC 1 OUT 5 C4 1 BAT 1000pF VDD C10 2 NC R7 # IC3 4 10K BAT C17 #:Not Mounted C 22.0uF C22 16.0V A 4 3 *1 : table-1 2 RPI-352 PC2 RPI-352 PC3 4 3 4 A4 scanning B4 scanning PC2 Not Mounted Mounted Sensor R18 Mounted 68 Not Mounted 1 GND GND GND GND GND A-POINT Edition 1.0 B4 339 S-DOOR B-POINT Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 PNL1 PC Board (1/2) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A 001:D2 pLEDCT1 001:D2 pLEDCT0 001:D1 nLED[1-0] 001:A4 SCN_DB[7-0] 001:A4 KIN[7-0] B C D SCN_DB[7] 3 MA786 1 D9 SCN_DB[6] 3 MA786 1 D8 SCN_DB[5] 3 MA786 1 D7 SCN_DB[4] 3 MA786 1 D6 SCN_DB[3] 3 MA786 1 D5 SCN_DB[2] 3 MA786 1 D4 3 MA786 1 D3 3 MA786 1 D2 SCN_DB[1] 1 SCN_DB[0] 1 *2 : MEMORY REDIAL/ INTERNET FLASH 09/O STAMP 06/Y ON LINE 13/S RESOLUTION INTERNET PAUSE SW2 SW8 SW14 SW22 SW30 SW38 SW46 SW54 *2 LED2 1 : Not Mounted DX-800 : Mounted KSCN[7] KSCN[6] KSCN[5] KSCN[4] KSCN[3] KSCN[2] *2 KSCN[1] KSCN[0] UF-L7 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 R38 2 2 1 LN376GCPX-2UT EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 *2 LED4 0.1W 220 R40 2 1 0.1W 220 LN376GCPX-2UT EVQ11L04M-1 KIN[0] nLED[0] ABBR 2 SW3 MONITOR SW9 SW15 10/P SW23 07/U SW31 03/E SW39 STAMP 02/W SW47 ALARM LED3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 LED21 R39 2 2 1 0.1W 220 R41 2 LN376GCPX-2UT EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 2 SW55 EVQ11L04M-1 1 0.1W 220 LN28RPX EVQ11L04M-1 KIN[1] nLED[1] 20/L SW16 1 SW24 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 2 SW40 1 EVQ11L04M-1 05/T 17/H SW32 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 12/A SW48 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 SW56 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 2 EVQ11L04M-1 KIN[2] 08/I 04/R 18/J *3 : Jumper used net list CONTRAST net name SW17 1 SW25 2 1 SW33 2 SW41 1 2 1 SW49 2 1 Ref.No. of jumpers net name Ref.No. of jumpers SW57 2 1 2 JW3 +5V JW19 10mm JW21 10mm 10mm JW13 pSDOOR JW44 0.125W 0 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 KIN[3] nBPNT 19/K 16/G 15/F SNCMN2 24/C DIR.SEARCH 1 SW10 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 +5VP SW18 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 SW26 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 SW34 2 SW42 1 EVQ11L04M-1 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 SW50 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 JW22 10mm JW23 10mm JW28 10mm SW58 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 10mm JW26 10mm 10mm JW29 3 SW4 JW18 SW1_nPWSW JW41 (E.SAVER) 2 JW42 0.125W 0 SCN[4] EVQ11L04M-1 KIN[4] 3 JW31 10mm JW30 10mm JW25 10mm JW24 10mm JW20 10mm JW27 10mm JW32 10mm JW34 10mm JW35 10mm JW33 10mm JW14 10mm 0.125W 0 JW43 0.125W SCN[5] 0 START P2/- 14/D 27/N 23/X GND SW5 1 SW11 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 SW19 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 SW27 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 SW35 2 SW43 1 EVQ11L04M-1 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 SW51 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 JW12 10mm JW15 10mm JW16 10mm SCN[6] SW59 2 1 EVQ11L04M-1 2 SCN[7] LED1_K EVQ11L04M-1 10mm JW17 (E.SAVER) KIN[5] JW48 0.125W 0 COPY/ SET 21/@ P3/SPACE 28/M 22/Z 26/B JW49 0.125W 0 SW6 SW12 SW20 SW28 SW36 SW44 SW52 JW50 SW60 (STAMP) 0.125W 0 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 LED4_A 2 (MEMORY/ JW61 0 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 INTERNET) JW62 EVQ11L04M-1 LED3_A nLED[0] 0 KIN[6] 4 JW1 nAPNT STOP 11/SYMBOL CLEAR P4/SHIFT P1/. 25/V 1 SW13 2 1 PC1_K SW21 2 1 SW29 2 1 SW37 2 SW45 1 2 1 SW53 2 1 SW61 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 EVQ11L04M-1 2 EVQ11L04M-1 1 JW11 10mm 2 EVQ11L04M-1 pBZCLK (A-POINT) nB4 EVQ11L04M-1 4 01/Q FUNCTION SW7 nLED[1] PNLRXD JW2 JW47 0.125W 0 PNLTXD JW45 0.125W 0 JW46 0.125W 0 KIN[7] Edition 1.0 340 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 PNL1 PC Board (2/2) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.4. MJR PC Board A B C # D # C107 Not Mounted # # L8 # UF1717V282Y0R5 L4 5 FL05RD200A 6 ARG 1 2 RA-391M-C6-Y VA2 VA4 # *1 ARG1 *1 # *1 (VA4 or VA2) # *1 LHL08NB332J 2 3 (VA9 or VA8) L2(T) CN28 N.C.(No Pin) CN28 L1(R) 1 +5VP1 JW11 +24V 8 2 CN29 +5VP 3 CN29 GND CN29 pCMLD CN29 pCTON 2 1 12 4 +V 3 +24V CN29 +5VP 5 JW12 B6B-PH-K-S +24V 9 10 2 0 CN28 to SC PCB (CN18) FG *1 L7 3 250.0V 2 4 0.033uF 1 RL1 ATXD20428 CN20 JW1 NF3 1 -V T1 4 FL05RD200A 1 B2(3)B-PH-K-S JW8 CN20 3 DSSA-P3100SB CN20 to SC PCB (CN18) L3 VA12 CN20 L1(R) JW3 2 1 2 DSS-401M-S00B CN20 L2(T) 0.033uF LHL08NB272J 1 2 RA-391M-C6-Y VA8 CN20 JW2 VA9 T2 1 1 2 DSS-401M-S00B 1 R41-1396C C106 LINE 250.0V 0.033uF C108 250.0V GND Table USA mode VA4,VA9 or VA2,VA8 RA-391M-C6-Y or DSS-401M-S00B JP1 Not Mounted JP2 JP3 JP4 1 RA-501M-C6-Y or DSS-601M-S00B MA152A 3 3 Not Mounted Mounted Not Mounted 2 DTC143ZKA Q10 Mounted Mounted Not Mounted D3 EU mode 4 1 Mounted GND 5 # *1 L2 JW4 *1 JP3 VA10 1 FL05RD200A D6 2 3 3 RD3.6M T2 CN21 T1 CN21 CN21 4 CN21 1 MA152A +5VP1 3 4 5 # * Not Mounted # # L12 1 4 PC1 PC814A 2 # R127 3 6 0.25W Mounted *2 when moduler jack connector for Ext.TEL is mounted on CN21. *4 pHKOF +5VP1 +5VP2 7 # Mounted *3 or *4 when the function, the hook-up detection of the handset in the saving energy mode. And *5 mounted jamper when not having this function. 1 2 VCC IN1 IN2 *4 complies with the standard of the insertion loss in a certain destinations. OUT1 6 5 OUT2 4 AOUT TL1 GND IC20 THS-56F 3 GND1 # +5VP1 JW10 2 1 4 IC22 TC7S00F 5 VCC GND 3 IC22 TC7S00F JW9 # # * Not Mounted GND1 DX-600 / 800 341 4 # Model Edition 1.0 CN29 18 * Not Mounted *2 *3,*4,*5 FL05RD200A 6 # 220uF C100 FL05RD200A # # *3,*4 JW6 # L11 2 JW7 # 1 NV390D05 CN21 3 3.83V 2 R41-1396A CN21 5 *3 VA13 # 3 VR61SS 6 *2 EXT. TEL 2 2 RD3.6M 10K *3,*4,*5 # JP4 0 D5 PC2 PC817B 3 10K 0.25W D9 0.25W R117 R131 R116 JP2 4 25.0V 4 *1 10V CN23 FL05RD200A 3 1 0.1uF CN23 # JP11 C183 CN23 # JP1 0.25W T1 *1 270 3 CN23 JW5 R125 T2 L1 2 NV390D05 CN23 0 1uF 1 VA11 CN23 0.25W R41-1396A +5VP1 JW13 250V 4.7K C103 EXT. TEL/Handset GND Drawing Name MJR PC Board (1/1) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.5. SNS1 PC Board A B C D 1 1 B3B-PH-K-M 3 CN80 LDSC1 CN80 GND CN80 nCCHK1 CN81 nCCHK1 CN81 GND CN81 nRSEN CN81 LDRE 2 2 to SNS2 2 1 1 2 3 1 to SNS4 4 3 CNA1003H01ME PC1 3 2 B4B-PH-K-M 4 3 4 Edition 1.0 4 342 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 SNS1 PC Board (1/1) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.6. SNS2 PC Board A B C D 1 2 1 1 2 3 CNA1003H01ME PC1 2 4 B3B-PH-K-M 1 CN82 nCCHK1 CN82 GND CN82 LDSC1 2 3 Edition 1.0 to SNS1 (LPC) 3 3 4 4 343 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 SNS2 PC Board (1/1) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.7. SNS3 PC Board A B C D 1 1 to LPC 2 to TONER CN83 CN83 CN83 CN83 CN83 5 +5V 4 TONER 3 GND 2 LDSP1 1 nPCHK1 +5V 3 TONER 2 GND 1 2 CN84 CN84 CN84 B3B-PH-K-S B5B-PH-K-M 3 3 3 1 4 2 CNA1003H01ME PC1 4 Edition 1.0 4 344 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 SNS3 PC Board (1/1) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.8. SNS4 PC Board A B C D 1 1 B6B-PH-K-M B2B-PH-K-S +5V 5 1 +5V CN87 CN86 4 6 2 CN86 250mW 68 R1 To: THERMISTOR 2 THERM CN87 To: 1/4W 2 nESEN CN87 PAPER EXIT SENSOR SC PCB (CN58) 3 1 4 2 CNA1003H01ME PC1 B4B-PH-K-M LDRE 4 nCCHK1 1 nRSEN 3 CN85 3 1 nCCHK1 3 nRSEN CN87 CN85 CN87 GND GND CN87 To: TIMING SENSOR CN85 2 3 (CN81) 2 CN85 GND 4 Edition 1.0 4 345 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 SNS4 PC Board (1/1) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.9. CCD PC Board A B C D 1 1 +5V +5V 2 2 3 3 4 4 Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 346 Drawing Name CCD PC Board (1/1) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.10. ILS PC Board A B C D 1 1 2 2 S2(3)B-PH-K-S 1 +24V CN73 NC NC COM COM NO NO To: SC PCB AVM3958 SW101 (CN57) NC NC 3 3 +24VD COM COM 3 NO CN73 NO AVM3958 SW102 4 4 Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 347 Drawing Name ILS PC Board (1/1) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.11. ACI PC Board A B C D 1 1 AC Inlet 2 2 NC-179-L3A Harness, ACI 1 FBS8701 AC (L) CN1 ACH1 (Black) 1 CN2 FG (G) 2 ACH1 (White) 2 CN2 3 To: Power Supply Unit CN1 (CN101) AC (N) CN1 FG Strap 3 3 FBS8702 FG1 1 CN3 FG 4 4 Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 348 Drawing Name ACI PC Board (1/1) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.12. Power Supply Unit A B C D 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 349 Drawing Name HVPS (1/4) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 350 Drawing Name HVPS (2/4) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 351 Drawing Name HVPS (3/4) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 352 Drawing Name HVPS (4/4) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Model DX-600 / 800 Edition 1.0 353 Drawing Name LVPS (1/1) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.13. LANB PC Board A B C D4 1 +3.3V +3.3VA D +5V 2 +3.3VA 3 BAV99LT1 +3.3V AGND *SRDY 0 R15 50.0V 10pF C11 TX- NC NC2 RD+ RX+ RDC RXC RD- RX- NC1 NC3 8 12 11 7 13 7 6 5 6 5 9 11K 3 1 6 R23 7 8 +3.3V R7 # R24 AGND 0.1W CN97 NC (No Pin) 75 0.1W 75 RX- 0.1W 24.9 +5V 2 2 BAV99LT1 47K 3 47K CN97 2 GND 0 9 1 10 11 ACTIVITY CN97 +5V CN97 LINK +3.3V 12 R19 +3.3V JP1 0.1W 6 100 R20 GND 7 TL30 +3.3V 1 3 2 GND CS VCC IC2 0.0 DI SK AGND # TP1 DO FG GND 5298T(molex) 4 GND 5 FM93C46LM8 AT93C46-10SC-2.7 1 TL31 C20 VDD OSC1 OUT CONT 74 NC 0.1uF 25V 25MHz 4 3 NC 0.1uF 25V JP2 0 2 0 8 C10 # 1 21 CN97 1 GND 25 5 RX+ AGND R12 D1 TX- CN97 # GND 0.0625W TX+ CN97 R18 R17 250.0V C14 C12 R22 4 CN97 1000pF 10pF C8 24.9 0.01uF R10 24.9 50.0V 0.1W +3.3VA 0.1W 0.1W R9 X25OUT TX25 RX25 MCLK MDO MDI RX_ER RX_DV *CSOUT TL29 0.0625W 0 24 15 *ADS GND 2 AT93C46-10SC-2.7 GND DSO751SV(25.000MHz) JP1 64wordX16bit Mounted 128wordX8bit Not Mounted 3 JP2 Not Mounted Mounted GND D31 D30 D29 51 52 50 TRANSMIT TL8 TL11 TL14 TL16 TL18 TL22 TL24 TL10 TL13 TL15 TL17 TL20 TL23 TL25 TD+ 16 10 TX+ TDC 14 12 TXC TD- 15 11 TX- RECEIVE RD+ 1 7 RX+ DD[15] DD[14] DD[13] DD[12] DD[11] DD[10] DD[9] DD[8] DD[7] DD[6] DD[5] DD[4] DD[3] DD[2] DD[1] DD[0] TL6 D28 AGND TL4 002:C4 COL100 *VLBUS LCLK 109 GND 14 R6 TL28 110 D27 TL2 30 # 119 53 45 *CYCLE D26 39 23 105 55 44 *RDYRTN 56 47K 22 95 D25 42 GND D24 R3 *DATACS W/*R TD- 10 20 69 57 37 19 59 D23 3 +3.3V *LDEV TXC R11 17 54 58 48 8 3 16 41 D22 38 1 2 26 D21 47K (RESET:High Active) 60 36 RESET 61 GND TL1 (INTR0:High Active) D20 R2 47 INTR0 62 25.0V 0.022uF XTAL2 (ARDY:Low Active) D19 32 1K C1 ARDY D18 pLANRST *WR 63 002:C4 R1 XTAL1 65 pLANINT *RD D17 002:C4 31 2 0 D16 40 nLANRDY 3 AGND TX+ TDC H1012 A15 66 002:A4 EESK EECS A14 D15 34 002:C4nWRU_DQMU LAN91C111-NC A13 67 nRDD EEDI 68 33 A12 D14 94 EEDO 70 93 AD[15] A11 71 92 AD[14] ENEEP IC1 D13 AD[13] A10 D12 91 IOSO2 D11 AD[12] IOSO1 A9 72 90 A8 D10 AD[11] IOSO 73 89 A7 75 88 AD[10] LEDB D9 AD[9] (LEDB:LINK) A6 D8 87 A5 77 AD[8] LEDA 78 86 (LEDA:ACTIVITY) 76 85 AD[7] A4 D7 AD[6] A3 D6 84 RBAIS 101 83 AD[5] *CNTRL D4 82 AD[4] A1 A2 D5 AD[3] LBK 102 81 *LNK (AEN:Low Active) 103 AD[2] CRS100 TXEN100 TXD0 TXD1 TXD3 TXD2 RXD0 RXD1 RXD2 RXD3 AVDD VDD 002:C4 80 TPI- D3 2 AD[1] AEN D2 AD[15-1] TPI+ 104 nLANC 002:A4 106 002:A4 GND 43 *BE0 1 D2 BAV99LT1 +5V 2 AGND TPO(BE1,0=L:word access) 107 96 4 TD+ 50.0V BAV99LT1 D3 TPO+ *BE2 *BE1 49.9 R14 3 *BE3 D1 97 108 98 D0 99 0.1W # 1 +3.3V 49.9 TL26 TL27 15 24.9 27 128 127 TL19 TL21 114 121 118 113 115 117 116 125 126 124 123 18 13 122 79 112 100 64 3 46 35 TL3 TL5 TL7 TL9 TL12 GND 50.0V R13 GND T1 16 14 C21 AGND to LANC PCB S7(8-4)B-PH-K-S 4 0.1uF 25V 49 0.1uF 25V C6 111 C5 47K 120 0.1uF 25V R5 29 C4 25V 0.1uF 28 1 0.1uF 25V 10pF C7 C3 R4 3.3 47K 0 0 R28 0 R27 0 R26 R25 R21 0.1W 0.1W +3.3V DD[15-0] 5 RXC 4 1CT:1 Edition 1.0 354 4 RD- 2 6 RX- RDC 3 1CT:1CT Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 LANB PC Board (1/2) APR 2002 DX-600/800 A B C D +5V SC I/F +3.3V 55 D[7] 56 D[14] 57 D[6] 58 D[13] 59 D[5] 60 D[12] 61 D[4] 62 63 25V C18 2 0.1uF 64 002:C2 D[11] 65 D[3] 66 D[10] 67 D[2] 68 D[9] 69 D[1] 70 D[8] 71 D[0] 72 73 nRD 74 75 76 77 AD[15-1] GND 3 78 AD[15] AD[14] 79 AD[13] 80 AD[12] 81 AD[11] 82 AD[10] 83 AD[9] 84 AD[8] 85 AD[7] 86 AD[6] 87 AD[5] 88 AD[4] 89 AD[3] 90 AD[2] 91 AD[1] 92 93 +3.3V 94 nLANRDY 96 97 22uF C9 98 99 100 CN96 GND GND CN96 CN96 GND A16 CN96 CN96 D15 A15 CN96 CN96 D7 A14 CN96 CN96 D14 A13 CN96 CN96 D6 A12 CN96 CN96 D13 A11 CN96 CN96 D5 A10 CN96 CN96 D12 A9 CN96 CN96 D4 A21 CN96 CN96 Vcc *WE CN96 CN96 Vcc *RESET CN96 CN96 D11 A20 CN96 CN96 D3 A19 CN96 CN96 D10 A18 CN96 CN96 D2 A17 CN96 CN96 D9 A8 CN96 CN96 D1 A7 CN96 CN96 D8 A6 CN96 CN96 D0 A5 CN96 CN96 *OE A4 CN96 CN96 GND A3 CN96 CN96 GND A2 CN96 CN96 Vdd A1 CN96 CN96 Vdd Vdd CN96 CN96 A15 Vdd CN96 CN96 A14 *CE CN96 CN96 A13 D0 CN96 CN96 A12 D1 CN96 CN96 A11 D2 CN96 CN96 A10 D3 CN96 CN96 A9 D4 CN96 CN96 A8 D5 CN96 CN96 A7 D6 CN96 CN96 A6 D7 CN96 CN96 A5 D8 CN96 CN96 A4 D9 CN96 CN96 A3 D10 CN96 CN96 A2 D11 CN96 CN96 A1 D12 CN96 CN96 Vdd D13 CN96 CN96 Vdd D14 CN96 CN96 AEN D15 CN96 CN96 ARDY *WR CN96 CN96 GND *RD CN96 CN96 GND RESET CN96 CN96 GND INTR0 CN96 CN96 GND GND CN96 1 A[21-1] 2 3 A[21-1] 002:C3 GND 4 A[16] 5 A[15] 6 A[14] 7 A[13] 8 A[12] 9 A[11] 10 A[10] 11 A[9] 12 A[21] 13 +3.3V JW5 # 13 002:A2 28 nRD 11 R16 #1 A[20] 16 A[19] 17 A[18] 18 A[17] 19 A[8] 20 A[7] 21 A[6] 22 A[5] 23 A[4] 24 A[3] 25 A[2] 26 A[1] 1K 12 62.5mW 14 #1 C13 25.0V 0.022uF GND +3.3V 27 PROGRAM for LAN 28 FROM 16M 29 30 DD[0] 31 DD[1] 32 DD[2] 33 DD[3] 34 DD[4] 35 DD[5] 36 DD[6] 37 DD[7] 38 DD[8] 39 DD[9] 40 DD[10] 41 DD[11] 42 DD[12] 43 DD[13] 44 DD[14] 45 DD[15] 47 26 14 15 37 #1:Not mounted (Program FROM in SC Board) FROM JP4 16Mbit Not Mounted 32Mbit Mounted A[1] 25 A[2] 24 A[3] 23 A[4] 22 A[5] 21 A[6] 20 A[7] 19 A[8] 18 A[9] 8 A[10] 7 A[11] 6 A[12] 5 A[13] 4 A[14] 3 A[15] 2 A[16] 1 A[17] 48 A[18] 17 A[19] 16 A[20] 9 A[21] # JP4 10 0 VCC NC *BYTE IC3 #1 90.0ns #1 *CE *OE *WE RY/BY *RESET DQ0 NC DQ1 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 A10 DQ12 A11 DQ13 A12 DQ14 A13 DQ15 A14 15 29 TL32 D[0] 31 D[1] 33 D[2] 35 D[3] 38 D[4] 40 D[5] 42 D[6] 44 D[7] 30 D[8] 32 D[9] 34 D[10] 36 D[11] 39 D[12] 41 D[13] 43 D[14] 45 D[15] 2 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 3 NC GND GND 46 002:C1 27 A[21-1] GND 002:A1 46 D[15-0] nWRU_DQMU 001:A3 47 48 49 50 nRDD 001:A3 pLANRST 001:A3 pLANINT 001:A3 2 C2 25V 001:A3 95 0.1uF nLANC 1 16V 001:A2 CN96 25V D[15] CN96 +5V 0.1uF 54 GND D[15-0] +5V GND C15 002:C3 *LAN CN96 MBM29LV160B-90PFTN-SFKS 53 CN96 0 52 A[21-1] 51 1 JP3 C19 FX8C-100S-SV5 1 0.1uF 25V to SC PCB DD[15-0] 001:A4 GND GND 4 001:A2 Edition 1.0 4 AD[15-1] 355 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 LANB PC Board (2/2) APR 2002 DX-600/800 10.14. LANC PC Board A B C D 1 1 To:LANB PCB(CN97) RJ-45 B4B-PH-K-S 2 TM11R-5C-88 4 TX+ CN200 TX- CN200 RX+ CN200 RX- CN200 1 3 CN201 TX+ CN201 TX- CN201 RX+ 2 2 3 1 2 4 CN201 5 CN201 To:LANB PCB(CN97) 6 B3B-PH-K-S CN201 3 ACTIVITY 3 K A 7 CN202 CN201 BVH-410G1G LED2 R2 270 0.25W 2 +5V CN202 LINK CN202 RX- 8 CN201 1 K A 3 BVH-410G1G LED1 R1 270 0.25W TP1 TW-4BS-2K FG 4 Edition 1.0 4 356 Model Drawing Name DX-600 / 800 LANC PC Board (1/1) APR 2002 memo DZZSM00184-0

Dx-600 / 800

Rating

Date

Size

Views

Categories

Share

Transcript

Forgot your password?.